JP2020074890A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: In a game machine 10, if passage of a game ball 99 through accessory continuous operation gates G1, G2 provided in moving passages R1, R2 is detected when a condition device is operated, an accessory continuous operation devices is operated and a jackpot game is started. A rotary generator device 60 for delaying passage of a game ball 99 in the accessory continuous operation game G2 when the game ball 99 is shot to the second moving passage R2, is provided in an upstream side of the accessory continuous operation gate G2 in the second moving passage R2. In the game machine 10, a jackpot game is executed if the jackpot game is executable when passage of the game ball 99 is detected in the accessory continuous operation gate G2. Mutual movement of the game ball 99 is limited by a branch part 48 and a separation nail 481 between the first moving passage R1 and the second moving passage R2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of setting values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Also, in the jackpot game, the condition device is activated when the game informing that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is finished, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated on condition that the condition device is operated. It is carried out by

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-024234 JP, 2015-212860, A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game to improve the player's willingness to play.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of interest and interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
Movement limiting means (48, 481) for limiting the mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2),
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball-in part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the second ball-in part. And a discharge part (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward the sphere region (G2),
The special game generation means (41) executes a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2), and then executes the special operation. It is characterized by generating a game.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a development view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine shown in FIG. The perspective view which shows an example of the opening / closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, a clune device, and a game ball retention part. The perspective view of a klune device. Sectional drawing which follows the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. The 7-segment display section displays a specific period during which the game balls are retained in the game ball retention unit, a predetermined period in which the number of game balls that have entered the special out nozzle of the clune device is accumulated, and specific information indicating a non-set value. The figure for demonstrating a regulation period. 10A is a sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10B and 10C are sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit, and FIG. 11C. Is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main control device of the game machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display device of a main controller. The figure which shows the example of a display on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The figure which shows the example of a display in the setting value display part of a performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the starting winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st hold command setting process performed by the starting winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start process performed by the variation game control process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a display order setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. The figure which shows an example of the numerical display order determination table referred by the display order setting process of FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table and variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 37. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40. The figure for demonstrating the 7 segment display part control-information storage area set to a voice lamp control device. The figure for demonstrating the control example of a segment display part, and the update example of a 7-segment display part control-information storage area. The figure for demonstrating the control example of a 7 segment display part. The figure for demonstrating the update example of a 7 segment display part control-information storage area. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of ending additional image control processing executed in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG. 40. The figure which shows the example of a screen transition in the ending effect of a jackpot game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 48. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of ending additional image control processing executed in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG. 48. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display order setting process performed with the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the table referred by the display order setting process of FIG. The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the game machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the voice lamp control device of the game machine shown in FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process performed by the operation detection process of FIG. A table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status. The figure which shows the example of a screen shift in a symbol display part in a standby state. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of standby state screen shift processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of standby state screen shift processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby state screen transition processing of FIG. 62. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64. The figure which shows the example of turning on / off in a lamp display part. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. The figure for demonstrating the update example of the 7 segment display part control-information storage area set to a voice lamp control device. It is a figure showing an example of screen shift in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen in the ending production of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board shown in FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view showing a klune device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 72. FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view taken along a portion corresponding to the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. 74 in the game board shown in FIG. 72. FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 72. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sensor detection process in the main timer interruption process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game process performed by the main process of FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a condition device operation process executed in the main process of FIG. 78. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interruption process performed with a voice lamp control device. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 81. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game explanation production process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows the example of a display screen in the symbol display part in game explanation production. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game explanation production process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion production process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the game classification determination table and initial point determination table which are used by the audio lamp control device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion production process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion production process performed by the audio lamp control device of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 90 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggesting effect process of the seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 90 (B) is an example of the compensation point determination table used by the voice lamp control device. Fig. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 92 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92 (B) is a perspective view of a rotating body provided on the game board. The figure for demonstrating the function of a rotating body. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interruption process performed with a voice lamp control device. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 94. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a rotary body operation control process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 94. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board shown in FIG. 97 for demonstrating the function of a distribution member. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interruption process performed with a voice lamp control device. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 99. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 99. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board for demonstrating the modification of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 9th Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, the first to ninth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. In addition, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of a gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and up-down expressions used in this embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. It is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 14. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine, but other types of gaming machines such as a spinning-body gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 is provided with operation buttons 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination portion 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later according to whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is executed in response to an operation on the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation acceptance period in a variable game effect executed in a variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is clearly shown to the player. It is operated to execute the operation button effect.

  The operation button 20 is not limited to being installed in front of the upper plate 23 but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives the operation of the touch key by the player is provided. The operation button 20 may be equipped with a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect or the like.

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle that the player operates to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a game ball launching mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength according to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, and stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in one row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used to store the excess game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speaker 26 is a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and executes a voice output effect of outputting a voice. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. In addition, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect in a blinking manner such as a lighting color, lighting or extinction.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having the left end portion rotatably supported by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launching mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. In addition, in FIG. 2, the illustration on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of the illustration.

  The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34, a main display unit 36, a clune device 37, a game ball retention unit 38, and a 7-segment display unit 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. To be done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is drive-controlled according to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches the game ball using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Then, on the back surface side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of the game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, so that an out ball sensor 318a to be described later. (See FIG. 12). In addition, the variable winning a prize port 316 is provided in the central portion on the right side of the game board 31, and a game ball hit in the right area of the game board 31 can enter. The game ball that has passed through the penetrating portion 316b of the variable winning port 316 is guided to the clune device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched in the right side area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and the passage of the game ball at the through gate 317 is detected, and thus the second winning opening A normal win lottery is executed to determine whether or not to open 315.

  The ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out. The detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out game balls according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of a game ball entering by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as a winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of shot game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism 32 onto the game board 31.

  Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) confirms that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered a special out ball mouth 373 of the clune device 37 described later. The special out ball detection command shown is set, and this special out ball detection command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

  The ball-in sensors 313a to 317a, the out-ball sensor 318a, and the special out-ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the ball-in of the game ball by another detection method. Any sensor may be used.

  In addition, the second winning port 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electric role) 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the second winning port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, on the game board 31, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening 315 by opening the electric winning object 315b, and enter the game ball into the second winning opening 315 by closing the electric winning object 315b. The ball is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning a prize opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 319 for switching whether or not there is a restriction of entering a game ball into the variable winning a prize opening 316. The opening / closing door 319 is opened / closed by a driving unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening and closing door 319 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning port 316, and the opening and closing door 319 closes the game ball to the variable winning port 316. It The opening / closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable winning port 316 is opened in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is otherwise waited at a position where the variable winning port 316 is closed. As a result, the variable winning port 316 can enter the game ball 99 launched in the right area of the game board 31 in the round game in the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening / closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of mounting portions 319d for rotatably mounting the opening / closing door 319 to the game board 31, and projects slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening / closing door 319 is in the operating position. . As a result, when the opening / closing door 319 is in the operating position, the opening / closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 that is launched into the right side area of the game board 31. The pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a and prevent the game ball 99 received by the base 319a from spilling from the left and right of the base 319a. In addition, the pair of guides 319c guides the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning port 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning port 316 and form a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. In addition, the variable winning port 316 has a penetrating portion 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. The penetrating portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 is inserted into the variable winning a prize port 316 and guided to the clune device 37 via the penetration portion 316b and the guide path 316c. A ball entry sensor 316a is provided on the guideway 316c. As a result, the game ball 99 that has entered the variable winning port 316 is detected when passing through the penetrating portion 316b and being introduced into the guide path 316c. The ball entrance sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. Thereby, the detection result of the ball entrance sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning port 316.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 carries out a jackpot lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In addition, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general prize hole 313 is 10, the number of prize balls when entering the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315 is 3, and the variable prize hole 316 is entered. The number of prize balls in the case of doing is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed by the main control unit 331 is a big hit, it shifts to a big hit game state (special game state) and the variable winning a prize port 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  In addition, when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the jackpot lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is a winning result, a predetermined jackpot gaming state, which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, is entered. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning port 316 is opened five times until a predetermined time elapses or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) of game balls is won in the variable winning port 316. It is a game state including the open / close execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and it is expected that a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state, rather than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a game state that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display portion 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display portion 341, the variable display effect of the decorative symbol according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the entry into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. , And various image effects such as a variable game effect executed with the variable display effect. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the variable display effect of the decorative design in the design display unit 341 is, for example, by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative designs with numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc. Done. It should be noted that sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-designs, and there are nine types of decorative designs, “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variation game, after the variation display time set in advance from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341, the variation display of the ornamental symbols is executed so that the variation of all the ornamental symbols is stopped. To be done. More specifically, in the variable display of the decorative pattern, first, all the decorative patterns are changed along a preset changing direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the changes of the plurality of decorative patterns are stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative pattern on all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends.

  When the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341 is finished, the state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative pattern clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R regular jackpot", a state in which decorative patterns of the same type are lined up on the activated line is displayed, and it is clearly a jackpot. To be done. Further, the jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of decorative patterns on the activated line, but it is not always explicitly indicated. Specifically, for example, in the case where the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a symbol combination indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot among the decorative designs is set, for example, a symbol combination of "777" is lined up on the activated line. Is displayed, or a state in which the same combination of decorative patterns other than “777” is lined up on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", a state in which a symbol combination such as "333" which is set in advance as a symbol combination showing a 5R probability variable jackpot is displayed on the activated line is displayed. Or, a state in which the combination of the same decorative patterns other than the combination of the symbols indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot such as “777” or “333” is lined up on the activated line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of decorative symbols showing a probability jackpot such as "222" or "444" set in advance as a symbol combination showing a regular jackpot among the decorative symbols. The same decorative pattern combination of is displayed in a line on the activated line. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, a state in which a combination of different decorative patterns is lined up on the activated line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  Further, in the symbol display portion 341, a variation game effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is displayed together with the variation display of the decorative symbol in the variation game. When the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", when a state in which a jackpot pattern combination other than a combination of decorative patterns showing the 16R probability variable jackpot is displayed on the activated line, 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed as a variation game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that it is a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the state in which the jackpot pattern combination other than the combination of the decorative symbols showing the probability variation jackpot is lined up on the activated line when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as the variation game effect. A suggestive production that suggests that is performed is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 5R certainty variation jackpot is executed.

  Furthermore, when the game state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display portion 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

  Further, it is conceivable that the game board 31 is provided with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. Accordingly, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 is performed using the magnet, the illegal activity can be detected. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect an illegal act when an electric wave is illegally input to the ball entrance sensors 314a and 315a to falsely detect the entrance of a game ball. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the clune device 37 puts the game ball, which has been inserted into the variable winning a prize port 316, into one of a normal out ball hole 378 and a special out ball hole 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8) described later. It is to sort. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening / closing door 319, the clune device 37, and the game ball retaining portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the clune device 37, and FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X1-X1 of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the clune device 37 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 has a circular shape in a plan view, and has a high-order bottom portion 371a, a low-order bottom portion 371b, and an inclined portion 371c that descends to the left and is provided between the high-order bottom portion 371a and the low-order bottom portion 371b.

  The high-order bottom portion 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. The high-level bottom portion 371a is provided with a special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball mouth 373 (special discharge port). The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the up-down direction D2 at the center of the high-order bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The first guiding member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retaining portion 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375 a and a lower opening 375 b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and discharges the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retaining portion 38 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374.

  It should be noted that the first guide member 375 can be provided with a function of retaining the game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining portion 38. By the way, in the present embodiment, the numbers (specific information) corresponding to the non-setting values which are the game setting values other than the setting values which are the game setting values set in the gaming machine 10 are set within a predetermined period (see FIG. 9). Based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period), they are presented in the 7-segment display unit 39. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the number of segments in the 7-segment display unit 39 is 7 (excluding the dot points DP), one non-setting value can be reliably specified by the 7 pieces of information. Also, since the game setting values are in 6 levels from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-setting values, and therefore all non-setting values can be specified by 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces (specified number) of information. Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 be configured to retain a predetermined number or more of game balls 99 during a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the game machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retaining portion 38 to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99. In this case, by giving the first guiding member 375 a function of storing the game balls 99, the first guiding member 375 is used to retain a number of game balls 99 that is difficult only with the game ball retaining section 38. be able to. As a result, it becomes possible to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99 for a specific period, and information necessary for specifying all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game ball 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. Accordingly, due to the arrangement of various members, it is difficult to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99 not only by providing the game ball retaining portion 38 but also by providing the first guide member 375 with the function of retaining the game balls 99. In this case, by using the special out ball passage 374, it is possible to retain a prescribed number or more of game balls 99. As a result, it becomes possible to retain a predetermined number or more of game balls 99 in a specific period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all non-set values will be presented.

  On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 retained in a specific period. For example, it is conceivable to set the limit number to the specified number (match the limit number to the specified number). In this case, for example, when the number of pieces of information (the individual information of the specific information) corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 is presented, all the non-set values in one specific period. May be provided with information to identify. In addition, when information of the number of the game balls 99 satisfying a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out opening 373, for example, the information corresponding to the number of winning the lottery, is presented, the winning of the lottery The expected number of information according to the probability is presented, and the expected number of this information is basically smaller than the prescribed number, so it is possible that not all of the information necessary to specify all non-set values is presented. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by entering the game ball 99 into the special out opening 373 in one specified period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the jackpot probability is low). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from terminating the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game at an early stage.

  As a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining portion 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374 is adopted. However, when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, by positioning the game ball 99 in the vicinity of the special out ball mouth 373 (by causing a ball jam), the special ball It is conceivable to restrict the entry of the game ball 99 into the out ball passage 374. With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the number of gaming balls 99 to be retained in a specific period to a limited number by a simple mechanical configuration without requiring a complicated configuration or control.

  On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guiding member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right part (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention part 38. Then, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out opening 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 cannot be expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or to pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced to the special out ball passage 374 (special. When detected by the out ball sensor 384), it is handled as an out ball.

  The lower bottom portion 371b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined so as to be lower toward the center. The lower bottom portion 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out nozzle 378. The normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the up-down direction D2 except for the portion of the lower bottom portion 371b along the peripheral wall 372. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered through the normal out opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out opening 373. Is formed in. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. The second guiding member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31, similarly to the game balls passing through the opening of the outlet 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out-balls.

  In such a clune device 37, as described above, the game ball 99 that has been launched into the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening / closing door 319 is guided by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the clune device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow down of the game ball 99 is delayed in the clune device 37. Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 are normally out due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy, collision with the peripheral wall 372 of the clune device 37, or another game ball 99. Enter 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball opening 378 moves to the normal passage 376 and the second guiding member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

  On the other hand, a part of the game ball moving on the bottom wall 371, the movement direction is changed due to a collision with the periphery of the normal out ball 378 or another game ball, and enters the special out ball 373. To do. The game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is discharged toward the game ball retaining portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

  Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out nozzle 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% to 5%, preferably 1% to 3%. .. In other words, the expected number of balls to enter the special out opening 373 per round game for 10R is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of entering the ball or the expected number of entering the ball in such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from specifying the set value at an early stage, but it is possible to specify the set value realistically. It will be possible. Thereby, while preventing the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the setting value is specified early such as when the setting value is low, the gaming machine is tedious because the setting value cannot be specified. It is possible to prevent the game at 10 from being terminated.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the special out opening 373 is provided at the high bottom portion 371 a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out opening 378 has a larger opening area than the special out opening 373. Is usually harder to enter the game ball 99 than the out ball 378, but instead of or in addition to all or a part of these, the game ball to the special out ball 373 by other means. It may be difficult for 99 to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide a blocking means for blocking the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out opening 373 around the special out opening 373. As the obstruction means, for example, an obstacle that obstructs the ball entering the special out nozzle 373 such as a wall portion surrounding the special out nozzle 373, a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the peripheral portion of the special out nozzle 373. A means for generating a force and a means for forming an air curtain by ejecting air in the peripheral portion of the special out opening 373 can be considered.

  Further, an opening / closing part for opening / closing the special out opening 373 may be provided so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special out opening 373 by this opening / closing part. In this case, the special out opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out opening 378, and the normal out opening 378 is formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out opening 373. Good.

  Further, the distribution means for allocating the game balls 99 entered in the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out opening 378 and the special out opening 373 is not limited to the clune device 37 and may be other means. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail that is placed on the game board 31, it may be divided into the normal-out opening 378 and the special-out opening 373. ..

  As shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 8, the game ball retention section 38 accepts the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period has elapsed. Is. Then, after the specific period of time, segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 until the predetermined period of time has elapsed, 7 A number is displayed on the segment display section 39. Here, FIG. 9 shows a specific period in which the game balls are retained in the game ball retaining portion, a predetermined period in which the number of game balls entering the special out nozzle of the clune device is accumulated, and specific information indicating a non-set value. It is a figure for demonstrating the regulation period displayed on a 7 segment display part.

  Note that, in the following, referring to FIG. 9, a specific period is a period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining portion 38, and a predetermined period of the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37. As a period for cumulatively counting the number, a "regulated period" is set to all or a number (specific information) indicating a non-set value based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period. Although a part is described as a period for displaying on the 7-segment display unit 39, the "specific period" is not limited to the period for which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining unit 38, and the "predetermined period" is the clune device. The number is not limited to the period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out hole 373 of 37. That is, the “specific period”, the “predetermined period”, and the “specified period” include at least the periods described below.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (A) and FIG. 9 (B), during the specific period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining section 38, the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game is started after the jackpot game (opening) is started. It is until the end (starting of the ending), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game started in a predetermined period. That is, the beginning of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game is started, and the end of the specific period is the point when the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ended (the ending point is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), when the normal jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the initial hit is the normal jackpot and the single hit jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a specific period. From the time until the opening and closing execution mode of the big hit game ends. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), when the probability variation big hit is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is the probability variation big hit and the jackpot game is started), when the normal probability jackpot is won in the high probability mode. For all the big hit games that are executed until the big hit game is finished by the normal big hit game, it is specified from the start of each big hit game until the opening and closing execution mode of the big hit game is ended It is set as a period. That is, in the jackpot game, a plurality of specific periods are set in correspondence with the number of jackpot games executed in the jackpot game.

  In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot and the timing of winning, the number of game balls 99, which corresponds to the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a specific period of one jackpot game, which will be described later. The segments A to G of the segment display section 39 are controlled to be turned on and off in the ending of the jackpot game which is a specified period. That is, in the specified period, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot, based on the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the specific period. A number indicating a game setting value (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines is set as a period for displaying on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  When the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 is performed. Numbers that specify game setting values (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit are set in the display order setting process of FIG. 36 described later. Accordingly, one is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 in the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period in the jackpot game. Further, in the ending (specified period) after the lapse of the specific period in the jackpot game, in the 7-segment display section 39, the number of the game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 When the number is less than 20, the two numbers that specify a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number is 21 or more and less than 28, a plurality of non-set values are specified. The three numbers to be displayed are displayed in the order according to the display order, and when the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, When the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in an order corresponding to the display order. In addition, when the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle mouth 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is less than 7, it is 7 in the ending (specified period) after the specific period in the jackpot game. In the segment display portion 39, no single number that identifies a plurality of non-set values is displayed.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, each time the jackpot game is executed, a 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, is based on the number of gaming balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a specific period. 1 to 5 numbers that specify a plurality of non-set values can be displayed on the screen, and the set values can be specified by displaying the five numbers that specify the non-set values. For example, it can be specified that the game setting value 1 is a non-setting value by displaying the number 1 on the 7-segment display section 39, and the game setting value can be specified by displaying the number 2 on the 7-segment display section 39. It is possible to specify that 2 is a non-setting value, and it is possible to specify that the game setting value 3 is a non-setting value by displaying the numeral 3 on the 7-segment display section 39, and to display the 7-segment display section 39 It is possible to specify that the game setting value 4 is a non-setting value by displaying 4, and specify that the game setting value 5 is a non-setting value by displaying the number 5 on the 7-segment display section 39. It is possible to specify that the game setting value 6 is a non-setting value by displaying the numeral 6 on the 7-segment display section 39. Also, since the non-set value is specified as the game set value 2 to 6 by displaying the five numbers 2 to 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, the set value is grasped as the game set value 1. it can. Similarly, it is possible to grasp that the set value is the game set value 2 by displaying five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7 segment display section 39, and 1, 2, 4 to 6 on the 7 segment display section 39. It can be understood that the set value is the game set value 3 by displaying the five numbers, and the set value is the game by displaying the five numbers 1 to 5, 5 and 6 on the 7-segment display section 39. It can be understood that the set value is 4, and the 7-segment display section 39 displays 5 numbers 1 to 4 and 6 so that the set value can be understood as the game set value 5. It is possible to understand that the set value is the game set value 6 by displaying the five numbers 5 to 5.

  Further, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when the segments A to G are control targets in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, the first control target segment A is turned off. And the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are “1” and “4”. Then, the sixth control target segment F can be recognized as "4" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "1" when the segment F is turned off. That is, the number “1” or “4” can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. When the segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “2”, “3”, “5”, and “6”. Then, it can be determined that the segment B, which is the second control target, is either “2” or “3” by being turned on, and “5” and “3” by being turned off. 6 ”. Further, the segment C, which is the third control target, can be recognized as "3" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when the segment C is turned off. That is, the number “2” or “3” can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. Further, the fifth control target segment E can be recognized as "6" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when the segment E is turned off. That is, the number “5” or “6” can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. That is, the numbers “2” and “3” can be recognized when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers “5” and “6” are the fifth control target segment. E can be recognized when the light is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on or off. Then, in the present embodiment, even if the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, all the segments A to G are controlled. Unless targeted, no control is initiated to display the next priority digit. As a result, in order to specify all the non-set values, compared to the case where the control for displaying the number of the next priority is started at the stage where the numbers corresponding to the non-set values can be grasped, There are many specific requirements that need to be met. As a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty level until all the non-set values are specified, and further the difficulty level in which the set values are recognized, so that the set values are prevented from being recognized in a short game time. Therefore, even if the setting value is low, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being grasped by the player in a short time, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the playing time of the gaming machine 10 and the gaming machine 10 It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of.

  In addition, when the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are to be controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is started. You can For example, when the priority order of the numbers is “1” → “2” → “3” → ..., the segment F having the sixth control order for the number “1” is targeted for control. When it is understood that the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is "1", the segment G having the seventh control order is not set as a control target and the number "n" having the next priority order is displayed. The control for displaying "2" may be started. By the way, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G have been controlled, before all the segments A to G are controlled. Even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the number which is the next display target must be performed unless all the segments A to G have been controlled. Does not start. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the number to be displayed next is started. Up to this point, information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in order to specify the number already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G have been controlled, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays unnecessary information for the player. May be displayed in, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during the period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. On the other hand, when the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is performed. If it starts, the segments A to G that do not contribute to the estimation of the non-set value will not be the control target after one non-set value can be specified. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

  On the other hand, during the predetermined period of cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode is set after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started. Until the end. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the point when the opening and closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game is ended (the ending of the normal jackpot game is started. It is the time). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9 (A), when the regular jackpot is won in the low-probability mode (when the initial hit is the regular jackpot and the single hit jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. From the time until the opening and closing execution mode of the big hit game ends. That is, in the case of a one-time jackpot, the predetermined period corresponds to the specific period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining section 38. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is the probability variation jackpot and the jackpot game is started), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. It is a period from the start of the probability variation big hit game for the first hit, which is a trigger, until the opening and closing execution mode of the big hit game for the normal jackpot, which is a trigger for ending the big hit game. That is, in the case of the jackpot game, the predetermined period does not match the specific period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining section 38, and a plurality of predetermined periods are set according to the number of jackpot games started within the predetermined period.

  By the way, when the jackpot game is started, the game is not finished in the middle of the jackpot game or is not finished in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances. Therefore, by setting the specific period for which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retaining section 38 for each big hit game, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game before the specific period ends. Also, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game to the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the jackpot game opening / closing execution mode to the regular jackpot. By setting up to, the player is prevented from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. Then, in the jackpot game, in the ending (specified period) after the elapse of the specific period, the number of stays of the game balls 99 in the game ball retaining portion 38 in the specific period (entered into the special out ball hole 373 of the clune device 37). By controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99, information (all or a part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) with which the non-set value can be specified or inferred is displayed. In the ending after the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the jackpot, the non-set value can be specified or estimated in correspondence with the cumulative number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period. Information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to non-set values) is displayed. With these, even when the player who cannot know the timing when the non-set value other than the set value can be specified or estimated progresses the game, the game is ended before the timing when the non-set value can be specified or estimated. Is prevented. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing when the non-set values can be specified or estimated can specify or guess the non-set values, and specify the set values by specifying all the non-set values. Will also be possible. In addition, it is possible to exclude the so-called hyena action of other players who play games aiming at the timing when the non-set value can be specified or estimated.

  In addition, by setting the specific period for each jackpot game that is started in the predetermined period, in the condominium jackpot, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the jackpot consort. Therefore, in the Renso jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than that in a single shot, and the predetermined period becomes longer as the number of times the jackpot game is executed increases. As a result, there is a high possibility that the Rensou jackpot wins more game balls 99 in the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37 than the single hits. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball hole 373 will increase. As a result, as the number of jackpots increases, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired, but also obtains more information for specifying or inferring the non-set value, which in turn sets the non-set value. The benefit is that it is easier to guess or identify the value.

  The start of the specific period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining section 38 may be set during the big hit game, and the opening / closing execution mode is started (not limited to the start of the big hit game) (the opening of the first hit is finished). It may be at the point of time. Further, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally shifts after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is preferably set as one section including the opening / closing execution mode for one big hit game. As a result, based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied when the game ball 99 enters the variable winning port 316 in the opening / closing execution mode (the game ball 99 that has passed through the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37). The information for identifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the lapse of the specific period. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, that is, after the elapse of the specific period. By paying attention to the contents displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to enjoy the game by specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the display contents.

  Further, the start of a predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started. Instead, you can set the jackpot game. Preferably, it is the time when the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode), for example, the opening and closing execution mode of the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started (the opening for the first hit is ended). You may. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first hit, the predetermined period is always set for one initial hit regardless of the single-shot jackpot and Renso jackpot An opportunity to infer or specify a non-set value for a win is guaranteed at least once.

  On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the time when the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends, and may be set during the jackpot game, for example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically, the ending of the jackpot game is set. It is possible. In addition, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game is ended (the ending at the jackpot is ended), or the time saving mode that is shifted to after the normal jackpot is ended. Further, in the present embodiment, the description is given on the premise of the loop probability variation machine, but in other forms of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and one-two-mixers, a predetermined period is set according to the mode. It is also possible to set it. For example, in the V-ST machine, when there is no V prize in the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set similarly to the case of the normal jackpot in the loop probability variation machine, and when there is a V prize in the first hit (probability variation jackpot). ), The start of the big hit game or opening and closing execution mode for the first time as the start of a predetermined period, the end time of the opening and closing execution mode in the big hit without V winning, or the end time of the specified number of big hit lottery in the high probability mode It can be considered as the end of the predetermined period.

  Further, the predetermined period may be set to a period in which the variable game is executed (a period from the end of the big hit game to the start of the big hit game) regardless of the big hit game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) in which all or part of the specific information (number) indicating a non-set value is displayed, and the normal gaming state (high probability mode and Period of staying in low-frequency support mode (from the end of time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), period of staying in time saving mode (from the end of normal jackpot to the normal gaming state) Period), the period of staying in the low probability mode (usually from the end of the big jackpot until the next big hit game starts), until one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode receives a predetermined number of jackpot lottery Of the high probability mode and / or the low probability mode until a predetermined number of ordinary lottery is drawn, and in the high probability mode and / or the low probability mode, the general winning opening 313 has a predetermined number of game balls 99. Until a prize is won, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning opening 314 in one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, one of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, or A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second winning opening 315 on both sides, and a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. , A high probability mode and / or a low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are hit on the game board 31, and the like. Further, the predetermined period may be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set to a period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern). In this case, the entire period of one variation game may be the predetermined period, or a part of one variation game may be the predetermined period. When a part of one variation game is set as a predetermined period, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the reach state of the decorative pattern, from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Until the development effect such as the special reach effect is started, the period when the decorative pattern is in the reach state until the development effect is started, and the period when the decorative pattern is in the reach state until the development effect is finished , The period during which the development effect is executed, and the like can be considered.

  In this way, by setting the predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to identify or infer the non-set value and recognize or infer the set value even in the period other than the period in which the jackpot game is executed. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) during the period when the variable game is executed.

  Then, when the predetermined period is set to a period in which the variable game is executed, the sorting means such as the clune device 37 normally issues the game ball 99 launched in the left side area of the game board 31 to the left when performing the game ball. The position where 99 is divided into the regular out-mouth 378 and the special out-mouth 373 (for example, the left side area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or side of the first winning opening 314). ) May be provided. In this case, a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special launch (a right strike that launches the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31). Thereby, without lowering the probability of entering the game ball 99 into the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314, the player can enjoy the identification or estimation of the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual. You can

  In addition, the start of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on, depending on the type of a specific condition. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off, depending on the type of the specific condition.

  In addition, as a specific condition, instead of the game ball 99 sorted by the sorting means such as the clune device 37 in a predetermined period entering the special out nozzle 373, a specific area other than the special out nozzle 373 is specified. The game ball 99 passes through, for example, the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 enters the various winning openings 313 to 316.

  In addition, the game balls 99 that enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, or the like, or pass through the through gate 317 are guided to the sorting means such as the clune device 37, and the games that are sorted by the sorting means. The specific condition may be that the ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373. In this case as well, it is possible to enjoy the identification or estimation of the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without performing special launch.

  Further, the specific condition may be that a specific event that may occur in the progress of the game occurs. The specific event in this case may be either a favorable situation or a disadvantageous phenomenon for the player. When a specific event is an event that is advantageous to the player, in addition to the benefits obtained by the occurrence of the specific event, the player may specify all or part of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value). Can be further obtained. On the other hand, when the specific event is an unfavorable event for the player, the player uses all or one of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. More parts can be obtained. Specific events include, for example, winning the jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more (the jackpot game being executed a certain number of times (including one time) or more), a certain number of odds or regular jackpots (one time) Win) (probably change or normal jackpot game is played a predetermined number of times (including 1 time) or more), the number of jackpot games has reached a predetermined number or more (usually before jackpot win Win the jackpot consecutively more than a predetermined number of times), the number of jackpot lottery until you win the jackpot reaches a certain number or more, win the game ball 99 that exceeds the upper limit number in the round game of the opening and closing execution mode of the jackpot game (Over prize) may occur.

  Further, the specific phenomenon may be that a specific effect set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game is executed. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set, for example, to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect, or may be set to any of an opening effect, a round game effect and an ending effect. Typically, a specific effect is a premium effect in which a big hit or a probability variation big hit of a variable game effect is determined, and a holding condominium is executed after the end of the big hit game in the big hit game (at the start of the big hit game, At the start of the opening / closing execution mode, at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, or at the end of the jackpot game, a lottery result is included in the hold at a specific point of the jackpot game). .. Furthermore, as a specific event, it is also conceivable that the decorative display is stopped and displayed in a specific combination or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop) in the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed at "777" in the design display portion 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach-out eye such as "767", a specific non-reach-outside eye such as "367" is displayed. Temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that development effects are executed when development effects such as super reach effects and special reach effects are executed as reach effects, as well as when the stop effects are displayed (interlaced) Display) is considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is executed, for example, “7 development 7”, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in the reach state (intermediate stop display), and It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as "development" is executed is temporarily stopped and displayed as the symbol. Further, the specific condition may be that a plurality of specific events of a specific combination occur.

  Further, the specific condition may be satisfied in relation to the set value. That is, the specific condition may include the setting value, and for example, the specific condition may be satisfied when a specific event occurs at the specific setting value. In this case, while the type of the specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is defined by the set value as described later. Therefore, the numbers indicating the non-set values are displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39 in different orders depending on the type of the specific condition. This allows you to set the display order for each set value based on, for example, whether the jackpot lottery probability is high or low, and you can also characterize the display of numbers that show multiple non-set values for each set value. become.

  In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied, the specified period for displaying the specific information indicating the non-set value or a part of it (special information) is not limited to the case of being set for each ending of the jackpot game, and other It may be a timing, and it may be set according to a relationship with a predetermined period, a relationship with a specific period, a relationship with a specific condition, or the like. For example, the stipulated period may be only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the prescribed period is typically set after the lapse of the prescribed period, as described in a second embodiment to be described later, and the jackpot game. Other than this, for example, it may be after the jackpot game is over. Further, when the predetermined period is set as the execution period of the variable game, for example, when the variation of the decorative pattern in the variable game is started, the decorative pattern is in the reach state, the temporary stop display timing, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. It is conceivable that the timing of the development effect is started, that the development effect is being executed, or the like. That is, the specified period may be set to a period during which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to display the specific information indicating the non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is displayed by the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display unit 341, it is possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the symbol display unit 341. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the variable game by displaying the specific information.

  Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position. FIG. 10C is a sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retaining portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG. 10.

  As shown in FIG. 6, FIG. 8, and FIG. 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains the game ball 99 in which the game ball enters the special out nozzle hole 373 for a specific period, and the retention lane 381. , A discharge lane 382 and a stopper portion 383.

  The retention lane 381 accepts the game ball 99 entered in the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, and allows the game ball 99 to retain. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and is inclined downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game sphere, and at least a part of the game sphere 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to visually recognize that the game balls 99 are retained in the retention lane 381, and the number of the retained game balls 99, that is, the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is entered within a specific period. The number of game balls 99 can be visually confirmed. Further, the retention lane 381 is preferably formed of resin or the like so as to be transparent. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible. The number of gaming balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 can be displayed by, for example, the number of lamps turned on or an image displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end of the retention lane 381 and guides the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined portion, for example, a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

  Further, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382. This special out ball sensor 384 is to detect when the game ball 99 staying in the stay lane 381 moves in the discharge lane 382. That is, the special out ball sensor 384 counts the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out aperture 373 of the clune device 37 within a specific period. Used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the output from the special out ball sensor 384 is monitored by the MPU 41, so that the MPU 41 is It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved on the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. 23 described later. In the processing, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls and displays it on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value. The content is controlled (see the command determination processing in FIG. 37 and the set value suggestion processing in FIG. 40).

  As the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the voice lamp control device 5. In this case, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 does not set the special out ball detection command, but the voice lamp controller 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

  The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is vertically moved between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. .. The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion projects upward, and the stopper 383 is at the upper limit position, so that the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10 (B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not project upward, and the stopper 383 is at the lower limit position so that the game ball 99 of the retention lane 381 can be discharged through the discharge lane 382 (FIG. 10 (C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

  The means for allowing the game balls 99 to be retained in the retention lane 381 and for discharging the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383, and for example, a stopper that can be moved back and forth. Alternatively, other means such as a stopper, which is rotatable between a standing state and a prone state, may be used. Further, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by releasing the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. .. Further, by making the retention lane 381 movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which it is discharged. For example, by holding the retention lane 381 at a position lower than the discharge lane 382 to retain the game ball 99, while moving the retention lane 381 to a position higher than the discharge lane 382, the game sphere 99 is discharged lane 382. It may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening capable of discharging the game ball 99 on the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381, and the game ball 99 from the opening. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between itself and a position where it can be discharged to the back side. Further, instead of the retention lane 381, by moving a box-shaped movable body, the game ball 99 can be retained in the movable body and the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

  Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a display example of alphabets on the 7-segment display unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display unit 39 includes seven segments A to G and dot points DP. Each of the segments A to G and the dot points DP can be turned on and off individually, and at least numbers 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11B and at least A to as shown in FIG. 11C. The alphabet F can be displayed. In the present embodiment, in the 7-segment display section 39, a plurality of (six) game settings corresponding to the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (see FIGS. 14A and 14B). From the value (numerical value information), a plurality (five) of game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical value information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 concerned. A number (specific information) indicating each of (specific numerical information)) is displayed as a number by turning on or off each segment A to G. Specifically, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the number 1 is displayed by turning on the segments B and C, and the non-set value is the game set value. When the number is 2, the segments A, B, D, E and G are turned on to display the number 2, and when the non-set value is the game set value 3, the segments A to D and G are turned on. By doing so, the number 3 is displayed, and when the non-set value is the game set value 4, the segments 4 are displayed by turning on the segments B, C, F and G, and the non-set value is the game set value. When the value is 5, the number 5 is displayed by turning on the segments A, C, D, F and G, and when the non-setting value is the game setting value 6, the segments A, C to G are When the light is turned on, the numeral 6 is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the dot point DP is turned on at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed.

  The numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set values are changed, as will be described later (FIG. 35 and FIG. 35). 36). Further, as will be described later, the control sequence of turning on or off each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is set to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G ( Fixed).

  Then, in the 7-segment display section 39, as will be described later, a segment corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period) that entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period. Is a control target of turning on and off, and a number or a part of the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 indicate non-set values other than the set value after the game set value. Therefore, a part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 does not indicate the game setting value but a part of the specific information indicating the non-setting value, and corresponds to the special information. .. In other words, the special information is displayed by using a part of the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. Thus, the 7-segment display section 39 displays not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information), so that the player displays the number on the 7-segment display section 39. In this case, not only the non-set value can be specified, but also the non-set value can be estimated based on a part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, even when the numbers are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to guess the non-set value based on a part of the numbers and enjoy the game, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  It should be noted that whether or not each of the segments A to G is the control target in the 7-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is a control target, it is easier to estimate the set value than when it is not explicitly indicated. In this embodiment, since the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, it is not clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a method in which it is difficult to estimate the set value is adopted. Has been done. In addition, when clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is a control target, for example, by blinking a segment to be controlled, the segment is clearly controlled to the player, and the control target is controlled. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is a control target by lighting the segment in a color different from that in which the segment is lit.

  Further, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display the information for identifying the non-set value in the alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the alphabet A is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the alphabet B is displayed, and the non-set value is the game set value 3. If the letter C is displayed, the letter D is displayed when the non-set value is the game set value 4, the letter E is displayed when the non-set value is the game set value 5, and the non-set value It is conceivable that the alphabet F is displayed when is the game setting value 6 (see FIG. 11C).

  The main display unit 36 is a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31. The display unit 365 is provided.

  The ordinary symbol display portion 361 includes a pair of LEDs as an ordinary symbol (general symbol), and is a lottery in a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b executed upon winning the prize in the through gate 317. The result is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the LED pair (variable display of the normal symbol) upon winning the prize in the through gate 317, and turns on or off each LED after the variation display time elapses, thereby drawing a lottery for the general figure. Display the result of.

  The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), whether or not to execute the jackpot game that is executed upon the winning of the first winning hole 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, big hit lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variably displays the first special symbol) triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314 (variable display of the first special symbol), and each segment is displayed after the lapse of the variable display time. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

  The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and whether or not to execute the jackpot game that is executed in response to the winning of the second winning hole 315. The result of lottery in the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, big hit lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variably displays the second special symbol) upon the winning of the second winning opening 315, and changes each segment after the variation display time elapses. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning on or off.

  The first holding number display unit 364 includes an LED group including four LEDs, and the holding number N of the first special figure of the variable display generated by the winning of the first winning opening 314 is determined by the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

  The second holding number display unit 365 includes an LED group including four LEDs, and the holding number M of the second special figure of the variable display caused by the winning of the second winning opening 315 is determined by the number of four LEDs turned on. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls of the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to a control device and a driving unit provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes the main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 has a ROM 411 and a RAM 412 built therein. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main controller 4 and outputs a control signal from the main controller 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected with ball input sensors 313a to 317a, an out ball sensor 318a, a special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a ball to the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a, and the through gate 317. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41, to the voice lamp control device 5, a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game. It outputs commands such as end command, special out ball detection command, and setting value change command.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information about the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later, based on the information stored in the pending storage area 412b, which will be described later, when starting the symbol variation display by the main display section 36. It The fluctuation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command, when the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations stored in the holding storage area 412b described later increases, the lottery result, the variation pattern in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, and the variation pattern, This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number N of holdings or the number M of holdings. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M is increased (see FIG. 22, which will be described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process).

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area RB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 when the holding number N or the holding number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the hit / miss information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 25 described later.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is to be started, that is, that the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. When shifting to the jackpot gaming state, FIG. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process of. Further, the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command to start the jackpot game. Not only that, but also that the opening will start. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command for starting each round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game and notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , Is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to understand that the opening ends and the opening / closing execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, Alternatively, the opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

  The round game end command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the round game is to be ended in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. It

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is over, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later.

  The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, and will be described later with reference to FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content on the 7-segment display section 39.

  The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the change of the set value and the changed set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value changing process of FIG. 27 described later. ..

  Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

  Further, the main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as a means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillator circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillator circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 causes the main timer interrupt (to be described later) every time the clock signal rises (or falls). It is assumed that the embedded processing is started and executed. The oscillating circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply an operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the holding storage area 412b, and the electric power holder holding area 412c of the RAM 412 to perform the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used in determining the outlying type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 that determines variation display time in the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341. Be done. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, an ordinary hit random number counter C4 used in a lottery to determine whether or not the electric prize 315b of the second winning opening 315 should be in the electric power open state, and an initial value setting of the ordinary hit random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for Hereinafter, when collectively describing these plural types of counters, they are simply referred to as counters.

  Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at a short time interval and returns to 0 after reaching the preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA, and the type of variable game that the first special symbol display unit 362 displays in a variable and stopped manner is referred to as a first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB, and the type of variable game that the second special symbol display unit 363 displays in a variable and stopped manner is referred to as a second special symbol game. Sometimes.

  When a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as win / fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. Further, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 are jackpots. It is acquired as win / fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the hit / miss information is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as the determination unit of the present invention by executing the processing according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counters 412a (such as the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1) are individually associated with the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided in.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 has the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the REA4 and the second holding storage area REB.

  Therefore, the variable game that is executed based on the hit / fail information stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB is used for 19 games. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 can be determined in advance.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the win / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 in which the hit / miss information is stored is stored as the number of holding N.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the winning / disabling information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which the hit / miss information is stored is stored as the number of holdings M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning area 314 is made up of a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning / losing information as winning history to the second winning opening 315.

  It should be noted that it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and in this case as well, up to a maximum of eight It is possible to suspend the winning / losing information as the winning history. The storage process of the hit / miss information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving the hit / miss information stored in. Specifically, the hit / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the hit / fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the number of reserved storage areas NAB is 0, the hit / fail information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA and the number N of holdings stored in the number-of-holding storage area NAB of the second holding storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. It is also conceivable as another embodiment that the hit / miss information of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like on the basis of the numerical value information stored in the execution area AE as the win / loss information at the start of one variation game. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, The hit / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the hit / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1 and the third holding area REB1 is held. The hit / fail information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the hit / fail information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the big hit random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  The value of the random number which is a big hit is set by the winning / losing table stored in the winning / losing table storage area in the ROM 411 in correspondence with the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode which is the probability variation gaming state. Here, FIG. 14 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode hit / loss table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14 (A) and FIG. 14 (B), the probability (big hit probability) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit as the low probability mode hit / miss table and the high probability mode hit / miss table, respectively, is set as the game setting value. A plurality of different win / loss tables are provided accordingly. The low-probability mode win / loss table and the high-probability mode win / loss table each include six win / loss tables corresponding to the six-stage game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2 and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot drawing is a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) and high for the low probability mode hit / miss table. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode hit / miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode hit / miss table, and high. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) and high for the low probability mode hit / miss table. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, with the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, out of the 65536 random number values from 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode hit / miss table, and high. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

  In the game setting value 5, out of the 65536 random number values of 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) and high for the low probability mode hit / miss table. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

  In the game setting value 6, out of the 65536 random number values from 0 to 65535, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) and high for the low probability mode hit / miss table. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability table hit / miss tables. That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability of the low-probability mode is about 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high-probability mode is about 4 times that of the low-probability mode, about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

  In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is missed.

  Here, in the low-probability mode hit / miss table and the high-probability mode hit / miss table, random numbers that result in a big hit in the big hit lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also possible that random numbers that become a big hit are not common. Be done. Further, the random numbers to be won as a jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

  Further, the low-probability mode win / loss table and the high-probability mode win / loss table are provided six by six according to the game setting values of six stages, but at least one win / loss table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game set value is not limited to 6 levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode hit / miss tables corresponding to a plurality of levels of game setting values, while providing one high probability mode hit / miss table. That is, it is possible to set a plurality of stages of game setting values for the low-probability mode and make the jackpot probability uniform without providing step-wise game setting values for the high-probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be uniform, and a plurality of stages of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 19 and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14C, in the case where the type of the variation game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning of the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers that are the 5R probability variation jackpot is 0 to 9 The number of random numbers that are 16R certainty jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are 5R regular jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by the winning of the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers to be the 5R certainty variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4 and the 16R certainty variation jackpot. The number of the fourth random numbers is 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 to 15. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop certainty machine, which has the same probability of a certainty variation jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that of the first special symbol. That is, in the probability variation game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high), the time-saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low-probability mode and electric role) Compared to the low frequency support mode in which the open probability of the object 315b is low, the expected value of winning a game ball when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher.

  In the present embodiment, the first prize opening 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning are individually shaken. Minute table is set, the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on which of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 the gaming ball has won, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also possible that the jackpot type distribution probabilities are the same in the game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability variation machine, and it is conceivable that the gaming machine 10 is configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-two mixing machine, or the like.

  Then, the MPU 41, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", "5R normal jackpot". It is determined whether it is a “big hit” or “out”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R certainty variation jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times is executed. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R certainty variation jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R certainty variation jackpot or 16R certainty variation jackpot, it shifts to the certainty variation game state which is a high probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric auditors 315b is high after the jackpot game is over. In the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R regular jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the low-probability mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is low and the high-frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high is shifted to the time saving game state. Then, in the present embodiment, the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) informs the player of the lottery result in a predetermined number of jackpot lottery preset times such as 50 times and 100 times. Until or when it is determined that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the stipulated number of times has passed to the player.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability variation machine, a jackpot of a preset specified number (for example, 50 times or 100 times) after the jackpot game at the probability variation jackpot is finished. If the lottery is executed in the probability variation game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not a big hit before the specified number of times has passed, the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support) Mode), and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from the probability variation game state to the time saving game state or the normal game state in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out, the big hit game state and the time saving game state are not shifted. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R certainty variation jackpot, 16R certainty variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, two-round certainty variation jackpot 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round jackpot, 16R jackpot.

  The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display portion 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of alignment. Specifically, by the detachment type table stored in the detachment type table storage area in the ROM 411, a front-rear detachment reach in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and a reach also occurs After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of out-of-bounds, ie, the out-of-front and out-of-reach, in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and the out-of-reach does not occur is set.

  Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram showing an example of the disconnection type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14D, the value of the random number that is the out-of-position reach is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that is the reach other than the out-of-position is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that is completely out of the range is 39. ~ 238. Note that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game that wins the 5R certainty variation jackpot, the 16R certainty variation jackpot, or the 5R regular jackpot, that is, the variation game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, the reach indicates a state in which it is likely to be a symbol combination of decorative symbols indicating that the jackpot has been won in the period from the start of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display unit 341 to the stop display of the symbols. It is a fluctuation state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a changed state. Further, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. During execution of these effect processes, the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden or may be reduced or enlarged and displayed.

  For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric reserve area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, it is considered a win, and if the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is considered to be a win.

  The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. In this way, by determining the variation pattern type, in the voice lamp control device 5, rough variation game production such as high-speed variation production (basic production, non-reach production), normal reach production, super reach production, special reach production, etc. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the MPU 41 executes a main process described later, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines the variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and the preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. It should be noted that these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

  Here, FIG. 15 (A), FIG. 15 (B), and FIG. 15 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 15 (A), FIG. 15 (B), and FIG. 15 (C), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the out-of-range variation table, the variation pattern is previously set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R regular jackpot”, the regular jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery If the result is “out”, the out variation table is referenced to identify the type of variation pattern.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach production pattern having the variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the pattern display unit 341 displays the normal reach production pattern. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as a variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the super reach production. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach production pattern having the longest variation display time of 90 s as the variation type (production pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the special reach production pattern. The effect pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 15C, in the deviation variation table, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined for each stop type at the time of deviation determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3 (front / rear deviation, reach other than front / rear, and complete deviation). Correspondence between the and the fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is the front / rear outreach or the reach other than the front / rear outreach, one of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is complete disengagement, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with the variable display time of 7 s as the change type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the unit 341. When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a variable display time of 10 s as a change type (effect pattern type), and displays a symbol. The non-reach effect pattern is executed in the unit 341.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, the variable display corresponding to the variation pattern “04” is displayed as the variation display at the time of the deviation, and the variation display is stopped without the notice effect such as the characters and the message being displayed. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", the variable display is disengaged with a notice effect such as a character, a message, etc. displayed, and the dislocation pattern of the disengagement pattern is stopped. Executed. Further, when the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “05” is performed, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a notice effect.

  Note that the types of fluctuation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B), and 15 (C). Further, the probability variation big hit variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared as the normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”, and any one of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”, a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from them. One of the performed super reach effects is executed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than normal reach production, and the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit (expectation degree) is higher than the normal reach production, and the jackpot is won rather than the special reach production. It is executed when the player is suggested that the probability (degree of expectation) is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach effects executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”, a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and selected from them. One of the performed special reach effects is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect whose variation time is longer than that of the normal reach effect, and is an effect which develops from the normal reach effect or the super reach effect, for example. The special reach effect is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expected degree) of jackpot winning is higher than the normal reach effect and the special reach effect.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single-shot operation effect in which the single-shot operation is reflected in the effect, the operation button 20 by the player is displayed. A player participation-type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which the player's long press operation of the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect may be included.

  Then, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 and the symbol display portion 341 of the main display portion 36, and the variation pattern and the jackpot lottery A fluctuation pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds a variable pattern command “A” indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is in front of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of "A01" to "A03" is output. When the lottery result is "5R certainty variation jackpot", the MPU 41 changes pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is the 5R certainty variation jackpot in front of the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Any one of "B03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variable jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. ~ Any one of "C03" is output. Further, when the lottery result is “miss”, the MPU 41 changes pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the change is before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Will be output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination section 27. Or turn it off.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the jackpot lottery can be stably executed by the MPU 41. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

  Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information relating to game history, payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as the game information, "the number of out balls", "the number of general winnings payout coins", "the number of first winnings payout coins", "the number of second prizes payout coins" , "Variable winnings payout number", "setting value", "base information", "continuous character ratio information", "character ratio information", "cumulative jackpot lottery number", "unit jackpot lottery number", The “number of big hits” and the “number of consecutive failures” are stored. Among these pieces of game information, "setting value", "base information", "continuous character ratio information", "character ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery count" are game information (performance information) regarding payout performance. Corresponds to.

  The “out ball number” is an integrated value of the number of game balls shot on the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The "out ball number" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 described later.

  The “general winning award payout number” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the general award winning hole 313 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "general winning prize payout number" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the winning hole 313 in the normal game state. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout controller 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the general winning hole 313 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current prize. ..

  The “first prize-winning coin payout number” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the first prize-winning port 314 in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode). This "first winning prize payout number" is the winning ball of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 314a detects a winning in the first winning prize 314 in the normal game state. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the present prize when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process. To update.

  The “number of second prize winning coins paid out” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the second prize winning hole 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "second winning prize payout number" is the winning ball of step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 315a detects the winning of the second winning hole 315 in the time saving game state. A value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the present prize when setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning in the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process. To update.

  The “number of variable winning a prize payout balls” is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the variable winning a prize port 316 in the jackpot gaming state. This "variable winning opening payout number" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 23 described later when the winning sensor 316a detects a winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state. When a prize ball command for causing the payout controller 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning of the variable winning a prize 316 in the processing is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the present prize. ..

  The “setting value” is for selecting the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 14A) and the high-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 14B) used in the jackpot lottery (win / win determination). In other words, the “setting value” defines the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, six setting values (six types of low-probability mode win / loss tables (see FIG. 14A) and high-probability mode win / loss tables (see FIG. 14 (B)) having different jackpot probabilities) Is being prepared. The “setting value” is updated in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later.

  The "base information" is information about "base" which is a payout rate (ball payout rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "out ball number" in the normal gaming state. Is the ratio of the total number of payout coins of the “number of general prize payout coins” and the “number of first prize coin payouts”. When the “base” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “base” = 100 × (“general winning award payout ball number” + “first winning award payout ball number”) / “out ball number”. The "base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the last-time 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the two-previous-time 60,000-ball base B2 are updated each time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 in the specific performance information updating process of FIG. 28 described later (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent out ball number reached 60,000 balls was the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous out ball number reached 60,000 balls was The 60,000-ball base B2 is stored two times before as the "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. When the counter value for the number of out-balls is calculated as the current base BL until the counter value reaches 60,000, the "base information" includes the "general winning award payout number" and the "first winning award" as described above. In addition to the “number of paid-out balls” and the “number of out-balls”, the “general-prize-winning-coupon payout-number”, the “first winning-court-payout-number” and “out-ball-number” for base calculation are stored.

  In the present embodiment, the "base information" includes "current status base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1" and "previous two-time 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are the history. However, the 60,000-ball base for the past three times or more may be recorded as the history. Further, the "base information" may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

  “Continuous prize ratio information” is the total number of coins paid out by winning all prize holes (general winning hole 313, first winning hole 314, second winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) for which prize balls are paid out. In the above, it is the information about the "continuous winning character ratio" which is the ratio of the variable winning award coin payout number. When the "continuous character ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "continuous character ratio" = 100 x "variable winning prize payout number" / "total payout number". The “continuous accessory ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the “continuous winning character ratio information” is stored as a cumulative continuous winning character ratio from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "continuous accessory ratio information" is a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state is executed. Alternatively, it may be a continuous accessory ratio with respect to the number of out balls reaching a fixed number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous accessory ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in a fixed number of periods.

  The "characteristics ratio information" is the total number of coins paid out by winning all the winning holes (general winning holes 313, first winning holes 314, second winning holes 315, and variable winning holes 316) for which prize balls are paid out. , Is information about the "feature ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of payout coins of the second prize-winning coin payout number and the variable prize-winning coin payout number. When the "character ratio" is expressed by a mathematical expression, "character ratio" = 100 × ("the second number of winning coin payouts" + "the number of variable winning coin payouts") / "total number of coins paid out". The “feature ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the "role character ratio information" is stored as a cumulative role ratio from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "feature ratio information" is for a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state, It may be a character ratio for a certain number (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative accessory ratio and the accessory ratio in a fixed number of periods.

  As for the "cumulative jackpot lottery number", the jackpot lottery was conducted in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present. The number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is a cumulative variable display in which the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 is executed in response to the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the number of times. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later. The “cumulative jackpot lottery number” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  "Unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of times the jackpot lottery is taken as a chance to win the first winning hole 314 per a certain number of minus difference balls in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main It is the number of times the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display portion of the display portion 36 is executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is “250 balls”, and the difference is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the “number of general winnings payout coins” and the “number of first winnings coin payouts” from the “number of out balls”. That is, the "number of lots per unit lottery" is the number of times the variable display number of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display portion 362 of the average of 1,000 yen is changed when receiving 250 balls for 1,000 yen at the game hall (big lottery It is the number of times I received. The “unit jackpot lottery number” may be the number of times the jackpot lottery is received for a fixed number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. The “unit jackpot lottery number” is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery number” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is a fixed period (for example, a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed number of jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (for example, 1000 times) is executed, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a fixed number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the “unit jackpot lottery number”, both the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a fixed number of periods may be stored as the game information.

  "The number of jackpots" is the number of times the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present is a jackpot. The “number of big hits” is incremented by one each time the game state is changed to the big hit game state in the game state shift process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. The “number of jackpots” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  "Number of consecutive misses" is the number of times the lottery result in the big hit lottery was missed continuously in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). Cleared. The “number of times of continuous deviation” is the result of the hit / miss judgment based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 when the symbol fluctuation display on the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. If the result is off, 1 is added, and if the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive disconnections” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of times of continuous disconnection" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power source of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “setting values” stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is called a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided in. It is also conceivable to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display portion 362 and / or the second special symbol display portion 363 of the main display portion 36.

  The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display the numbers “0” to “9” and the alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the letter "B", the dots are lit to indicate "8." to distinguish it from the number "8", and the letter "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit and displayed as "0." in order to distinguish it from the number "0". Also, when displaying any of the alphabets from "A" to "F", it is conceivable that the dots are turned on to clearly indicate the alphabet.

  The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the “base type” is displayed by an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segments. The indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432 which are identification segments, the abbreviation “BL” of the current base BL is “8.” and “L”. And the base values “31” are displayed as “3” and “1” on the two right 7-segment displays 433 and 434 which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 collectively switches on / off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by a pressing operation, and is placed at an easy-to-operate position when the inner frame 12 is expanded. It is provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the power display switch 44 is turned on, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power display switch 44 is turned off, the power supply to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. .. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

  Here, FIG. 18A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are in the off state, so the base information is in the non-display state. As shown in FIGS. 18 (B) to 18 (D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, as the “base information”, the current base BL → 60,000 last time. The base is looped in the order of the ball base B1, the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before, and the current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18 (B) shows that the current base BL is 28%, the example shown in FIG. 18 (C) shows that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 34%, and the example shown in FIG. In the example shown in (2), the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% before the second. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

  It should be noted that a program necessary to display the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the 60,000-ball base B1 of the previous time and the 60,000-ball base B2 of the last two times, the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the 60,000-ball base B1 of the previous time and the 60,000-ball base B2 of the previous two times at regular intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, when the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous accessory ratio information" or "account ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by a display of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the setting value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 14A) and the high-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 14B) that are referred to in the jackpot lottery. For displaying the above-mentioned set values of, and is constituted by a 7-segment display. The set value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display unit, but may be composed of a display unit of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display. The set value may be displayed.

  The set value change operation unit 46 switches the power supply of the 7-segment display on and off by a pressing operation, and when the power supply of the 7-segment display is on, the set value change operation unit 46 can be rotated to change the set value. The set value changing operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotating operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a display example on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (A), when the set value display unit 45 is in the off state and the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed, the 7-segment display is energized, and the set value display unit is turned on. A number is displayed at 45. The number displayed at this time is the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicates the current set value. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, if the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the set value display unit 45 is in the lighted state, the power supply to the 7-segment display is cut off and the set value display unit 45 is turned off. Become.

  As shown in FIG. 19B, when the set value display 45 is in a lighting state and a rotation operation is performed on the set value change operation part 46, the number displayed on the set value display 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, the set value display unit 45 is rotated to the right to increase the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, and the set value display unit 45 is rotated to the left to display the set value display unit 45. The number that is displayed becomes smaller. Then, when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the set value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as a set value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Therefore, when the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation unit 46 with the number corresponding to the target set value displayed on the set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before is set as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects the low-probability mode win / loss table (see FIG. 14 (A)) or the high-probability mode win / loss table (FIG. 14 (B)) selected according to the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The jackpot lottery can be performed based on (see).

  The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value changing operation unit 46. For example, a method of determining the set value by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) after rotating the set value changing operation unit 46, or setting by pressing or long-pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) Displaying the set value by changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45, or by inserting the key into the key hole provided in the main control device 4 and rotating the key. It is also possible to change the number displayed on the section 45 and then remove the key.

  Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 with the game board 31 relative to the front frame 11, outside the game machine 10 (on the front side of the front frame 11). ), It is possible to select a visible state and an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display section 45 cannot be visually recognized, while opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11. The set value display section 45 can be visually confirmed with. As a result, when the player executes a game on the game machine 10, the set value display section 45 is not visually recognized unless the game board 31 is opened. The value is prevented from being recognized by the player. Then, the set value display unit 45 is turned off when the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed when the set value display unit 45 is on. Therefore, by keeping the set value display unit 45 off during the business hours of the game hall, the set value display unit 45 can be visually confirmed by opening the game board 31 due to a jam of the game machine 10 or the like. Even if the state is set, it is possible to prevent the set value from being recognized by the player by the set value display unit 45.

  On the other hand, the set value display unit 45 is turned on when the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed in the off state, and the number corresponding to the set value is hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the game hall, by opening the game board 31 to the front frame 11 and performing a pressing operation on the set value change operation unit 46, the set value display unit 45 is turned on. The set value can be confirmed based on the numbers displayed on the set value display section 45, and the set value can be changed by rotating the set value changing operation section 46. As a result, it is possible to change the setting value outside the business hours by a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the setting value during the business hours.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a variable display of symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and Perform performance display.

[Voice lamp controller 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a ROM 511 and a RAM 512 built therein.

  The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and lamp blink patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The voice lamp control device 5 executes a process in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that the display control device 6 receives a command based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the output of the reproduced voice from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display portion 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the output of the reproduced sound from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing a variation game effect and a jackpot game effect described later.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5. The voice lamp control device 5 also outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. Further, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  Further, the speaker 26 and the electric decoration section 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51, based on the command input from the main control device 4, the voice output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination part 27, the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38. It is possible to control the vertical movement of the 7-segment display, the 7-segment display unit 39, and the like. The vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 is controlled by the MPU 51, so that the game ball (special out) that is entered into the special out end 373 of the clune device 37 in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retaining portion 38. The state in which the balls are retained and the state in which the game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged via the discharge lane 382 are selected. Further, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341, and the sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect according to the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main controller 4.

  Specifically, the MPU 51, when the fluctuation pattern command is input, based on the fluctuation pattern command, a fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols (see FIG. 38 (A)), fluctuation display time, fluctuation type (FIG. 38). (See (B))) and effect pattern type (see FIGS. 39A to 37C), and a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 37). (See step S2105 in the command determination processing), the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display portion 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a detachment, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the detachment is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61 and an input / output I / F 62, and the input / output I / F 62 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341. The voice lamp controller 5 and the display controller 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built therein. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit that measures time and an interrupt circuit that receives an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a plurality of types of images such as a variable pattern such as a decorative pattern used in the pattern variable display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and an out effect image are stored. ing. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the variable display time of the variable symbol in addition to the type of image to be used and the display timing. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays an image on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, whereby the symbol variable display and the effect display are realized.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is a computing device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a ROM 711 and a RAM 712 built therein.

  The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for the processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 is for paying out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stopping member that switches whether or not the game ball is paid out, It is provided with a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the game machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 according to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided in the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money within the range of the amount of money to be lent to the player. Specifically, a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, whereby the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and a predetermined number of game balls are generated. Be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The firing control device 8 includes a firing control IC 81 that controls driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321. Let it feed on. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation amount to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 to the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 by using a clock signal that switches ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is shot toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotational operation amount of the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22, as the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32 increases. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted to be strong.

  Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for allowing the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stopping switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 with the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stopping switch 21b is operated by the player. When it is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops the launch of the game ball. Thereby, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game is prevented when the player is not touching the firing handle 22. Further, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by rotating the firing handle 22 and operating the ball stop switch 21b with a thumb or the like at an arbitrary timing.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, driving units, etc., + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 90 while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging unit that is charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc., when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment, it is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. To judge. When the main controller 4, the voice lamp controller 5, the payout controller 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power controller 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is started periodically, and a power outage. NMI interrupt processing etc. are executed. In the present embodiment, description of the startup process, NMI interrupt process, etc. will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. In the startup process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt process of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected. When the out-ball sensor 318a detects an out-ball, the MPU 41 updates the number of out-balls in the game-information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out-balls stored in the game-information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. To do. Further, when the special out ball sensor 384 detects a special out ball, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4, and those counter values have reached the maximum value. In that case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control processing (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is provided on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player touches the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process to enable the launch of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a normal winning lottery as to whether or not the electric winning object 315b of the second winning a prize port 315 is to be in the electric hand open state based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric hand holding area 412c. Performs the through-gate processing that is performed. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, when not in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal hit when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and is out when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. Judge that there is. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Judge that there is. When the MPU 41 determines that the hit is normal in the through gate process, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win the second winning opening 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is arranged.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the first winning opening 314 has been won (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it is determined that there is no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number N of reservations stored in the number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of reservations (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number N of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number N of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number N of reservations (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23), which is updated in the main processing described later. And S1312), and stores the counter value in the first empty holding area of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the content of the hit / damage information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes a jackpot judgment target in a variation start process (S1408, FIG. 26 in FIG. 24) described later. The first hold command setting process of setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a prize for the second winning opening 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the second winning opening 315 has been won (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined that the second winning opening 315 has not been won (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum reservation number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number M of reservations is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the starting winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number M of reservations is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number M of reservations (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. 23, which is updated in the main process described later). And S1312), and stores the counter value in the first free holding area of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB of the holding storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hit / non-win information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is the target of the jackpot win / fail judgment in the variation start process (S1408 and FIG. 26 in FIG. 24) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second suspension command setting process for setting the second suspension command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, if “first hold command” is replaced with “second hold command” and “holding number N” is replaced with “holding number M” in the first holding command setting process of FIG. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the starting winning process of FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out), the variation pattern, and the hold number N. . Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the number of holdings N from the number of holdings storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA, and also reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first holding from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the high probability mode is set. If the high probability mode is set (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if the high probability mode is not set (step S1202). : No), and moves the process to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition processing (step S1306 of FIG. 23) in the main processing to be described later to determine whether or not it is in the high probability mode. It judges based on the high probability mode flag which is set to OFF at the time of shifting to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high-probability mode hit / loss table (see FIG. 14B) stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. Based on, the winning / non-winning judgment of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. On the basis of the winning / losing table, a win / no determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Note that in steps S1203 and S1204, the win / fail judgment is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. In step S1203 or S1204, the setting value stored in step S1710 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, is read out, and then the high-probability mode hit table or the low-probability mode hit table corresponding to the set value is read one by one. You may make a selection and judge whether or not it is true or false.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1. When it is determined that the counter value read from the value does not correspond to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when winning / losing information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process of FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type included in the winning / holding information stored in the third holding area REA3. The counter value of the counter CS1 is read. In addition, among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, the holding area in which the winning / discarding information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21 is the value of the holding number N stored in the holding number storage area NA. Can be judged by.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp controller 5 which receives the first hold command causes the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 to receive the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 the first holding command corresponds to the hit / miss information.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the variation type counter CS1 and the number N of suspensions in the first suspension command (step S1209).

  The first hold command set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in step S1301 of the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. Is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and the content is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, some or all of the information of the first hold command may be included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing for the progress of the variation game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a periodical processing of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle. It

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 controls the output data such as the command set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 20 or the previous main process in the control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the external output processing to be sent to. For example, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a set value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery number update command are set in the RAM 412. If so, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303, which will be described later, in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like. Then, if a prize has been generated, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), the MPU 41 stores in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 occurs. The number of payout balls to be paid out or the number of payout balls to be paid out first is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls by the current prize. Further, the MPU 41, in the time saving game state (low-probability mode and high-frequency support mode) or the probability variation game state (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), when the winning is generated in the second winning port 315, the RAM 412. The number of coins paid out for the second winning a prize stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of coins paid out for the present prize. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 determines the variable winning award coin payout number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the prize is generated in the variable award winning prize 316, the number of payout coins due to the present prize. Is updated to the value obtained by adding.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the jackpot lottery described above is executed, and the variable pattern command necessary for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. To be done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt processing of FIG. 20, and the variations updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this processing. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game consisting of opening, opening / closing execution mode and ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning port 316 is opened, and thus the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (the jackpot type). ). For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot and the 5R certainty variation jackpot, and the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is the 16R certainty variation jackpot. In the jackpot game control process, the round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the open / close execution mode, and the ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting the ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot game state in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, a probability variation game state that is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high probability. It shifts to a time saving game state that is a frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a normal game state that is a low frequency support mode.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game informing the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game is over, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that has triggered the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R certainty variation jackpot or the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, after the jackpot game is over, it is shifted to a time saving game state. Further, when the notification of the lottery result for the jackpot lottery of the specified number of times is finished in the time saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variable game.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is transitioned, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, while setting the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag to OFF and sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probability variation gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high-probability mode flag is set to OFF, while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

  Further, when the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the “jackpot number” stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes setting value change processing. In this set value change processing, processing for controlling display or non-display of the set value or change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to an operation on the set value change operation unit 46. The details of the setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the setting value changing process is executed in the main process, but is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process and before the launch of the game ball is started. It is also possible that it is executed. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the set value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed within the business hours of the game hall. ..

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process of the game information. In the present embodiment, as the specific performance information, the base information, the number of lots per unit jackpot, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio are updated. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main processing this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1301 and executes the processing of S1301 and subsequent steps described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main processing arrives, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing. During the remaining time, the steps S1310, S1311 and S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the next main processing execution timing has come (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1 and then returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the jackpot game, and when it is in the jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is executed. When the big hit game is not finished (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not to execute the jackpot game is set to ON when the jackpot gaming state is shifted in the gaming state shift processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, and is turned off when the jackpot gaming state is shifted to another gaming state. It is determined based on the jackpot game flag that is set.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON at the time of the variation display start in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), It is determined based on the variation display flag which is set to OFF in step S1405 of the variation game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variable display, and when determining that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), moves the process to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41, in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36, as a result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the fluctuation game. The corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of reservations N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the holding storage area 412b and the number-of-holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number N of reservations and the number M of reservations are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variation game control process. On the other hand, if either the number N of reservations or the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the process of step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the hit / miss information, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number M of reservations corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: Yes) The process moves to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number M of reservations is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA (step S1502), and changes from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The hit / miss information is moved (step S1503). Then, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / miss information of the second holding area REA2 to the fourth holding area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the hit / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the hit / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4 is moved. The hit / miss information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 shifts when the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts when both or one of the number M of holdings and the number N of holdings is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. Yes (step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number M of reservations is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number N of reservations is not 0, and thus executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number M of reservations stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / miss information from the first holding area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the hit / miss information of the second holding area REB2 to the fourth holding area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the hit / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the hit / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4 is moved. The hit / miss information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a shift command indicating that the hit / miss information of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and moves the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 is set to ON. .. When the gaming state is the high-probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not the high-probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low-probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 stores the pending storage area 412b based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14B) saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information stored in the execution area AE as numerical information is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines the pending storage area based on the low probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14A) stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value changing process of FIG. 27 described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

  Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, the win / fail judgment is executed based on the high-probability mode hit / miss table or the low-probability mode hit / miss table stored according to the set value in step S1712 in the setting value change processing of FIG. 27 described later. In steps S1602 and S1603, the setting values stored in step S1710 in the setting value changing process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, are read out, and then the high-probability mode hit table or the low-probability mode hit table corresponding to the set values is read one by one. You may select and judge whether it is true or false.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15A). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15B). .. Further, when the result of the hit determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot to the variation patterns “01” to “03” to “A01” to “O”. Any one of “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R certainty variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 is one of “B01” to “B03” with “B” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are 5R certainty variation jackpots. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" with "C" indicating that the variation pattern "01" to "03" indicates a 16R probability variation jackpot. This is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of change pattern “01” to “08”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 causes the variation pattern command to include information indicating whether the reach is out of front / rear, reach other than out of front / out, or complete out.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the variable display of symbols on the main display unit 36, it sets the variable display flag to ON. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 36 is being performed. Further, when starting the variable display of symbols on the main display unit 36, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery number” stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the hit / miss determination based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 is out, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive outs” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the hit / success result is a big hit. If there is, clear "Number of times of continuous deviation" to 0 times.

[Setting change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed. If the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes), the setting value changing process is ended. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and when it is the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value When the change processing is finished and the jackpot gaming state is not set (step S1702: No), the processing is shifted to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag that is set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the symbol variation display state nor the jackpot game state (No in steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, the setting. It is determined whether or not the value changing operation unit 46 is operated to turn on the power of the set value display unit 45. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1704 and switches the power of the set value display unit 45 from off to on. If not (step S1703: NO), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power supply of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1704). A number indicating the read set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 (step S1705). Thereby, the current set value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag indicating that the set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 to ON (step S1706), and ends the set value changing process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value displaying flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. When the setting value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1708, and when the setting value display flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). That is, when the set value display unit 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the set value changing process is ended.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value changing operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1709, and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated rightward by a predetermined angle, and vice versa. When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number smaller by one than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation is displayed.

  If the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, it is displayed on the set value display unit 45. If the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation is changed to “1” and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is “1”, the setting is performed. The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". Further, when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is “6”, further rotation to the right is prevented so that the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is “1”. Further, it may not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the set value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the set number displayed on the set value display unit 45 as a set value and ends the set value changing process. As a result, when the power of the set value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the set value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as a valid set value and the game information in the RAM 412 is finally set. It is saved in the storage area 412d. Therefore, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. Then, the set value can be confirmed by turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value change. It is determined whether or not the operation unit 46 is operated to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1712, and the power of the set value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. In the case (step S1711: No), the setting value changing process is ended. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the set value display unit 45 displays the set value by cutting off the power supply to the 7-segment display. Is turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the low probability mode hit / miss table according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. (See FIG. 14A) and high probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the setting value changing process.

  Here, in step S1712, the low-probability-mode win / loss table (see FIG. 14A) and the high-probability-mode win / loss table (see FIG. 14B) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is selected. In other words, the low probability mode hit / miss table and the high probability mode hit / miss table are selected as the hit / miss tables having the same set values, so that the setting value changing operation is easy. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the setting value of the low-probability mode is set to "1" and the setting value of the high-probability mode is set to "6". It becomes possible to do.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update processing of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and the number of read out balls reaches 60,000. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). When the number of out balls reaches 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S1805, and when the number of out balls does not reach 60,000 (step S1802: No), the step is processed. The process moves to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of general winning awards payout balls and the number of first winning award payout balls for base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 sets the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information read in step S1801, the number of general winning award payout coins for base calculation of the base information read in step S1803, and the first number award winning payout coins. Based on this, the current state base BL is calculated, and the current state base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1804) (see FIG. 29 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (number of coins paid out in general winning a prize + number of coins paid out in a first winning prize) / number of out-balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
When the number of out balls has reached 60,000 (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (A) and FIG. 29 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the 60,000-ball base two times before in the base information (step S1805) to determine the current base. BL is shifted to the 60,000-ball base B1 last time (step S1806), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the general winning award coin payout number, the first award winning coin payout number and the out ball number, which are stored as the base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, to 0 (step S1808). ).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 ends, the MPU 51 reads other information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates another specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809). ), And the specific performance information update process ends. The specific performance in this case is, for example, the number of lots per unit lottery, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL displaying flag is a flag indicating that the current state base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. 33. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1908 of FIG. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 in-display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. If the B1 currently displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1917 in FIG. 32, and if the B1 currently displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 in-display flag is a flag indicating that the performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32 described later. When the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and when the B2 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 displaying flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), The display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information saved in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 30 (step S1901) (step S1901). (S1908), it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No). ), And the procedural steps proceed to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000-ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "1" indicating that the previous 60,000-ball base B1 is 33%. , “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that configure the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 in-display flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the 60,000-ball base B1 last time on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and The display control process ends.

<Step S1914>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 is an alphabet that indicates the current base BL by cutting off the power supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915) and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1914). (S1916), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. 31 (step S1902: YES), as shown in FIG. (S1917), it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before, which is included in the information (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8.", "2" indicating that the base B2 of 60,000 coins two times before is 32%. , “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that configure the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 in-display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a fixed time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922). , The display control process is ended.

<Step S1923>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000-ball base B1. The letters and numbers that indicate are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 in-display flag to off (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1924). (S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 32 (step S1902: step S1922). (S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to off (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current status base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. “2” and “9” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that form the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating that there is are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 forming the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag ON (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Step S1932>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 shuts off the power supply to the 7-segment display devices 431 to 434, and thus the 60,000-piece base B2 is displayed two times before. The letters and numbers that indicate are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to off (step S1933) and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). (S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47.

  It is also conceivable as another embodiment that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination portion 27, startup processing at startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at power failure, etc. Description of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 performs display order setting processing (step S2000), counter updating processing (step S2001), command determination processing (step S2002), and variable game production processing (step S2003) in the sub-timer interrupt processing. , Jackpot game effect processing (step S2004), and set value suggestion processing (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the game machine 10 and displays the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period. The order of the numbers to be displayed is determined and stored (set). In the present embodiment, five numbers for specifying a plurality (five) of game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value by executing the setting value suggestion process in the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which the five numbers that specify the plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is the numerical display order determining table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example. Hereinafter, details of the display order setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers that specify the non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. .. The display order setting flag is initially set to off when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by allowing the sub-timer interrupt process by the start-up process of the voice lamp control device, the sub-timer interrupt process is displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period. The order of the numbers is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described below). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is set.

  By the way, the power of the game machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, so that the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Can be prevented from being monotonized.

  Here, when the display order setting flag is ON (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2012, and when the display order setting flag is OFF (step S2011: No), the processing is step S2014. Move to.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
When the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is set on (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that the game set value (set value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is used in the command determination process of FIG. 37 described later. In step S2121, it is turned on. When the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value change flag to off (step S2013), and then shifts the processing to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the set value is changed, the order of the numbers displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is set. By setting the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 when the set value is changed in this way, the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the set value. It is possible to prevent the presentation of information on the display unit 39 from being monotonous.

  On the other hand, when the set value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the setting value from the RAM 512, and further refers to the setting value and the numeral display order determination table (see FIG. 36) to set the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 ( Step S2015). Here, FIG. 36 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a numerical display order determination table, and FIG. 36 (B) is a display order and 7-segment display section 39 described in the numerical display order determination table shown in FIG. 36 (A). It is a figure which shows the correspondence with the display order of the number in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (A), in the numeral display order determination table, lottery is performed for each of the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10. The display order of the numbers is defined by the random number value. The lottery random number values are 120 from 0 to 119, one display order is associated with each lottery random number value, and the selection probabilities of the respective display orders are the same. The display order is the display order A1 to A120 selected when the set value is 1, the display order B1 to B120 selected when the set value is 2, the display order C1 to C120 selected when the set value is 3, and the setting Including the display order D1 to D120 selected in the case of the value 4, the display order E1 to E120 selected in the case of the setting value 5, and the display order F1 to F120 selected in the case of the setting value 6, the setting value 1 For each of ~ 6, 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

  The display order A1 to A120 selected when the setting value 1 is 5 numbers “2” that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the number “1” that specifies the setting value 1 ~ The order of displaying "6" is defined (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, since the set value is 1, when any of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the random number value, the number "1" that identifies the set value 1 is 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

  The display order B1 to B120 selected when the setting value 2 specifies the setting values “1”, “3” to “6” and the setting values 2 to 6 other than the numeral “2” that specifies the setting value 2. The order of displaying the five numbers "2" to "6" is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, since the setting value is 2, when any one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the random number value, the number "2" that specifies the setting value 2 is 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

  The display order C1 to C120 that is selected when the setting value 3 is set includes five numbers "1" and "1" that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6 other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1. The order of displaying "2" and "4" to "6" is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number “3” that specifies that the setting value is 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

  The display order D1 to D120 selected when the setting value 4 is set includes five numbers “1” to “5” that specify the setting values 1 to 3, 5 and 6 other than the number “4” that specifies the setting value 4. The order of displaying “3”, “5”, and “6” is defined (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the setting value is 4, the number “4” that specifies that the setting value is 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

  The display order E1 to E120 selected when the setting value 5 is set includes five numbers “1” to “4” that specify the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number “5” that specifies the setting value 5. , "6" are displayed in the specified order (see FIG. 36B). That is, when any one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the setting value is 5, the numeral “5” that specifies the setting value 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

  The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value 6 is displayed displays five numbers “1” to “5” that specify the setting values 1 to 5 other than the number “6” that specifies the setting value 6. The order to perform is defined (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, when any of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the setting value is 6, the numeral “6” that specifies that the setting value is 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

  Then, when the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to off (step S2016) and ends the display order setting process. That is, the MPU 51 is set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the setting value is changed (step S2013: Yes). The order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set according to the game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6).

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table, and after the power is turned on, the setting value is changed to change the number display order determination table. The display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the. As a result, when a predetermined condition (for example, power-on or setting change) is satisfied, it is possible to display the numbers (non-set values) on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order during the specified period. In the game hall, since the power of the game machine 10 is often turned on before the store is opened, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. The display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Can be prevented from being monotonized.

  In the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and when the set value is changed. The display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are satisfied. The predetermined condition in this case will be described in a third embodiment to be described later, but as the predetermined condition, for example, a predetermined period is started, a big hit game is started, a big hit game opening / closing execution mode. Is started. Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set by the satisfaction of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is prevented from being fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the monotonous display of information on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  Further, in the numerical display order determination table shown in FIG. 36 (A), for the same set value, all numerical display orders have the same probability, but the numerical display order is not necessarily the same. It doesn't have to be. For example, the numerical display order determination table may be set such that the probability that at least a part of the numerical display order is selected for the same set value is different from other numerical display orders. That is, it is possible that the specific display order is easily selected, and conversely, it is difficult to select the specific display order. In this way, if the probability that at least a part of the numerical display order is selected according to the set value is set to be different from the other numerical display order, it is easy to select a specific numerical display order according to the set value. However, it is also possible to make it difficult to select a particular numerical display order. That is, unlike the case where the probabilities that all numbers are displayed in the same order are selected, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. It is also possible to do. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the possibility of being a high setting value and the possibility of being a low setting value. Specifically, for example, when the set value is a low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more) is delayed. You can In this case, by leaving the possibility of being the high setting value to the end when the setting value is the low setting value, it is possible to set the low setting value while making the player have an expectation that the setting value is the high setting value. The player is prevented from being identified early. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine 10 from being terminated early while suppressing a decrease in interest in the game, and to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine 10. On the contrary, when the set value is the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) is delayed. You may. In this case, the number corresponding to the high setting value and the number corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until just before the setting value is specified to be the high setting value, and the player The possibility of being a low setting value remains until just before it is understood that is a high setting value. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the throb feeling until just before the player is aware that the high set value is a high set value that is advantageous to the player or a low set value that is disadvantageous to the player. . Further, regardless of the set value, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game set value among the non-set values is not slow, and for example, the slowest display order may be easily selected. In this case, since the number indicating the most unfavorable non-setting value for the player is displayed last, until the last number is displayed, the most unfavorable non-setting value for the player and the player more than that. The possibility of non-set values that are advantageous to As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the game setting value (big hit probability) is the most unfavorable for the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early, It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the machine.

  Further, it is conceivable that the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the high set values and the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set values are set so that the display order is delayed so that the numbers can be easily selected. For example, a numerical display order in which at least one of “1” and “2” corresponding to the low setting value and at least one of “5” and “6” corresponding to the high setting value is delayed is selected. It is also possible to make it easier. Also in this case, until just before the player grasps the set value, there is a possibility that the high set value is advantageous to the player and a possibility that the low set value is disadvantageous to the player. You can enjoy the excitement as if it is a high setting value or a low setting value until just before you grasp.

  Further, except when the set value is the highest set value (the set value is 6), the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values higher than the set value is delayed so that the number display order is set easily. It is possible. For example, the priority of a number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is higher than the set value is lower than the number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is lower than the set value. Is possible. In this way, by delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values higher than the set value, it is possible to make the player expect the set value to be higher than the actual set value up to just before grasping the set value. You can As a result, it is possible to guess and enjoy a non-set value (set value) while expecting the possibility that the set value is high until just before the set value is grasped. On the contrary, except when the setting value is the lowest setting value (the setting value is 1), the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values lower than the setting value is delayed, and thus the number display order is easily selected. It is possible to set it as follows. For example, the priority of a number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is lower than the set value is lower than the number indicating a non-set value whose advantage determination probability is higher than the set value. Is possible. In this way, by delaying the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values lower than the set value, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game set values lower than the set value are not displayed immediately before the set value is grasped. It is left as a display number. As a result, the final set value candidates are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, finally, the player's advantageous game set value is grasped as the set value, so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

  Further, regardless of the set value, it is conceivable that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more) is delayed is set so as to be easily selected. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order in which the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) are earlier, so that the numbers can be easily selected. In this way, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value is delayed, so that the higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to expect a high set value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the set value can be expected to be high while the non-set value is expected. You can enjoy by guessing (setting value).

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stopped symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by 1. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display portion 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable is being changed, and that the variable display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), the command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination processing executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2101: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command is received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and becomes the processing target, and is stored in, for example, the processing work storage area. Remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the command is a fluctuation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process moves to step S2103, and if the command is not a fluctuation pattern command (step S2102: No), the process moves to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols and an effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51, a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38 (A)) stored in advance in the ROM 511, a variation type table (see FIG. 38 (B)), and an effect type table ( 39 (A) to FIG. 39 (C)), and the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes the information about the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R regular jackpot, and sets the 5R sure variation jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is the 5R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot type. Is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, the 16R certainty variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols consists of the first stop symbol, the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display portion 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is secondly stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. The production type table includes a normal reach production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39 (A)) corresponding to normal reach, a super reach production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39 (B)) corresponding to super reach, and a special reach. The special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39C) is included.

  Here, FIG. 38 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, the decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display portion 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 38 (A), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), which is a symbol combination, "777". "Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R certainty variation jackpot, and the other than" 333 "and" 777 "is a 5R regular jackpot, 5R certainty variation jackpot and 16R certainty variation jackpot. It is assumed.

  The lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular big hit", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is the 5R certainty big jackpot or the 16R certainty big jackpot (the certainty big jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  Further, the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", there is no distribution of "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, the symbol combinations of the doublet other than the symbol combination “333” indicating the 5R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333", which is the decorative symbol stop display result suggesting the 5R normal jackpot, can be stopped and displayed. And, when the result of the lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", when a decorative symbol other than "3" except "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, MPU51 is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the 5R probabilistic change promotion effect that is specified.

  Further, the lottery result is "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the decorative patterns of "1" to "9", the first stop with a predetermined probability from the decorative pattern of "1" to "9" The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combination "777" indicating the 16R probability variable jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation big hit", the symbol display stop display of the decoration symbol is a display other than the "777" symbol combination indicating that the decoration symbol stop display result is 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot. Can be done. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", if "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

  Then, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, and determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol determined earlier. Thereby, the stop symbol combination which is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display portion 341 at the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols of “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol determination is determined from the decorative symbols of “1” to “9” with a predetermined probability. To be done. Then, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “out”, and the out type selected based on the out type table (FIG. 14D), and the first stop previously determined. The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the disengagement type is front-rear reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, if the disconnection type is a reach other than the front / rear disconnection, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. Further, when the disengagement type is completely disengaged, the second stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined in the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined in the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol in the display control device 6. You may decide.

  Further, FIG. 38B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation display time “30 s” and the variation type “normal reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “A01” whose lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the variation pattern is “01”. Further, the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern is “02”. The variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “C03” in which the lottery result is “16R probability variable jackpot” and the variation pattern is “03”. Further, the variation pattern command “D04” whose lottery result is “out” and the variation pattern is “04” is associated with the variation display time “7s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”. A variation display time “10 s” and a variation type “non-reach effect pattern” are associated with the variation pattern command “D05” whose result is “out” and the variation pattern is “05”.

  Furthermore, FIG. 39 (A) to FIG. 39 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 39 (B) is the last in the variable game effect. FIG. 39C is a super reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the individual effect type is the super reach effect, and FIG. 39C is referenced when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect. It is a special reach production pattern type selection table.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which there are five types of effect corresponding to each variation type, but the number of effect types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 39, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). Are defined as "effect pattern X1" to "effect pattern X5". Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the effect patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are effects in which the normal reach effect in which the decorative pattern is in the reach state is executed after the end of the high-speed variable effect in which the decorative pattern fluctuates at high speed. The final individual effect type is the normal reach effect.

  Further, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Has been. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the high speed variable effect is finished, and the final individual effect type has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the normal reach effect. This is a production that develops into a super reach production that is expensive and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super-reach effect pattern type selection table may include a super-reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super-reach effect after the high-speed variable effect ends without passing through the normal reach effect.

  Further, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Has been. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high speed variable effect is finished, and further the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are the final individual effect types. It is a production that develops into a special reach production that has a higher expectation of jackpots than the reach production and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. Note that the special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production, such as after completion of high-speed fluctuation production or normal reach production, without passing through at least one of normal reach production and super reach production. You may stay.

  Then, the MPU 51 sends to the RAM 512 the display variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the effect type table and the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and the MPU 51 changes based on the variable display counter whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed. It is possible to determine the remaining display time and the like. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended when the variable display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) to the display control device 6, and the command determination. The process ends. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern corresponding to each display variation pattern command, an effect image, and the like. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until the preset variable display time elapses, The variation of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of the decorative pattern, various effects corresponding to the content of the change type (effect pattern type) specified by the display change pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. .

  Further, when the display variation pattern command is output to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variation game effect in-progress flag to ON. The variable game effect flag is a flag indicating that the variable game effect is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that the big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2107, and if the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process To Step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening / closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The big hit game effect start flag is a flag for starting the big hit game effect (opening effect), and whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the big hit game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. Referenced when making a judgment.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that the round game in the open / close execution mode is started, and is set when the round game is started in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the process To step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to on (step S2310) and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open / close execution mode is ended, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a round game end command (step S211: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2112, and if the received command is not a round game end command (step S211: No), the process To Step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312) and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out-ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clune device 37, and the main timer of FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, when the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2114, and when the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No). , The process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out-ball detection flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The special out-ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether to add the value of the special out-ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40 described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that the ending in the big hit game is started, and is set in the big hit game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2116, and when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No), the processing is stepped. The procedure moves to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Further, the ending effect start flag is referred to in step S2201 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40 when it is determined whether or not the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. It

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command indicating that the big hit game is ended, and is set in the big hit game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2118, and if the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process To Step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect (ending effect), and whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the big hit game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when determining. Further, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 when it is determined whether or not to turn off the illuminated segment in the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a setting value change command. The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the changed game set value and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. .. Here, when the received command is the setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2120, and when the received command is not the setting value change command (step S2119: No), the processing To step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the set value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed set value included in the set value change command and stores the set value, and ends the command determination process. The setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read in step S2014 in the display order setting process of FIG. 35, and is referred to for determining the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect process (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the variable game which notifies the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when the variation pattern command is received, the command determination process of FIG. 37 is performed. A variable game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electric decoration unit 27, and the like.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2004) of the sub timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37 are executed. In the present embodiment, in the ending effect, an ending addition image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Set value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled, and the turning on and off of each segment A to G of the 7 segment display part 39 is controlled. To be done. Further, in the set value suggestion process, as an ending effect of the big hit game, a process of displaying an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the big hit game on the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect with the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process is step S2206. Move to.

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending effect start timing. As a result, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the special out ball sensor 384 detects the game ball 99 moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion moving downward flag which indicates that the stopper portion 383 is moving downward. Yes (step S2203). The stopper portion moving down flag is referred to in step S2206 to determine whether or not the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets the downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending effect start flag to off (step S2205). The set value suggestion process ends.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper downward movement flag which is set on at step S2203 is set on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2207 when the stopper moving-down flag is on (step S2206: Yes) and executes the processing when the stopper moving-down flag is off (step S2206: No). The process moves to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
When the stopper downward movement flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out-ball detection flag is set on (step S2207). The special out-ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination processing of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off. Yes (step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that have entered the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37 in the big hit game opening / closing execution mode are retained in the game ball retaining section 38. The number of special out balls thus counted is referred to in order to control lighting or extinguishing of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

  Whether or not it is time to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is whether or not the special out ball is detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out ball detection flag is continuously off a predetermined number of times or more. You may judge by. If the condition that the stopper 383 is returned to the upper limit position is that no special out balls are detected for a certain period of time, even if there are many special out balls, those special out balls can be accurately counted. .

  Here, when the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the process moves to step S2212, and when the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), The set value suggestion process ends.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns on in step S2203. The stopper downward movement flag that is set is set to off (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retaining section 38 is returned to the state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the light-on / off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, the MPU 51, for each jackpot game, at the ending of the jackpot game after the elapse of a specific period, according to the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device during the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Then, the 7-segment display unit control processing for controlling the turning on / off of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed. The details of the 7-segment display unit control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process for displaying the additional image corresponding to the light-on / off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. By this ending additional image control processing, it is possible to confirm the lighting / unlit state of the 7-segment display unit 39 also in the symbol display unit 341. The details of the 7-segment display unit control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper downward movement flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set on (step S2216). The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination processing of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to end the big hit game effect (ending effect) with the big hit game effect end flag. Here, MPU51, when the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), moves the process to step S2217, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the setting. The value suggestion process ends.

<Step S2217>
When the big hit game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the segments A to G that are turned on in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 puts all the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 in a turned-off state when the jackpot game effect is finished. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 can be turned on only during the ending of the jackpot game.

  Here, in the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 will be a big hit. All or part of the number corresponding to the setting value) is displayed. Therefore, each time the jackpot game is executed, the player can obtain information for identifying or inferring a non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game. As a result, the player can specify or estimate the non-set value each time the jackpot game is executed, and thus can enjoy the identification or guess of the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, when the number of jackpot games increases, for example, when the number of jackpot games increases, all (5) non-set values are grasped by obtaining information that can identify or infer a non-set value for each jackpot game. In that case, it is possible to grasp the set value. That is, since the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, it is possible to guess the set value in the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218). Further, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R certainty variation jackpot flag, 16R certainty variation jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to off (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion effect.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first obtains the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. (Step S2301), it is determined whether or not the value of this special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have won the variable winning port 316 and entered the special out port 373 of the clune device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot. When the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2303, and when the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 ( Step S2302: No), and since it is not necessary to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, the 7-segment display unit control process is ended.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads the segment display control information from the 7-segment display control information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display unit control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period (a period in which the number of game balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is accumulated). . Then, the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S2303. Is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled based on this control content (step S2305). The details of the determination and control of the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Further, the MPU 51 updates the already-displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42A) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306) and clears the value of the special out ball counter. (Step S2307), the 7-segment display unit control process is ended.

  Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and FIG. 42 (B) shows an example of the control order storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing an example of an initial state (not updated) of the already-displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes the control order storage area shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already-displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42 (C).

  As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the control order storage area is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined period (a period in which the number of gaming balls 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 is accumulated). This is an area for storing the order of the numbers to be displayed and the control target order of the segments A to G when displaying the numbers. The control order storage area includes a numerical display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

  The numeral display order storage area is a 7-segment display section 39 or a segment display area until a predetermined period (for example, from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the regular jackpot). The order of the numbers to be displayed (numeral display order) is stored. The numeral display order is based on the numeral display order determination table (see FIG. 36) set for the setting value defining the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big hit. Is determined in. In the numeral display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. 42 (B), in the numeral display order setting process described above, the display order A1 is set based on the numeral display order determination table for the setting value 1, and 7 “2” → “3” → “4” → “5” → “6” is stored as the display order of the numbers on the segment display section 39. That is, unless the setting is changed during the business hours of the game hall, a fixed order is determined for each business day as the number display order, and the number display order is fixed during a predetermined period during the same business day. .. In this way, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period on the business day, the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the same order every time the predetermined period starts, It is easy to display the numbers in the order that the numbers are displayed earlier, and it is difficult to display the numbers in the order that the numbers are displayed later. For example, if the numerical display order is “2” → “3” → “4” → “5” → “6”, the numbers are displayed in this order, so that “2” or “3” is likely to be displayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to display "5" or "6". With this, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being easily specified while enabling the setting value to be estimated and specified, and it is possible to enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. In addition, since the number display order is fixed during the relevant business day, it is easy to display the numbers in the earlier number display order, and it is difficult to display the numbers in the later number display order.For example, when the set value is low, If the jackpot probability in the low-probability mode is low, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the low setting with a small number of initial hits. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from terminating the game on the game machine 10 during the game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine 10.

  Further, it is expected that the larger the number of specific periods in the predetermined period (the larger the number of big hits), the more numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, as the number of jackpots increases, the number of non-setting values that can specify a plurality of non-setting values other than the setting value also increases. As a result, since the number of jackpots increases, a large amount of information for identifying the non-set value can be obtained, and thus the set value candidates can be narrowed down. Then, the player can specify all non-set values by causing 35 or more game balls 99 to enter the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period, and as a result, recognize the set value. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while identifying all the non-set values, that is, recognizing the set values, and whether or not the jackpot series is continued (the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot). Is it a normal jackpot?) You can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on it, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  The number display order is not limited to the one set when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10 or when the setting is changed, and when the jackpot game for the jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is started, etc. May be determined. In this way, the number display order is determined when the big hit game such as the first hit is started, so that the number display order is determined for each predetermined period, for example. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to guess the number display order, and therefore variations in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are reduced. Therefore, it is possible to identify all the non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and it is possible to recognize the set values early. As a result, the player is displaying all the non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past for the purpose of recognizing the set values. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that no numbers will be displayed.

  On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of the segments A to G when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section 39. The segment control order is fixed to segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, changing the setting, winning the jackpot, etc., but is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10. In this manner, the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, so that the player controls the segments A to G when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. It becomes possible to grasp the order. As a result, the player can grasp the number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 even before the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the numbers that have not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  Note that the segment control order is fixed during the same business day by being determined when the game machine 10 is powered on or when the set value is changed, like the numerical display order, while it is determined for each business day. It is also possible to do so. In this case, as compared with the case where the segment control order is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp the numbers that have not been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. This increases the difficulty in identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values, so, for example, when the set values are low (when the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from early recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

  In addition, the segment control order is determined when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started) or the like, as described in a third embodiment described later. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (C), the already-displayed information storage area stores numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period, numbers in the middle of display, and information on the segments A to G that have already been controlled. Area. This already-displayed information storage area stores already-displayed number flag information, currently displayed number flag information, and already-displayed segment flag information.

  The already-displayed number flag information is information about a flag indicating whether or not the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The already displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already displayed flag, a number 2 already displayed flag, a number 3 already displayed flag, a number 4 already displayed flag, a number 5 already displayed flag, and a number 6 already displayed flag. The number 1 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 1 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 2 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 is displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 2 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 2 is not displayed on the part 39. The number 3 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 3 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 3 is not displayed on the part 39. The number 4 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 4 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the number 4 is not displayed in the section 39. The number 5 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 5 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the numeral 5 is not displayed on the part 39. The number 6 already-displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 has been displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The number 6 already-displayed flag indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display portion 39 in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the 7-segment display in the predetermined period when set to OFF. This indicates that the numeral 6 is not displayed on the part 39.

  The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is a display target number on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The numeral 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to on, and the number 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display when set to off. This indicates that it is not the display target in the section 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 2 is 7 segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not the display target in the section 39. The numeral 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to ON, and the number 3 is 7 segment display when it is set to OFF. This indicates that it is not the display target in the section 39. The numeral 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 4 is 7 segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not the display target in the section 39. The numeral 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 5 is 7 segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not the display target in the section 39. The numeral 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-setting value in a predetermined period. The number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is a display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when set to ON, and the number 6 is 7 segment display when set to OFF. This indicates that it is not the display target in the section 39.

  The already-existing target segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 has been turned on / off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. This already-target segment flag information includes segment A already-target flag, segment B already-target flag, segment C already-target flag, segment D already-target flag, segment E already-target flag, segment F already-target flag, and segment G already-target flag. including. The segment A already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment A of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on / off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment A already-targeted flag indicates that the segment A has been the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment A when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment B already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment B of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to be turned on / off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment B already-targeted flag indicates that the segment B has become the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment B when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment C already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on / off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment C already-targeted flag indicates that the segment C has become the control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment C when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment D already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on / off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment D already-targeted flag indicates that the segment D has become the control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment D when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment E already-targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to be turned on / off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment E already-targeted flag indicates that the segment E has become the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment E when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment F already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment F of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been controlled to turn on / off in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment F already-targeted flag indicates that the segment F has been a control target in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment F when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target. The segment G already-targeted flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display unit 39 has been turned on / off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. The segment G already-targeted flag indicates that the segment G has become the control target in the display control of the number of the display target in the predetermined period when set to ON, and the segment G when set to OFF. Indicates that is not a control target.

  In the already-displayed information storage area, in the initial state, all the flags included in the already-displayed number flag information, the display-target number flag information, and the already-target segment flag information are set to OFF. Here, the initial state is a state outside a predetermined period, that is, when the jackpot game for the jackpot (first jackpot) in the low-probability mode is started (the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37). Shows the state at the beginning of a predetermined period of accumulating. In the present embodiment, all the flags included in the already-displayed information storage area are determined when the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process of FIG. 46 described later (step S2404: Yes). That is, it is set off (cleared) when the end of the predetermined period is a normal jackpot that is set.

  43 to 45 are diagrams showing a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control information storage area and an update example of the already-displayed information storage area. 43 to 45, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display unit 39 and an update example of the already-displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area will be described.

  As described above, in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content. (Step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

  The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. It is determined according to the number of game balls 99 entered in 373). For example, in the case where the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42 (C)) and the value of the special out-ball counter is less than 7, the seven segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are displayed. Some of these segments are controlled by turning on and off. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37 during the specific period is 5), the control order storage area When the contents are in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (when all the flags are set to OFF), the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed. The five segments A to E of FIG. Then, when the content of the control order storage area is in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B), the number 2 is displayed first, so that the segment A is turned on and the segment B is turned on, The segment C is turned off, the segment D is turned on, and the segment E is turned on. Therefore, in the 7-segment display unit 39, from the all extinguished state (non-control state) in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. 43 (A) are extinguished, the segment A, the segment B, and the segment shown in FIG. 43 (B) are displayed. D and segment E are changed to a partially controlled state in which they are lit.

  The change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43A to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. May be performed stepwise by turning on or off. When the segments A to E are sequentially turned on or off as control targets, the control target segments A to E may be blinked or the like to clearly indicate that they are control targets. Of course, it is not always necessary to explicitly indicate the segment to be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is finished, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43 (B), the already-displayed information storage area is shown in FIG. 42 (C). The contents shown in FIG. 43C are updated from the initial state in which all the flags are set to OFF. Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43 (B), for the number 2 first displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, five segments A to E of the segments A to G are set as control targets. Therefore, the segments F and G are not control targets. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), in the already-displayed number flag information, since the numbers 1 to 6 are not displayed, the number 1 already-displayed flag, the number 2 already-displayed flag, and the number 3 already-displayed flag are displayed. , The number 4 already displayed flag, the number 5 already displayed flag, and the number 6 already displayed flag are all kept off. Further, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2 for which the five segments A to E are control targets is set to ON. Further, in the already-displayed segment flag information, since the segments A to E are control targets, the segment A already-targeted flag, the segment B already-targeted flag, the segment C already-targeted flag, and the segment D already-targeted flag for the segments A to E. , And the segment E already-targeted flag are set to ON.

  Further, when the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42C), the value of the special out ball counter (set to the jackpot game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41. When the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 during the specified period exceeds 7, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 entering the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37 during the specific period is 10), the 7-segment display unit 39 In, a total of 10 segments A to G are control targets. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the seven (all) segments A to G are controlled to turn on / off, so that the numbers in the first display order are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the second display is displayed. With respect to the numbers in the order, the three segments A to C are control targets for the second turn-on / off. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already-displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (all flags are set to OFF). However, since the number in the first display order is 2, the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, in the 7-segment display unit 39, from the uncontrolled state in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. 44 (A) are extinguished, the segments A, B, D, E and G are shown as shown in FIG. Is turned on and the segments C and F are turned off to change to the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. 44) is changed to the partial segment control state in which the segments A to C shown in FIG. 44C are controlled. In the example shown in FIG. 44C, since the second number displayed is 3, the segments A to C are lit.

  Note that the change from the non-controlled state shown in FIG. 44 (A) to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44 (B) and a part shown in FIG. 44 (C) from the all-segment control state shown in FIG. The change to the segment control state may be performed all at once, or may be performed stepwise by sequentially turning on or off the segments A to G or the segments A to C. Further, when the segments A to G or the segments A to C are sequentially turned on or off, the segment to be controlled may be blinked or the like to clearly indicate that the control is being performed. Of course, it is not always necessary to explicitly indicate the segment to be controlled.

  When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the already-displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the 7-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44 (A) to the partial segment control state shown in FIG. 44 (C) through the all segment control state shown in FIG. 44 (B). In this case, the already-displayed information storage area is finally displayed after the contents shown in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) from the initial state in which all the flags shown in FIG. 42 (C) are set to OFF. 45 (C) is updated. Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44 (B), all the segments A to E of the segments A to G for the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are control targets. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to ON. Then, when all the target flags for the segments A to G are set to ON, the control for displaying the number 2 has been completed, and therefore, as shown in FIG. The 2 already displayed flag is set to ON, and in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag is set to OFF, while the displayed number 3 flag is set to ON. Then, in the already-displayed segment flag information, all already-targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to off. Further, as shown in FIG. 45C, in the already-displayed segment flag information, the segment A already-targeted flag, the segment B already-targeted flag, and the segment C already-targeted flag for the segments A to C are set to ON. That is, every time all the already-targeted flags of the already-displayed segment flag information are set to ON (every time seven segments A to G are controlled), the already-displayed numerical flag information is displayed. The already-displayed flag for the number is set to ON, the display target flag for the number that was the display target in the displayed number flag information is set to OFF, while the display target flag for the next display target number is set to ON. Is set.

  As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, so that the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 is performed. All or part of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit are displayed. As a result, the player can specify or infer the non-set value based on the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, can recognize the set value.

  Incidentally, as a gaming machine, like the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the gaming hall side being able to select the setting value. In this case, the gaming hall desires to set the set value low in order to lower the expected payout value. When the set value is set low, the player does not know the set value in order to avoid the player from stopping the game because the player recognizes that the set value is low. They tend to want to be gaming machines.

  On the other hand, the player can infer (set down to a plurality of set values) or recognize the set value for the game machine having the set value in order to play the game on the game machine 10 having a higher expected payout value. I want good gameplay. As described above, the game hall and the player tend to wish to conflict with each other with respect to the game machine that suggests or clearly indicates the game set value.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the specific period from the start of the first big hit game to the end of the normal big hit opening / closing execution mode, of the gaming balls 99 that have won the variable winning port 316, the special of the clune device 37. The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball opening 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retaining portion 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 after the lapse of the specific period is counted, and the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled by the number corresponding to the counted number. To do. In other words, at least unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the jackpot game is transitioned to, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor lighted. Therefore, unless the game is transferred to the jackpot game, the set value is not guessed or recognized.

  In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37, and for example, one to two per 16R jackpot game (about one per 10R of round game). It is expected that the game ball 99 will enter. Therefore, it is difficult to specify or estimate the non-set value by the 7-segment display unit 39 in one big hit. On the other hand, in the 7-segment display unit 39, after the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low-probability mode becomes a jackpot is started, the opening / closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game ends (ending is It is controlled according to the cumulative total of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period until the start). In other words, for the predetermined period, if the first hit is a probability variation big hit, it will not end as long as the big hit consort in the high probability mode continues, and the opening and closing of the normal big hit game when the normal big hit is won It continues until the mode ends. That is, in the present embodiment, while having the playability that it is not easy to recognize the non-set value and thus the set value, as the jackpot series in the high probability mode continues, the special out end 373 of the clune device 37 is used. When a large number of game balls 99 are expected to be entered, the non-set value (set value) can be more accurately estimated, and when 35 or more game balls 99 are entered in the special out nozzle 373 in a predetermined period, A non-set value (set value) can be specified with certainty. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, there is information capable of inferring a set value according to the number of specific conditions established in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period. Since the expected value of the number of entered balls of the game ball 99 into the special out nozzle 373 is low in a single-shot jackpot, it is difficult to guess or recognize a non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot, it is difficult to estimate or recognize a non-set value (set value) when the number of consecutive holidays is small, but as the number of consecutive holidays increases, a game ball to the special out ball end 373. Since the expected value of the number of entered balls of 99 becomes high, the game property that the difficulty of estimating the non-set value (set value) is reduced is provided. That is, in the present embodiment, the set value can be estimated by identifying or estimating some or all of the plurality of non-set values by stacking all or some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. is there. As described above, in the gaming machine 10, by suppressing the setting value from being easily specified or guessed (narrowed down), a more accurate non-setting value (setting value) can be obtained by the jackpot condominium while meeting the wishes of the store. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the wishes of the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store side and the player side is provided.

  By the way, in a conventional slot machine, an image suggesting or clearly indicating a set value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed. The image that suggests or clearly indicates the setting value is displayed on, for example, a big hit confirmation screen, a big hit start screen, a big hit end screen, a start screen such as ART or AT, a continuation screen, and an end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. To be done. Specifically, in an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate a setting value as a jackpot game end screen, there is a certain probability that it is a specific setting value or more (for example, an intermediate setting. Value (setting value 4 to 6) or more), high setting value (eg setting value 5 or 6), odd setting value (eg setting value 1, 3 or 5), even setting value ( For example, a screen is displayed to suggest or clearly indicate that the setting value is 2, 4 or 6), that the setting value is not a specific setting value (for example, the negation of the setting value 1), or that it is the highest setting value (for example, the setting value 6). ..

  However, in the conventional suggestion or manifestation of the set value in the slot machine, the probability that a default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate the set value is presented is set so that the set value is not easily specified or inferred, and the set value is set. The probability that a suggestive or explicit screen is presented is set low. In particular, the probability of setting or suggesting a setting value that is a setting value advantageous to the player, or the probability that the setting value is a specific setting value is set low. Further, the suggestion of an odd set value or an even set value tends to have low reliability, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Further, in the slot machine, even if it suggests or clearly indicates that it is a high setting value, no suggestion or manifestation that denies it is a high setting value (for example, setting value 5 or 6) is executed. No suggestion or clarification to deny that the value is the set value (for example, the set value 6) is executed. That is, in the slot machine, the presentation of information that is disadvantageous to the player and that denies the high set value is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is set according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period as described above, that is, the number of game balls that enter the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period. Information (non-set value) whose value can be estimated is displayed as numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, since the numbers of the non-setting values are displayed one by one on the 7-segment display unit 39, the setting values can be guessed because a part of the non-setting values can be specified or guessed. Since all the non-set values can be recognized by displaying the numbers, the set value can be specified.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fundamentally different from the one that is suggested or clearly indicated by the set value at a fixed rate as used in a gaming machine such as a slot machine. It is possible to recognize the set value by specifying a plurality of non-set values based on. Further, in the present embodiment, the non-setting value (setting value) is explicitly shown depending on the number of specific conditions (the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out opening 373) that is satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Or, it is also suggested, and in this respect also, it is different from the conventional game machine in which the suggestion or manifestation of the set value is executed at a constant rate. Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of jackpots increases, the difficulty of identifying or inferring a part or all of the plurality of non-set values decreases, and thus, in a gaming machine such as a conventional slot machine. It is different from the suggestion or manifestation of the set value of.

  Then, in the present embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values depending on the number of specific conditions (the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out opening 373) satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Unlike the conventional gaming machine, the frequency of presenting the information for specifying the setting value is not reduced, as long as the predetermined period continues (the jackpot Renso continues. As long as the information for identifying the non-set value (set value) is continuously presented, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the set value and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the specific condition is satisfied by the number of non-set values in the predetermined period, all non-set values can be specified. In other words, regardless of the height of the non-setting values, all the non-setting values including information disadvantageous to the player are presented to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the setting value is suggested or clearly shown in the conventional slot machine, even the disadvantageous information is presented to the player so as to deny the highest setting value. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for specifying or inferring the set value, so that the game is continued in the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. It can be determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value of 5 or more) is delayed so that it is easy to select. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order in which the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) are earlier, so that the numbers can be easily selected. In this way, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value is delayed, so that the higher set value is displayed later. This allows the player to expect a high set value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value, so that the set value can be expected to be high while the non-set value is expected. You can enjoy by guessing (setting value).

[Ending added image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending additional image control processing executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending-added image control process, the MPU 51 updates various information in the already-displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 in FIG. 41, that is, the current specific period has elapsed in step S2401. The already displayed number flag information, the displayed number flag information, and the already displayed segment flag information are read out, and an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game is determined based on these information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image showing the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image for which a non-set value can be specified or estimated (FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) and FIG. 47 (C). )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 an additional image display command for displaying the additional image determined in step S2402 on the design display section 341 in the ending effect. Thereby, in the symbol display unit 341, an additional image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending effect.

  Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 in the ending first half of the probability variation jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is a screen of the symbol display unit 341 in the ending first half of the normal jackpot. Here is an example. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C) are screen examples (setting value suggestion screen examples) of the symbol display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending in the probability variation jackpot game, it is clearly indicated in the symbol display section 341 as the first half part of the ending effect that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are to be set after the completion of the probability variation jackpot game. The image to be displayed is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending in the normal jackpot game, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (time saving mode) after the end of the normal jackpot game in the symbol display portion 341 as the first half part of the ending effect. An image that clearly indicates that you want to move to is displayed. In addition, in the first half part of the ending effect, in addition to the image that clearly shows the game mode to be transferred after the end of the big hit game, an image that clearly shows the number of jackpot games and the number of coins to be played is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the latter half part of the ending effect of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process of FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, It includes five setting value suggestive images simulating the 7-segment display unit 39 on which the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43 (B), as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed. The additional image including the image simulating the display state of is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. When the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44 (C) through FIG. 44 (B), as shown in FIG. 47 (B2). An additional image including a set value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44 (B) and a set value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. Is displayed. Furthermore, when all five numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the end of the predetermined period, each number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47 (C). The additional image including the set value suggesting image simulating the displayed state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. In the example shown in FIG. 47C, an image indicating that the numbers “2” to “6” other than the number “1” are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. In this case, it can be specified that the non-setting value is "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the setting value is "1".

  In this way, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period as the second half part includes the addition of five setting value suggestive images simulating the 7-segment display unit 39. It is displayed as an image. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information regarding the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the jackpot game. As a result, when it is not possible to know that the information regarding the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is overlooked, or the past 7-segment display unit during the predetermined period is displayed. Even if the display content on 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can identify or infer a non-setting value at the ending and recognize or infer the setting value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game.

  As an ending effect of the jackpot game, whether or not an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is a design matter. In, it is conceivable that the additional image is not displayed on the symbol display portion 341. In this way, when the additional image is not displayed in the ending effect, if there is a number displayed in the past in the predetermined period, if the number is not stored or recorded, it is first displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39. It becomes difficult to identify or infer a non-set value based on the numbers given, and thus to infer or recognize the set value. That is, by not displaying the additional image in the ending effect, the difficulty of specifying or estimating the non-setting value (setting value) is increased, so the setting value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized early, and at least it is not a high setting value. It can be prevented from being recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type that triggered the jackpot game is the 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R regular jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2305. If the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the ending addition image control process is performed. To finish.

<Step S2405>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: YES), the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area (sets all flags to OFF), and ends the ending additional image control processing. That is, the MPU 51 initializes the already-displayed information storage area when the jackpot is the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or inferred, while the non-set value (set value) can be specified, or in order to increase the accuracy of inference, in a predetermined period. It is necessary to insert more game balls 99 into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, the game hall has an advantage that the player cannot easily know the set value. On the other hand, for the player, there is an advantage that the set value can be specified or estimated. In addition, it is possible to specify or infer the setting value by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of the estimation of the setting value is improved by the continuous success of the jackpot jackpot (Okatsu Renso), and in some cases the setting value is It is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a game property of being recognizable. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

  In addition, when the jackpot game is started, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there is special circumstances, and in the high probability mode, the game is not ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first time to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the predetermined period. As a result, even when the player who cannot know the timing (end of the predetermined period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated advances the game, the non-set value (set value) is specified or It is prevented that the game is ended immediately before it becomes possible to guess. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing at which the non-setting value (setting value) can be specified or estimated can guess or recognize the non-setting value (setting value). In addition, it is possible to exclude the so-called hyena action of other players who play games aiming at a timing when a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated.

  In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot winning in the low-probability mode of the first hit, at least once before the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. Not only is the jackpot winning of the condition a condition, but even if the predetermined period is started, due to the high hurdles to identify the non-set value (set value) as described above, the non-set value (set value) Until a certain amount is guessed or specified, a considerable number of game balls 99 are shot to the game board 31, and a considerable number of jackpot lottery is drawn. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the unit jackpot lottery number (easiness of receiving the jackpot lottery) can be sufficiently determined. As a result, when the player can guess or identify the non-set value (set value) with high accuracy, the gaming machine 10 including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the unit jackpot lottery number is played. Since it is possible to determine the payout performance of, it is possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the set value is low, it is possible to comprehensively consider and determine to continue the game when the number of lots per unit jackpot is large. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of lottery units is small, it is possible to comprehensively consider and abandon the continuation of the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, information for identifying or estimating the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, but the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 is a symbol at the ending of the jackpot game. It is displayed on the display unit 341. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can confirm the information regarding the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the jackpot game. As a result, when it is not possible to know that the information regarding the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is overlooked, or the past 7-segment display unit during the predetermined period is displayed. Even if the display content on 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player identifies or estimates a non-setting value at the ending based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and recognizes or estimates the setting value to advance the game. You can enjoy.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display history in the predetermined period in the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed in the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the display history in the predetermined period in the 7-segment display unit 39 is It may be displayed on a display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the display history in the predetermined period may be displayable in a special period other than the specified period. For example, in the standby state in which neither the variation game nor the jackpot game is executed, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is displayed on the display unit such as the symbol display unit 341 by the predetermined operation of the game machine 10 by the player. May be displayed. In this way, by displaying the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 or the like after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the past 7-segment display This makes it possible to confirm the contents displayed on the section 39, for example. As a result, it becomes possible to specify or infer the non-set value based on the past display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39. Displaying the display history on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like will be described in detail in a fourth embodiment described later.

  In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state, it is possible to confirm when the display content on the past 7-segment display unit 39 is forgotten. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed in the symbol display portion 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, anyone can confirm the display history by performing a predetermined operation on the vacant gaming machine 10. You can That is, it is possible to piggyback on a privilege obtained by another person to specify or infer a non-set value (set value), and so-called hyena action is allowed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not allowed to confirm the display history in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period after the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the display of the specific information indicating the non-set value including the display history in the predetermined period is limited in the period other than the specified period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to exclude a hyena act of piggybacking on a privilege obtained by another person to specify or infer a non-set value (set value).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first hit is a probability variation big hit, a predetermined period is set from the start of the big hit game of the first hit to the normal big hit game for the normal big hit in the high probability mode, The predetermined period may be set one for each big hit regardless of the kind of big hit. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the long-distance hit. In the predetermined period in this case, the start time of the big hit game or opening / closing execution mode is started, and the end time of the big hit game or opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Instead of or in addition to displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-setting values, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. In the case of, the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 displays a number or an alphabet corresponding to the non-set value, and the non-set value is clearly displayed in the design display portion 341. You may make it perform reach production. As the non-set value explicit reach effect, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, for example, it is conceivable to stop and display the decorative design with the number of the solo eye corresponding to the non-set value. Thus, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, and the symbol display portion 341 does not display the numbers. By executing the non-set value explicit reach effect that explicitly indicates the set value, not only whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game is a jackpot, but the player also has the first special symbol display portion 362 in the variable game. Alternatively, the variable game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the numbers and the like that are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display portion 363 and focusing on the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display portion 341. Further, when the non-set value explicit reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, in the reach of the decorative design of the number corresponding to the set value, the number is not aligned with the doublet and is stopped and displayed as the outlier. It is also possible. For example, when the setting value is 1, the decoration pattern can be stopped and displayed at "222", "333", "444", "555" and "666", but not displayed at "111" and the decoration pattern can be displayed. If 1 is 1, the reach is always missed. In this way, it is desirable that the decorative pattern is normally stopped and displayed by the number of the solo eye because the doublet of the number corresponding to the set value is not stopped and displayed. Since it is preferable that the solo display is not stopped and displayed, the reach effect can be enjoyed from a viewpoint different from the conventional one.

  Further, the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363, such as the display of numbers or the like corresponding to the non-set value, or the non-set value explicit reach effect can be executed only at a specific timing Can also be considered. In this way, by limiting the display to the first special symbol display portion 362 or the second special symbol display portion 363 such as a number corresponding to the non-set value, or by executing the non-set value explicit reach effect by limiting to a specific timing. You can enjoy the game focusing on the variable game that is executed at a specific timing.

  As the specific timing, for example, in the variation game executed in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, in the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery The timing of notifying that the jackpot is a big hit can be considered. In this way, by explicitly indicating or suggesting a non-set value in the fluctuation game in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, the high frequency support mode can quickly release the hold, and the probability variation game state or the time saving game state tends to be monotonous. You can enjoy the variable game in. In addition, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games executed after the probability variation game state or the time saving game state is shifted is within a predetermined number of times. For example, the predetermined number of times, when the number of variable games executed after the probability variation game state is shifted is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more). ) May be set. That is, when a big jackpot is early after the transition to the probability variation game state, or when the number of fluctuation games until the big hit is a humiliating state, the non-set value may be explicitly indicated or suggested. In this case, a non-set value is explicitly indicated or suggested as a bonus for early jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, or as a relief for Hamari. Further, the predetermined number of times, when the number of variable games executed after the transition to the time saving game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time saving game state (for example, 90 to 100 times). It is possible to set it. In this case, a non-set value is explicitly indicated or suggested as a privilege for a big jackpot from the end of the big jackpot game, or a jackpot just before the end of time saving.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the above-described first embodiment and other embodiments described below may be selected and combined arbitrarily.

[Second Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (a period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening / closing execution mode for the jackpot game for the jackpot) A specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening / closing execution mode) is set, and the number satisfying a specific condition (the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 within the specific period). In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set based on the number of), all or part of the specific information (number) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-setting values (setting values) is displayed in the 7-segment display unit 39. The case where it is presented to was explained.

  By the way, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, as in the first embodiment described above, in the big hit condominium, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of condominiums are predetermined. It is set within the period. Therefore, in the jackpot game, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 at each ending of each big hit game. That is, at the jackpot Renso, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple times. However, if all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, if all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple times, it is executed first. If the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game is not stored or recorded, it is not possible to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specified information presented at the ending of the jackpot game that is executed first. It will be difficult. That is, when the specific information presented in the past is not accurately stored or recorded on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is difficult to effectively specify or estimate the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or infer the non-set value (set value), there is the trouble of accurately storing or recording the specific information presented in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, and as a result, It is also assumed that the player gives up specifying or guessing a non-set value (set value). In this case, it is possible to identify or infer a non-set value (set value), thereby burying the significance of improving the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the specific period is not set in the predetermined period as in the above-described first embodiment, and 1 is set for each predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Only once, the specific information for specifying or estimating the non-setting value (setting value) is presented. As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific information for specifying or inferring the non-setting value (setting value) is set only once for each predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Is presented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inconvenience in the case where the specific information is presented a plurality of times in a predetermined period as in the above-described first embodiment is eliminated. That is, in this embodiment, since the specific information is presented only once after the end of the predetermined period for one predetermined period, there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and There is no specific information to store or record. As a result, the player can identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information presented only once for the predetermined period of time, and thus the player is presented. The troublesomeness of accurately storing or recording the specific information is released. Therefore, the player can easily or effectively specify or infer the non-setting value (setting value), so that the player can enjoy the game while specifying or inferring the non-setting value (setting value). The interest is improved.

  In the example of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low-probability mode to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the jackpot. The specific condition is that the game ball is inserted into the special out end of the clune device. In addition, in the example of the present embodiment, the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the above-described first embodiment, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is set to one predetermined period. On the other hand, it is only the ending (after the end of the predetermined period) in the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the specific information is presented to the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending addition image control process are different from those in the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 49 is executed by the set value suggestion process of FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process performed, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an ending addition image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Set value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggesting process in the present embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), the setting value suggesting process in the above-described first embodiment (FIG. 40). Different from (see), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), a game ball that has entered the special out mouth 373 of the clune device 37. Control of vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 that receives 99, and processing for counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retaining portion 38 in a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). .. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 during the predetermined period. Is counted once.

  Further, in the set value suggestion process of the present embodiment, on condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), control of vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38, and game ball retention in a predetermined period. By performing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the unit 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display control process (step S2502) and the ending addition image control process (step S2503) are also performed. , The 5R normal jackpot game is set on the condition that the end of the predetermined period is the 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203), which is set on the condition that the 5R normal jackpot game is set (step S2203). S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control process]
The 7-segment display control process in the present embodiment is executed when the ending is started in the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (when the opening / closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends). Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display unit control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display unit control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment, When the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the 7-segment display unit control is performed instead of reading the control order of the 7-segment display unit control information and the already-displayed information (see FIG. 42). Only the control order of information is read (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display unit control processing of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit is displayed only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period (after the end of the predetermined period). Since 39 is controlled (specific information is presented), it is not necessary to read the already-displayed information to control the 7-segment display unit 39.

[Ending added image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending additional image control processing in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control processing (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment described above, but the above-described first additional image control processing is performed. Step S2404 in the ending additional image control process in the embodiment is omitted. That is, the ending-added image control process of the present embodiment is executed with the 5R normal jackpot as a trigger (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggesting process of FIG. 48) until it is determined that the 5R normal jackpot is hit. In step S2405, the already-displayed information storage area is initialized.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific information (numerical value) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is set only once in the predetermined period based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. All or part of) is presented. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and there is no specific information to be stored or recorded by the player. As a result, the player can identify or guess the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information presented only once for the predetermined period of time, and thus the player is presented. The troublesomeness of accurately storing or recording the specific information is released. Therefore, the player can easily or effectively specify or infer the non-setting value (setting value), so that the player can enjoy the game while specifying or inferring the non-setting value (setting value). The interest is improved.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first embodiment can be made within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) are specified or inferred after the lapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the specific period. The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information (numbers) for displaying is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values as the specific information are determined when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the set values are changed. The case of displaying according to (see FIG. 36) has been described. Furthermore, in the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the number display order when numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the plurality of numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values as the specific information are determined in the number display order when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the set values are changed (FIG. 36). In the case of displaying each number in the 7-segment display section 39, unless the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the setting value is changed, The control order of the segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, when the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in a preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information than the specific information already presented is obtained, It is not possible to obtain new specific information. As a result, if it is expected that the number of specific conditions that will be satisfied in a predetermined number of times will be small, such as a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, a specific condition that is satisfied , There is a concern that interest in specific information presented after a specific period of time may decrease.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the order in which the specific information is presented (numeral display order and segment display order) is determined (changed) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, by determining the order of presenting the specific information when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is more than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Even if the number is small, there is a possibility that new specific information will be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that a small number of specific conditions will be satisfied in a predetermined number of times, such as a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period is satisfied. It is possible to make the number of specific conditions interested and also to give specific information presented after the lapse of a specific period. As a result, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can specify or infer a non-setting value (setting value) according to the number satisfying a specific condition. Become.

  The predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order of presenting the specific information include, for example, winning a jackpot, opening a jackpot game, opening / closing execution mode, or starting the jackpot game ending. Is possible. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) each time the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the presentation order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, and thus the same specific information is prevented from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information is prevented from being monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time the jackpot game is executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to make the presentation order of the specific information in the jackpot game interesting, so that the interest in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Also, as a predetermined condition, to win a particular jackpot (eg, probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, or jackpot in low probability mode), a specific jackpot game (eg, probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, or low probability mode) It is conceivable that the opening of the jackpot game for the jackpot), the opening / closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined condition in this manner, the number of times the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced as compared with the case where the predetermined condition is not limited to a specific jackpot or a jackpot game. Therefore, the possibility that new information is presented with respect to the specific information that is presented in advance is reduced, thereby increasing the difficulty in identifying all non-set values (set values). , It is possible to prevent all non-set values from being specified (setting values are specified) in an early stage. Thus, for example, when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game early.

  Further, as the predetermined condition, it is possible that a predetermined period or a specific period starts or ends. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, as the predetermined condition, it may be considered that a specific effect is determined or executed as the variable game effect. The specific effect in this case may be set to either a non-reach effect or a reach effect, for example. Typically, the specific effect is a premium effect in which a big hit or a probability variation big hit of the variable game effects is fixed. Further, as a specific effect, it is also conceivable that the decorative display is stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop) in a specific combination in the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed at "777" in the design display portion 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach-out eye such as "767", a specific non-reach-outside eye such as "367" is displayed. Temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that development effects are executed when development effects such as super reach effects and special reach effects are executed as reach effects, as well as when the stop effects are displayed (interlaced) Display) is considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is executed, for example, “7 development 7”, the left and right decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in the reach state (intermediate stop display), and It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as "development" is executed is temporarily stopped and displayed as the symbol. Even when the predetermined condition is set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as the specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, the order in which the specific information is presented can be made interesting, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, as the predetermined condition, it is possible that the single-shot jackpot is repeated a plurality of times, the presentation order of the same specific information is repeated a plurality of times, and the like. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new information as the specific information. Therefore, new information can be easily obtained as the specific information, so that a feeling of boredom when new specific information cannot be obtained can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) with respect to the predetermined condition that is first satisfied may be given priority, or finally. You may give priority to the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) with respect to the predetermined conditions to be satisfied.

  In an example of the present embodiment, a plurality of non-settings as specific information are provided on the condition that the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started (a predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started). The display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the values, and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined, and the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set according to these display orders (ending of the predetermined period After the elapse), all or part of the numbers for specifying the plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the table referred by. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on the display order setting processing which is a difference from the above-described first embodiment.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The big hit game effect start flag is a flag indicating that the big hit game effect is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination processing of FIG. 37. When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the display order. The setting process ends.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game effect is a jackpot in the low-probability mode (step S2602). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the big hit is the first hit and the predetermined period is started. Whether or not it is a jackpot of the low probability mode, for example, when the jackpot game is started, whether the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game is of the low probability mode or the high probability mode In addition to including the probability mode information indicating the jackpot game start command, when the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main controller 4 to the voice lamp controller 5, based on the probability mode information in the command determination process of FIG. It can be determined by setting a flag indicating a big hit in the low-probability mode to on or off and confirming the flag by the MPU 51. The probability mode information may be set as a command different from the jackpot game start command.

  Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2603 when it is the big hit in the low-probability mode (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the big hit is the big hit (the big hit which is the start of the predetermined period). On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process when it is not a big hit in the low-probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, when it is a big hit in the high-probability mode (step S2602: No).

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
When it is a big hit in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39. Is determined (step S2604), the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process ends.

  Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is the same as that in step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. It is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in. The determined display order of the numbers is stored in the RAM 512.

  In addition, the control order of the segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders of the segments A to G are defined by the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. Probability is set to the same. The control order of the segments A to G is determined from the plurality of control orders to the same order for each number according to the value of the control order type counter when the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set. It Further, the determined control order of the segments A to G is stored in the RAM 512.

  In the present embodiment, when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A to G are all controlled in the same order with respect to the numbers. May be different. That is, the control order of the segments A to G may be individually determined for each of the plurality of numbers corresponding to the non-set values.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. This determines the order of presenting the specific information when the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is more than the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Even if the number is small, new specific information may be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that a small number of specific conditions will be satisfied in a predetermined number of times, such as a jackpot game for a single-shot jackpot, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period is satisfied. It is possible to make the number of specific conditions interested and also to give specific information presented after the lapse of a specific period. As a result, it becomes possible to more effectively improve the enjoyment of the game by presenting the specific information in accordance with the number satisfying the specific condition in which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. .

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first and second embodiments can be made within an applicable range.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, based on the number that a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, after a specific period has elapsed (ending of a jackpot game), specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is set. The case has been described in which all or part is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is finished with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined specified period (after the specified period has elapsed).

  By the way, when a player misses or forgets to present specific information in a prescribed period, he or she forgets to specify or infer multiple non-setting values in consideration of the specific information displayed in the past. It is expected that they would like to reconfirm the information. Further, when the player is changed, it is assumed that the changed player wants to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the specified period, the specific information cannot be reconfirmed because the specific information is not presented outside the specified period.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information presented in the past can be presented in a special period other than the specified period. As described above, since it is possible to present the specific information presented in the past in the special period other than the specified period, the player can confirm the specific information presented in the past in the special period. That is, the player can reconfirm the specific information displayed in the past when he / she misses or forgets to present the specific information in the prescribed period, and when the player is replaced, the game after the replacement is performed. The player can confirm the specific information presented to the player in the past. As a result, the player can specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) in consideration of the specific information presented to the player in the past, so that the non-setting values (setting values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

  Here, as the special period, for example, a period of a standby state (customer waiting state) in which neither the variation game nor the jackpot game is executed can be mentioned. Since the special period is the standby state period in this way, it is possible to confirm the specific information presented in the past while the game is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual effects of various effects, such as the variation game effect and the jackpot game effect, which are executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like from being obstructed as the game progresses.

  In addition, when it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state, a predetermined input such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed on the specific display screen that can be moved in the standby state. It is also conceivable that the operation is performed. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending or the like in the jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, the password or command is displayed by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code or the like on the pattern display unit 341 in the jackpot game, and reading the matrix type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone. It may be possible to enter by so-called mobile link transmission, which is transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

  In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past in the waiting period, on condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, Only a player who can enter a password, command, etc., that is, only a player who has been presented with all or part of the specified information, can confirm all or part of the specified information that was presented in the past during the standby state. Will be possible. As a result, it is possible to eliminate a so-called hyena act or a free ride in which all or part of the past specific information is confirmed by another player.

  In addition, by reading a matrix type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be moved in the standby state using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a mobile phone, all or part of the specific information presented in the past on the mobile terminal. It is also possible to make it be presented.

In addition, the special period may be set during a jackpot game, for example, during the opening, the opening / closing execution mode, or the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game in this manner, past specific information is presented in a state where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not clearly shown or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the presentation or suggestion of the result of the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of the specific information. In addition, the jackpot game tends to decrease the player's interest because it is executed after the variable game clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, but such a jackpot game is presented in the past. By presenting such specific information, interest in the jackpot game is improved.

  Also, as the special period, it is possible to set it during a variable game. Here, in the total time in which the game is executed (the time when the power is turned on in the game machine 10 excluding the time in the standby state), as a theoretical value, the variation game as compared to the execution time of the jackpot variation game. Takes longer to run. Therefore, since it is possible to present the past specific information during the variable game, it is possible to set many timings at which the past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during the variable game, a fixed period before the decorative design is stopped and displayed, for example, in the non-reach state where the reach effect is not executed as the variable game effect or when the variable time is short, It is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the visual confirmation or indication of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery due to the stop display of the decorative pattern from being disturbed.

  Further, the presentation of the past specific information in the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed by the player's intention.

  When the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to present the past specific information at a timing not predicted by the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with an unexpected game playability. Further, since the past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the game machine 10 without the player performing any operation on the game machine 10, even a player who has little knowledge of the game machine 10 , It becomes possible to know the specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among the players.

  Here, as an example of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, for example, presenting the specific information presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state, a variable game In the case where a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in, presenting the specific information presented in the past before the reach effect is executed at a fixed rate (including 100%), a variable game or For example, it is decided to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery executed at a specific timing of the jackpot game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as the demonstration screen in the standby state, the player considers the past specific information presented in the demonstration screen and the game machine for executing the game from the empty base. Since 10 can be selected, the degree of freedom and convenience in selecting the gaming machine 10 that executes a game are improved. Further, when the specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in the variable game, when the specific information presented in the past is presented before the reach effect is executed, the presentation of the past specific information is performed. Since it plays a role as a preliminary announcement effect for the execution of a specific reach effect, the interest in the variable game is improved. In addition, the presentation of the specific information in the past in the variable game, the expectation suggesting effect (including the confirming effect indicating that it is a big hit) that suggests the expectation (reliability) when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, or It may be possible to execute it as a chance-up effect for improving the expectation (reliability). Even in this case, the interest in the variable game is improved. Further, when the specific information presented in the past is presented by the lottery executed at the specific timing of the variable game or the jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at the random specific timing determined by the gaming machine 10. For this reason, it is possible to particularly impart the unexpectedness to the game. When the player can know the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing. Is improved.

  On the other hand, when the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the player's intention, the special information is provided without waiting passively for the past specific information to be presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10. During the period, the player can positively confirm the past specific information at his / her favorite timing. Therefore, when a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) are specified or estimated in consideration of past specific information, the intention of the player is reflected in the timing at which the past specific information is presented without being limited by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, convenience is improved.

  Here, as an example in which the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the player's intention, the operation button 20 is operated by the player in the special period set in the standby state, the variation game, and the jackpot game. For example, presenting the specific information presented in the past when a predetermined operation with respect to etc. is performed.

  In an example of the present embodiment, all or a part of the specific information (numerals) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 in the ending of the jackpot game (specified period) is displayed, and in the standby state. By performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or the selection determination unit 21 during the period (special period), all or part of the specific information (number) displayed at the ending of the last three big hit games is displayed. It is displayed on the symbol display portion 341. In the example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or a command. Is.

  In the following, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63.

  Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes a selection determination unit 21 provided in the front frame 11.

  The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that receives a pressing operation of the player in a standby state described later and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player in order to provisionally select a desired item from options (items) on various screens such as a top menu screen in a standby state screen transition process of FIGS. 61 and 62 described later. This includes the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214. Here, the tentative selection means a state in which the content of the tentative selection is confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the decision button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is, as shown in FIG. 54, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch which switch an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5. 211d is provided. These switches 211 a to 211 d are connected to the input / output I / F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the selection buttons 211 to 214 are operated based on the input signals of the switches 211a to 211d.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is started, it is determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is performed. Of course, when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is continued or the operation is completed, it may be determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is performed. .

  On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the temporarily selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input / output I / F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the determination operation switch 21Ba is operated based on the input signal of the determination operation switch 21Ba.

  Further, it is conceivable that, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the determination button 21B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives a player's operation on the touch key is provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214) and the determination button 21B, it is conceivable to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 for receiving the operation of the player. It is also possible to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Further, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the determination operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches or the like, but may be, for example, piezoelectric elements or the like as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player. .

  Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, in addition to the same process (steps S2000 to S2005) as the sub-timer interrupt process of the above-described first embodiment, an operation detection process ( The step S2701) and the standby state screen shift process (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process of detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, 21B. Here, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 determines the operation button operation detection process (step S2801), the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), and the selection operation detection pattern determination. Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and the process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41 to operate the operation button 20 at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence will be determined. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Further, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, the processes of steps S2901 to S2903 are executed, so that the operation state of the operation button 20 for the last three operation states at 1 msec intervals is the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination processing of step S2802 in the operation detection processing, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history is set. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38 (A)). Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started (see FIG. 38 (A)). Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38 (A)). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated (see FIG. 38 (A)). Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination processing. Further, FIG. 59A is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59 (A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3002, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the processing is executed. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3003, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the latest operation state of the operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3004, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to on and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are generated as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times, and the second operation pattern is set. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)). Then, the first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit this operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. . As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation on the operation button 20 is continuing. Therefore, the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can grasp the time. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the long press operation is performed on the operation button 20 based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated, and thus the operation button effect based on the long press operation is performed. Can be executed.

<Step S3005>
When determining that the first operation detection flag is not on in step S3001 (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. It is determined (step S3005). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3006, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), executes the processing. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the process is executed. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off. That is, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” are generated as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times, and the first operation pattern is set. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)), and the operation detection pattern determination process is ended. Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3010, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the processing is performed. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” are generated as the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times, and the first operation pattern is set. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59 (A)). Then, the third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). it can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 59 (A)). Note that the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes the up selection button operation process, the down selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Up select button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “up selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that in the lower selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

<Right select button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, a lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects an upper portion from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 that is determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. The upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is “upper selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is “upper selection operation pattern. It should be read as "flag".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the upper selection button 211. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times, The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times, the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. All off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operational state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Down selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is the “lower selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “lower selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times, The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times, the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the down selection button 212 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third down selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 that is determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description will be omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is the “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “left selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the operation states of the left selection button 213 for three times. When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times. The 1st left selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, or “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times. The 1st left selection operation pattern flag and the 2nd left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has ended). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the left selection button 213 for three times, the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all off. Note that the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the “operation detection flag” is the “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is the “right selection operation pattern”. It should be read as "flag".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the operation states of the right selection button 214 for three times. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occur as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, The 1st right selection operation pattern flag and the 3rd right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). Used.

  Further, the MPU 41, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the right selection button 214 for three times, the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. All off. The MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operation state when all the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
In the enter button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the enter button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern determination processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 of FIG. 56), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. To set an operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the decision button 21B. Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, and thus detailed description will be omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 generates operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the second determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” are generated as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times, and the first determination is performed. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). ..

  Further, the MPU 41 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occur as the operation states of the determination button 21B for three times, and the first determination is performed. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. Then, the third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has ended). ..

  Further, when the operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the decision button 21B for three times, the MPU 41 sets all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags. Set to off. The MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operation state when all the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off.

[Standby screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed in 2702 of the sub timer interruption process, in the standby state in which neither the variation game nor the jackpot game is executed, the operation button 20, the selection button 21A or the decision button. In response to an operation on the button 21B, the screen of the symbol display portion 341 is moved, and processing for enabling various selections and settings by the player is executed. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the symbol display unit 341 in the standby state.

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the variable display of the decorative design is stopped, the number of holdings N and the number of holdings M are “0”, and when the jackpot gaming state is not entered, the variation of the decorative design is stopped. The status change stop screen is maintained. Then, when the player operates the operation button 20 after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and a cursor image.

  The plurality of screen transfer images are images for selecting the display screen of the transfer destination, and include a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the transfer destination). A plurality of screen transition images are displayed on the 7-segment display history selection screen, which is displayed as "7-segment display history", and a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image, and character selection displayed as "character selection". A character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the screen, a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen displayed as "character customization", and a transition stop screen for transitioning to "back" Includes transition stop screen transition image.

  The cursor image is an image showing which of the plurality of selectable items is currently temporarily selected. Among the plurality of screen transition images, the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image is displayed. This is a temporarily selected item. In the example shown in FIG. 60, “7-segment display history” is provisionally selected. In addition, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from other screen transition images in order to emphasize the temporary selection. .. The temporary selection item can be changed by operating the up selection button 211 or the down selection button 212.

  On the top menu screen, the temporarily selected item (display screen of the transfer destination) is determined by operating the enter button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is transferred. For example, when the enter button 21B is operated when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history", the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. Will be moved to.

  The 7-segment display section history selection screen is a screen that can be changed to a history screen in which the content of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the three most recent predetermined periods, and the one-time-before history screen in which the content of the specific information for the one previous period is displayed. It includes a two-time history screen in which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period two times before is displayed, and a three-time history screen in which the content of the specific information for the predetermined period three times before is displayed. Each history screen is a history image of the same form as the additional image (see FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) and FIG. 47 (C)) displayed on the symbol display portion 341 in the latter half part of the ending of the jackpot game. including. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of a predetermined period of time, and five settings imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 on which a number corresponding to a non-set value can be displayed. Including value suggestion image. In the example shown in FIG. 60, when the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the predetermined period one time before, the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and then the segment A to It shows that C has a history of being illuminated.

  In addition, the 7-segment display history selection screen is a cursor image indicating that it is temporarily selected, and a previous history screen for shifting to a previous history screen displayed as “History 1 (previously)”. Transition image, 2 times ago history screen transition image to transition to the 2 times ago history screen displayed as "History 2 (2 times ago)" 3 times ago displayed as "History 3 (3 times ago)" It includes a three-time history screen transition image for transitioning to the history screen and a variation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the variation stop screen displayed as “End”. Then, on the 7-segment display section history selection screen, the temporarily selected item (display screen of the transfer destination) is determined by operating the enter button 21B, and the display screen corresponding to the item is transferred. For example, when the enter button 21B is operated when the player temporarily selects the previous history screen transition image of "history 1 (first time)", the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display history selection screen to 1 Move to the previous history screen. When “History 2 (2 times ago)” is selected, the 7-segment display history selection screen is moved to the 2 times previous history screen, and when “History 3 (3 times before)” is selected Shifts from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen three times. When "End" is selected, the 7-segment display history selection screen is moved to the top menu screen.

  In this way, it is possible to switch from the 7-segment display history selection screen to any of the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, and the three-time history screen by the player's selection. That is, the player can confirm the history information desired by himself by shifting to the history screen desired by himself. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the history while avoiding confirmation of history information such as previously confirmed information and information having a small amount of information, so that the history can be efficiently confirmed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the information for identifying the non-set value in the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 different from the symbol display unit 341 in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed. Therefore, even when displaying the information for specifying the non-set value, the visual recognition of the image effect executed in the symbol display unit 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 different from the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, since the display area of the symbol display unit 341 is generally large, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the symbol display unit 341 may be used to perform various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the history information can be confirmed by the same operation as the operation for making various settings. Therefore, the convenience of confirming the history information is improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also possible to display a plurality of history information on one screen at the same time. In this case, since many histories can be confirmed at once, the presented contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

  Also, in the top menu screen, the display screen is moved to the character selection screen when the "character selection" character screen transition image is selected, and is displayed when the "character customization" character customization screen transition image is selected. The screen is moved to the character customization screen. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in a variation game effect or the like, and it is possible to customize the costume, accessory, hairstyle, etc. of the character.

  When the "return" transition stop screen transition image is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen is transitioned to the transition stop screen.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the latest three predetermined periods is confirmed by operating the selection determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in the standby state. You can Therefore, the player can reconfirm past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he / she overlooks or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. In the case of the change, the player after the change can check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. As a result, the player can specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) in consideration of past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39, and thus the non-setting values (setting values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

Here, FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the standby state screen shift process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the procedure of the standby state screen shift process executed in step S2702 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen shift processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the variable game effect flag set to ON in step S2105 in the command determination processing of FIG. 37 to OFF (step S3101: No), and the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. In the jackpot game production process of step S2004, when the jackpot game production in-process flag which is set to ON when the display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 is set to OFF (step S3102: No), in the standby state Judge that there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in the standby state when the variable game effect flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or when the jackpot game effect flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes). To judge.

  Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3103 when it is in the standby state (No in steps S3101 and S3102), and ends the standby state screen shift processing when it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102). .

<Step S3103>
When it is in the standby state (No in steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 is the fluctuation stop screen. This fluctuation stop screen flag is changed from the fluctuation game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the fluctuation stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state, which will be described with reference to FIG. Is set to ON in step S3120. The fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when the display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen is changed to the fluctuation stop screen. Specifically, when the fluctuation stop screen flag is changed from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109 of FIG. 62 described later, the fluctuation stop screen flag is displayed in the previous history screen process of step S3113. Is changed from the previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen, the display screen is changed from the second time history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen in the second time history screen process of step S3115, and the case of step S3117 It is also set to ON when the display screen is changed from the three-time history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen in the three-time history screen process. The fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is changed from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when fluctuation display of the decorative pattern is started.

  When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3104, and when the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No). , And the process proceeds to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination processing of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), and the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen for performing various selections and settings (step S3105) (FIG. 60). reference). That is, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen when the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the fluctuation display screen.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen to ON (step S3106), and sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to OFF (step S3106). (S3107), the standby state screen shift processing is ended.

<Step S3108>
When the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON as shown in FIG. It is determined (step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when shifting the display screen from the various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). When the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3109, and when the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the process is executed. The procedure moves to S3110.

<Step S3109>
When the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, the item temporarily selected is changed according to the operation on the selection button 21A. In the top menu screen processing, a screen corresponding to an item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated, specifically, a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character. Move the display screen to the customization screen. Further, when the display screen is moved from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transfer destination screen to on, while setting the top menu screen flag to off.

<Step S3110>
When the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display history selection screen is set to ON. It is determined (step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), The process moves to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 7-segment history selection screen process. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process executed when the 7-segment display history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), is the MPU 51 set to the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3112). The previous-one-time history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the seven-segment display history selection screen to the one-time history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen process of FIG. 63 described later. It Then, if the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112). S3112: No), and moves the process to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
When the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the one-time-before history screen processing, the display screen is shifted from the one-time-before history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen when “Return” is selected. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), is the MPU 51 set to the second previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the second previous history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3114). The second-time history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the seven-segment display history selection screen to the second-time history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen process of FIG. 63 described later. It Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3115 when the second time history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), and when the second time history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3115). S3114: No), and the process proceeds to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
When the second time history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second time history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the second-time history screen process, the display screen is shifted from the second-time history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen when “Return” is selected. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the second time history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 sets the third time history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the third time history screen to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3116). The 6th previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen process of FIG. 63 described later. It Then, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3117 when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), and when the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116). (S3116: No), the process proceeds to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
When the history screen flag for three times before is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the history screen processing for three times and ends the standby state screen shift processing. In the three-time history screen processing, the display screen is moved from the three-time history screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen when “Return” is selected. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the previous history screen flag for three times is set to off (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to on. Yes (step S3118). The other screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. When the other screen flag is set to ON (step S3118: Yes), the other screen process corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition process ends. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: NO), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
When another screen flag is set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120), and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when all screen flags are off when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, the variable game state or the jackpot game state is shifted to the standby state, and it is possible to determine that the display screen is the variation stop screen. Set the stop screen flag to on.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, the display screen is displayed in the 7-segment display unit history according to the operation of the selection determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) by the player. A process of shifting from the selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, or the three-time history screen is executed (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the upper selection button 211 has been started, and the upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing in FIG. 56. It is set to ON in the pattern determination process. When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3202, and when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the process proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. Run. For example, when “History 2 (2 times before)” is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to “History 1 (1 time before)”. (See FIG. 60). If the upper selection button 211 is operated when the “history 1 (one time before)” displayed on the uppermost side of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display should not be changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to "end" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, when the operation on the upper selection button 211 is not started, the MPU 51 sets the second lower selection pattern flag to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the lower selection button 212 has been started, and the lower selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination processing in step S2804 in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56. It is set to ON in the pattern determination processing. When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3204, and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. To execute. For example, when “History 2 (2 times before)” is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to “History 3 (3 times before)”. (See FIG. 60). It should be noted that if “down” displayed on the lowermost side of the option images is provisionally selected and the lower selection button 212 is operated, the provisional selection display may not be changed. The temporary selection display may be changed to “History 1 (one time before)” displayed on the uppermost side of the image (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second determination operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the determination button 21B has been started, and is set to ON in the determination button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. It That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B is operated when the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205). S3205: No), and the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and temporarily selects when the determination button 21B is operated. It is determined whether the item that has been done is "end" (step S3207). When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3208, and temporarily when the enter button 21B is operated. When the selected item is not “end” (step S3207: No), the process proceeds to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end” (step S3207: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to ON (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen shift processing.

<Step S3210>
When the temporarily selected item is not “end” when the enter button 21B is operated (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily selected item is “history 1 (one time before)”. It is determined whether or not (step S3210). When the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (one time before)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3211, and the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (one time)". If not) (step S3210: No), the process proceeds to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
When the temporarily selected item is “history 1 (one time ago)” (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the one time history screen (step S3210). (S3211) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3212), and the 7-segment history selection screen process is ended.

<Step S3213>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “history 1 (one time before)” (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 determines that the item temporarily selected is “history 2 (2 Before) ”is determined (step S3213). When the temporarily selected item is “history 2 (twice before)” (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3214, and the temporarily selected item is “history 2 (twice)”. If not) (step S3213: No), the process moves to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
When the temporarily selected item is “history 2 (two times before)” (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the second history screen (step S3213). (S3214) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3215), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not “history 2 (twice before)” (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 determines that the item temporarily selected is “history 3 (3). Before), the display screen is moved from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), and the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON. Then (step S3217), the 7-segment history selection screen process is ended.

  In this way, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display history selection screen to any of the one-time history screen, the two-time history screen, and the three-time history screen. Then, it corresponds to each of a plurality of non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 for a predetermined period of the past three times. All or part of the specific information can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he / she overlooks or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. In the case of the change, the player after the change can check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. As a result, the player can specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) in consideration of past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39, and thus the non-setting values (setting values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

  In particular, in the standby state, unless the variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99, the display screen is the history screen (previous history screen) unless the player intentionally shifts the screen. There is no transition to other screens such as the change stop screen from the 2nd previous history screen and the 3rd previous history screen). Therefore, the player maintains the standby state by stopping the launch of the game ball 99 without the time constraint such as when the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, carefully and carefully at his / her own pace. With this, when the player specifies or infers a plurality of non-set values (set values) based on the past identification information, the player can consider carefully at his / her own pace. The convenience for specifying or guessing the setting value) is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39, which can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the operation (intention) of the player in the standby state, is the predetermined period for the past three times. However, the number of past specific information that can be displayed is not limited. That is, the specific information for a predetermined period of one time, two times, or four times or more in the past may be confirmed.

  Further, the display of the past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341, and other display means may be used as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, for example, is separately provided to display the past specific information. It may be a display unit. In addition to the symbol display unit 341, when there is a display unit provided for executing a part of the effect such as the variable game effect, past information may be displayed on the display unit. Conceivable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first to third embodiments can be made.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, each of a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) is dealt with after the lapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), based on the number that the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 is terminated when the jackpot game is over. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, every time the specific period set as the predetermined period elapses, the specific information is displayed in the specified period set after the elapse of the specific period.

  By the way, when the numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, and thus the numbers (non-displayed) are displayed. Setting value) can be specified. Further, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when the segments A to G are control targets in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, the first control target segment A is turned off. And the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are “1” and “4”. Then, the sixth control target segment F can be recognized as "4" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "1" when the segment F is turned off. That is, the number “1” or “4” can be recognized at the stage when the segment F, which is the sixth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. When the segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are “2”, “3”, “5”, and “6”. Then, it can be determined that the segment B, which is the second control target, is either “2” or “3” by being turned on, and “5” and “3” by being turned off. 6 ”. Further, the segment C, which is the third control target, can be recognized as "3" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "2" when the segment C is turned off. That is, the number “2” or “3” can be recognized at the stage when the segment C, which is the third control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. Further, the fifth control target segment E can be recognized as "6" when it is turned on, and can be recognized as "5" when the segment E is turned off. That is, the number “5” or “6” can be recognized at the stage when the segment E, which is the fifth control target before all the segments A to G are control targets, becomes the control target. That is, the numbers “2” and “3” can be recognized when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers “5” and “6” are the fifth control target segment. E can be recognized when the light is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on or off.

  However, in the above-described first embodiment, the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G are control targets. Therefore, even if the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G are controlled, the next display must be made unless all the segments A to G are controlled. The control of the segments A to G for displaying the target number is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the number to be displayed next is started. Up to this point, information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in order to specify the number already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the number to be the next display target after all the segments A to G have been controlled, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays unnecessary information for the player. May be displayed in, and there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during the period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game each time a specific period set for the jackpot game has elapsed, so that each of a plurality of non-set values is supported. All or part of the number (specific information) to be dispensed is dispensed each time the specific period elapses. Therefore, when a number corresponding to any of the non-set values is displayed in the previously passed specific period, the number may be forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or infer the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display section) having a plurality of information display sections (six individual lamp sections), the number of which is equal to or greater than the number of non-set values (five), each information display section. The information (number) for identifying the non-set value is displayed by. Each information display unit has two modes, that is, a display state in which specific information is presented (lighting state) and a non-display state in which specific information is not presented (light-off state), and the information display unit is in a display state. The non-set value can be specified by the specifying information displayed on the information display section. As described above, by setting the information display unit to one of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display unit in the display state. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can identify the non-set value is displayed as the identification information, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, since the specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, unnecessary specific information is presented. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

  The non-set value display means is not particularly limited, but for example, a display device having a plurality of lamp groups capable of individually turning on and off, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display portions, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, dots. Examples include matrix displays and plasma displays. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of information display units corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is set to the display state, and the end of the predetermined period is set until the jackpot game ends, at least the specific period. The information display unit that was previously in the display state is brought into the display state. For example, the information display unit that is in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display unit that is in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that at least in the specific period in the predetermined period But you can check. Therefore, without forgetting the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, when specifying a plurality of non-setting values based on the specific information, by convenience when specifying or guessing the setting value The property is improved.

  In addition, the information display unit in the display state in the specific period may be maintained in the display state at all times until the jackpot game in which the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set is finished, and only during the jackpot game. The display state may be maintained, or the display state may be maintained only for a specific period.

  In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp units to which any one of the numbers 1 to 6 is attached, a game ball is inserted into a special out nozzle of the clune device in a specific period. By winning the lamp lighting lottery that is executed as a result, the individual lamp part with the number corresponding to the non-setting value is attached at the stage when the lamp lighting lottery is won without waiting for the elapse of the specific period. It is turned on. Then, in the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed.

  Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modified examples of the present embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 64. 66 is a diagram showing an example of turning on / off the lamp display unit 35. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharging portion 38A instead of the game ball retaining portion 38 of the above-described first embodiment, and the above-described first embodiment. The lamp display section 35 is provided on the game board 31 instead of the 7-segment display section 39 in the embodiment.

  The special out ball discharging section 38A discharges the game ball 99, which has entered the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37, to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge part 38A has a configuration in which the stopper part 383 is omitted in the game ball retention part 38 of the first embodiment described above, and the game ball retention part 38 is omitted except that the stopper part 383 is omitted. It has the same configuration as. In such a special out ball discharging section 38A, the game ball 99 entered in the special out ball outlet 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharging section 38A. To be done. Therefore, the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after the elapse of the specific period as in the above-described first embodiment, but is in the specific period. However, the special out ball sensor 384 detects each time the game ball 99 enters the special out ball mouth 373.

  The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information that specifies a non-set value, and a plurality (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be individually turned on and off. including. The first to sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are arranged side by side in a line (linear) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. As a result, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 356 can be individually turned on and off.

  The number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp part 351, and one of the plurality of non-setting values is the game setting value 1 when the first individual lamp part 351 is turned on, and the game setting value is the setting value. 1 is denied. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp part 352, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 2 by turning on the second individual lamp part 352, and the game set value is the set value. 2 is denied. The number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp part 353, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 3 by turning on the third individual lamp part 353, and the game set value is the set value. 3 is denied. The number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp unit 354, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 4 by turning on the fourth individual lamp unit 354, and the game set value is the set value. 4 is denied. The number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp unit 355, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 5 by turning on the fifth individual lamp unit 355, and the game set value is the set value. 5 is denied. The number 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp unit 356, and one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 6 by turning on the sixth individual lamp unit 356, and the game set value is the set value. 6 is denied.

  That is, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on correspond to a plurality of non-set values, and the game set value corresponding to the numbers is denied as the set value. It When the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. The numbers corresponding to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the state correspond to the set values.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set value is 2 to 6, and it is specified that the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66B, when the first and third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are turned on and only the second individual unit lamp 352 is turned off, the non-set value is 1, 3 to 6, and the set value is specified to be 2. As shown in FIG. 66 (C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351, 352, 354 to 356 are turned on and only the third individual unit lamp 353 is turned off, non- It is specified that the set values are 1, 2, 4 to 6 and the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66D, when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 353, 355, 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp part 354 is turned off, non- It is specified that the set values are 1 to 5, 5 and 6 and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66 (E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set values are 1 to 4 and 6, and the set value is 5 is specified. As shown in FIG. 66 (F), when the first to fifth individual lamp units 351 to 355 are turned on and only the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned off, the non-setting values are 1 to 5 and the setting values are set. The value is specified to be 6. Then, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

[Set value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are executed. The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the set value suggestion process of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display unit 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are executed. The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value depending on the lighting state or the extinguished state of. The procedure of the setting value suggestion process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the ending effect with the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), the process is step S3311. Move to.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out-ball detection flag is set on (step S3302). The special out-ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination processing of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3303, and when the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the setting. The value suggestion process ends.

<Step S3303>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, if it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out hole 373 of the clune device 37, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are set. A lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the lamp. That is, each time the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. This allows the set value to be recognized. Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, in order to display the five numbers, the seven segments A to G need to be controlled five times each, so that the specific condition is 35 times (7 × 5 times). ) The above needs to be established. That is, it is necessary to insert 35 game balls 99 into the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37 in a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the non-set value is displayed by the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are in the lighting state. And, it is controlled only in two modes of the off state. Therefore, in order to display the five non-set values by the lamp display unit 35 so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition may be satisfied five times or more. In addition, in this embodiment, the clune device 37 similar to that of the above-described first embodiment is adopted. Therefore, if the specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment, the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display non-set values are set. It is clear that it will be lit with a few jackpots.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, The condition is to win the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty of establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty of specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the difficulty level of turning on the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily specified. That is, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily recognized.

  Then, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is such that the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displays five numbers by the 7-segment display unit 39 in the above-described first embodiment. The difficulty level is set to be the same or substantially the same. The winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probability for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or to at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356. The winning probability may be different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356.

  If the winning probabilities in the lamp lighting lottery are set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, a gaming property is provided in which the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value are lit is stabilized. It When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100 × (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). To be done. This is because in the above-described first embodiment, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display section 39 by inserting seven game balls 99 into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37. This is also in the present embodiment, because seven gaming balls 99 are inserted into the special out nozzle 373 so that, on average, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is turned on. When the winning probabilities in the lamp lighting lottery are set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probabilities are not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and may be appropriately set. It can be changed.

  Further, the lottery conditions that trigger the lamp lighting lottery for lighting one individual lamp part 351 to 356 of the five individual lamp parts 351 to 356 corresponding to the plurality of non-set values are special conditions of the clune device 37. When it is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the out ball mouth 373, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the difficulty level of establishing the lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty level of the lottery conditions is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set low, and the higher the difficulty level of the lottery conditions is set, the higher the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is considered. Be done. In this way, by setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery in accordance with the difficulty level of the lottery conditions, it is possible to specify the difficulty level of the specific conditions required to light one individual lamp part 351 to 356. It can be made uniform regardless of the type of condition. As a result, various conditions can be applied as the specific condition (more precisely, the lottery trigger).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, a game having variations in the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value are turned on. Sex is given. When the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is different from that of the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, it is conceivable that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 having a slower control sequence are set to have lower winning probabilities. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 whose control order is earlier.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3305. If the lamp lighting lottery has not won (step S3304: No), the setting value process ends. ..

<Step S3305>
When the lamp lighting lottery is won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads the already-lit lamp information (step S3305).

  Here, the already-lit lamp information is information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 being lit, and includes already-lit lamp flag information, as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) and 68 (C). The already-lit lamp flag information is a first already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, and a second already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. , A third already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth individual lamp section It includes a fifth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is turned on, and a sixth already-lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp section 356 is turned on. Each already-lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and is set to OFF when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are extinguished. In the example shown in FIG. 68B, all the already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), and all the first to sixth individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned off. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 68C, the second already-lit lamp flag is set to on, the first, third to sixth already-lit lamp flags are set to off, and the second individual lamp section 352. Indicates that the first and third to sixth individual lamp units 351, 353 to 356 are off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all the already-lit lamp flags in the already-lit lamp information are set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit. Then, when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the set value suggestion process. That is, when all of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are turned on, there is no other individual lamp unit 351 to 356 to be turned on, so the set value suggestion process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an already-lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is an already-lit lamp flag set to OFF in the already-lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads the control order (lamp control order) of the individual lamps (step S3307).

  Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by the same procedure as the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the above-described first embodiment. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the setting value stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or the setting value is changed. This lamp control order determination table is similar to the numerical display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the above-described first embodiment, and if the numbers in the numerical display order determination table are considered as the numbers attached to the individual lamps. Good. The numeral 1 in the numeral display order determination table in the above-described first embodiment corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351, and similarly, in the numeral display order determination table in the above-described first embodiment. The numbers 2 to 6 correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68A, when the display order A1 is determined when the setting value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is the second individual lamp unit 352 → the third individual lamp unit. The lamp unit 353 → the fourth individual lamp unit 354 → the fifth individual lamp unit 355 → the sixth individual lamp unit 356. Further, in the numerical display order determination table in the above-described first embodiment, each display order has the same probability of being selected, and also in the lamp control order determination table in the present embodiment, each lamp control order is selected. The probability of being done is the same.

  The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but may be set when a predetermined period is started. Also, the lamp control order need not have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read in step S3305 and the already-lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308), and the individual lamp units are controlled. The lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on (step S3309). That is, the lamp lighting lottery is executed every time the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, and the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on when the lamp lighting lottery is won. Specific information indicating a non-set value is presented. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already-lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the set value suggestion process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the already-lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example of the already-lit lamp information shown in FIG. As shown in 68 (C), the second already-lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp section 352 is set to ON.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lamp lighting lottery is executed every time the game ball 99 enters the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37. When the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 351 The non-set value can be specified by turning on 356. That is, in the present embodiment, the non-set value can be specified by turning on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 even before the specific period has elapsed. In this way, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set to either one of the lighting state and the non-lighting state, so that the non-set value can be specified by the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lighting state. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information with which the non-set value can be specified by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and the information with which the non-set value can be estimated is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, unnecessary specific information is presented. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

<Step S3311>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311). The big hit game effect end flag is a flag for ending the big hit game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process of FIG. 37. Then, the MPU 51, if the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), shifts the processing to step S3312, and if the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S3311: No), the set value. The suggestion process ends.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type to be ended is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R regular jackpot flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of FIG. 37 is ON. If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3313. If the jackpot type is not the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the setting value suggesting process is executed. finish.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether there is a lit individual lamp portion 351 to 356 among the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off (step S3313), the already-lit lamp information is cleared (initialized), and the set value suggestion process is ended. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are extinguished when the end of a predetermined period is a 5R normal jackpot. As a result, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on are maintained in the turned-on state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are always lit, that is, the specific information that specifies the non-set value. .. Therefore, the previously presented specific information in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and the convenience in identifying a plurality of non-setting values based on the specific information, and thus in identifying or inferring the setting value is improved. To be done.

  In the present embodiment, the non-set value in the lamp display unit 35 is dealt with when the lamp lighting lottery is executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37. The individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on, but the lamp lighting lottery is optional, and the game is performed on the special out nozzle 373 without performing the lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment. When the ball 99 is entered, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value may be turned on. When the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this manner, the difficulty of the game ball 99 to the special out ball hole 373 of the clune device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 entering the special out ball hole 373 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384. It is possible to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on by allocating the route detected by the special out-ball sensor 384 to the route detected by the special out-ball sensor 384.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 that present the non-set value are in one of the two modes of the lighting state and the extinguishing state, and the individual lamp unit 351 that is in the lighting state. Information for identifying a non-set value is presented by the type (numerical value) of ~ 356. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information with which the non-set value can be specified by the lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and the information with which the non-set value can be estimated is not presented. Therefore, since the specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, unnecessary specific information is presented. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game.

  In addition, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on are immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, The individual lamp parts 351 to 356 which are turned on are maintained in a lighting state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information for identifying the non-set value is confirmed based on whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are always turned on. be able to. Therefore, without forgetting the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, when identifying a plurality of non-setting values based on the specific information, by extension the convenience of identifying or inferring the set value The property is improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 entering the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37, The condition is to win the lamp lighting lottery. As a result, the difficulty of satisfying the specific condition is adjusted by the winning probability of the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty of specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the difficulty level of turning on each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 displaying the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values are easily specified. That is, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily recognized.

  It should be noted that the lamp lighting lottery is immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37, but the lamp lighting lottery is executed ( The fact that the game ball 99 has entered the special out opening 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be displayed to the player on a display means other than the lamp display section 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), it is clearly shown to the player that the lamp lighting lottery is to be executed (the game ball 99 has entered the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37), and FIG. The result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly shown to the player as shown in (B1) or FIG. 69 (B2), and the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 are turned on as shown in FIG. 69 (C1) or 69 (C2). Information regarding the symbol is clearly displayed on the symbol display portion 341. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned on. There is a possibility that there is a possibility that the lamp display unit 35 (roulette) will be focused on. In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is executed by the symbol display unit 341 (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out nozzle 373), the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out nozzle 373. Even if the player misses that the game ball 99 has been entered, the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 also causes the game ball 99 to enter the special out nozzle 373, that is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356. It can be understood that there is a possibility that it will be lit.

  Then, when the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 which are turned on is clearly shown. In the illustrated example, it is clearly indicated that the second individual lamp section 352 is turned on. In this way, by clearly indicating the result of the lamp lighting lottery in the symbol display unit 341, it is possible to grasp whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit not only in the lamp display unit 35 but also in the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, the convenience is improved.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the symbol display portion 341, during execution of the jackpot game (at least during execution of the opening / closing execution mode), information regarding the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 being lit is continuously indicated. To be done. That is, the individual lamp parts 351 to 356 of the individual lamp part 35 which is lit are displayed on the symbol display part 341. In addition, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, for example, in the jackpot game (at least the opening / closing execution mode), information about the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are turned on may be displayed. .

  On the other hand, when the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-win, an image clearly showing that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-win is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, the information on the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 which are being lit by the symbol display section 341 during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode) is continuously indicated, so that the lamp display section 35 is displayed. Needless to confirm, it is possible to confirm the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit also in the symbol display unit 341, so that the convenience is improved.

  Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only on the symbol display unit 341 instead of the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the symbol display unit 341. That is, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect on the symbol display portion 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening / closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

  Further, also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, an ending addition image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. .. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, in the ending of the jackpot game, an image simulating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending additional image. In the example shown in FIG. 70A, it is clearly shown that only the second individual lamp section 352 is turned on in the lamp display section 35, and in the example shown in FIG. It is clearly shown that the sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off. In this way, at the ending of the jackpot game, the lamp display portion 341 displays the on / off state of the lamp display portion 35, so that the individual lamp portions 351 to 356 that have been turned on by the jackpot game can be confirmed. Therefore, convenience is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the lamp display unit 35, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 arranged in a line (in a line) are adopted, but the lamp display unit 35 has the individual lamp units 351 to 356. Is not limited to being arranged in rows, but other forms can be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the lamp display section 35 in which the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring is adopted, and as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the lamp display section 35 arranged in a matrix is adopted. You can also Further, as the lamp display unit 35, individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be arranged in a staggered pattern.

  Further, instead of the lamp display section 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, a staggered pattern, etc. may be adopted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same design change as the design change items in the above-described first to fourth embodiments can be made within the applicable range.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a setting value that defines the jackpot probability in the ending of the jackpot game according to the number of special out balls that have entered the special out nozzle 373 of the clune device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The case where at least a part of the non-set values other than is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 has been described.

  By the way, in the gaming machine, the accessory continuous operation device is operated on the condition that the condition device is operated by the stop display of the decorative pattern in the variation game, and the special electric role is operated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. There are some which can obtain a large amount of game balls by continuously operating objects.

  Here, the "conditional device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a combination of specific symbols is displayed (a combination corresponding to a jackpot (for example, a doublet). It is the one that is activated when the decorative pattern is stopped). The "feature continuous operation device" means a special device capable of continuously operating the special electric accessory. The “conditioning device” and the “role part continuous operating device” are comprehensive conceptual devices, and in the present embodiment, for example, the MPU 41 (executes control for realizing the device) of the main control device 4, the ROM 411 (device It is realized by a control program to be realized), a RAM 412 (used for control to realize the apparatus), various devices driven by the control program, and the like.

  The "special electric accessory" refers to an electric accessory that opens or expands the entrance of the special winning opening. In the present embodiment, the “special electric accessory” includes, for example, an opening / closing door 319 that opens / closes the variable winning a prize port 316.

  Then, as a gaming machine, the time from the operation of the condition device due to the decorative symbols being stopped and displayed in a combination of big hits in the variable game to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (start of the big hit game or the opening / closing execution mode) ( Some models have a relatively long "preparation time".

  However, when the preparation time is long, that is, when the time from the stop display of the decorative pattern to the start of the opening / closing execution mode is long, the player wastes time, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to play the game. It is expected that interest will decrease. In particular, if the opening time of the opening / closing execution mode is late when the closing time of the game hall is approaching or there is a limit to the playing time due to personal circumstances, etc. It is also assumed that

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first moving path and the second moving path are provided with different time (difficulty in operating the accessory continuous device) from the launch of the game ball to the operation of the accessory continuous actuator. There is. In addition, the player can select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is moved. The player can select the first movement route and the second movement route, for example, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. Then, when the first movement route is selected, the accessory continuous operation device can be operated in a short time after the game ball is launched. On the other hand, when the second movement path is selected, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the second movement path is delayed by, for example, delay means that restricts or delays the fall of the game ball on the game board. . In the first movement route and the second movement route, a significant difference can be provided in the preparation time from the condition device operation to the accessory continuous operation device operation. In this way, the player can select which of the first moving route and the second moving route the game ball is to be moved in, which can provide a significant difference in the preparation time, so that the preparation time can be shortened ( The player can immediately activate the accessory continuous operation device), so that the player can shorten the time from the display of the decorative pattern to the start of the opening / closing execution mode by the player's intention by selecting the movement route. It will be possible. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the opening / closing execution mode is started, and prevent a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, if the player chooses a travel route that can shorten the preparation time when the player's playing time is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening / closing execution mode. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine. Further, the delay means for limiting or delaying the fall of the game ball on the game board can be realized by a simple configuration, and the effect of providing the delay means can be easily and surely enjoyed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in a predetermined game state, a first predetermined area (first ball entry area) provided on the first movement path or a second predetermined area (second ball entry area) provided on the second movement path is played. When the ball passes (is entered), a jackpot game is generated after performing a predetermined determination process.

  Here, the predetermined game state includes a state in which a big hit game can be generated, for example, a condition device is operating, a game ball passes through a first predetermined region (first ball entering region) (ball is entered). ) In the case where the detection (passage) of the game sphere in the first predetermined area (first entrance area) is not restricted, the game sphere passes through the second predetermined area (second entrance area). The state where the detection of the passage (entering) of the game ball in the second predetermined area (second entering area) when (entering) is not restricted, the game ball in the first moving path or the second moving path State after being detected, the state after the big hit is announced in the production means such as the symbol display part (for example, the state after the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display part, the rainbow lamp in the illumination part) The state after the performance is executed, the state after the jackpot confirmation sound or the confirmation voice is output from the speaker), the state in which the variable game and the jackpot game are not being executed, and the like are determined.

  Further, as the predetermined determination process, for example, a determination process of whether or not a jackpot game can be generated. Specifically, as the predetermined determination process, whether or not the condition device is operated, the first predetermined when the game ball passes (is entered) the first predetermined area (first entrance area) Whether the occurrence of the jackpot is limited by the passage of the game ball in the area (first ball entry area), if the game ball passes (is entered) the second predetermined area (second ball entry area) Whether or not the occurrence of the big hit game due to the passage of the game ball in the second predetermined area (second entry area) is restricted, or whether the flow down of the game ball is delayed for a predetermined time or more by the delay means such as the clune device. It is determined whether or not a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit, whether or not a variable game is being executed, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed, or the like.

  In this way, the predetermined determination process is the determination process of whether or not the jackpot game can be generated, so that the first predetermined region (first ball entry region) or the second predetermined region (second ball entry region) When a game ball is entered in), the big hit game is generated when the big hit game can be generated, and unnecessary occurrence of the big hit game is limited when the big hit game is not generated. ..

  In particular, when the game ball passes (enters) the first predetermined area (first ball entering area) in the predetermined determination process, the game ball passes through the first predetermined area (first ball entering area). Whether or not the occurrence of a big hit is limited, when the game ball passes (is entered) the second predetermined area (second entry area), the game in the second predetermined area (second entry area) If the process of determining whether or not the big hit game due to the passage of the ball is limited, if the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected in the state where the big hit game can be generated, the other movement route By limiting the occurrence of special games by the game ball that is fired to, the jackpot game by the passage of the game ball to the predetermined area (entry area) provided on one movement path after one movement path is selected It is possible to prevent the big hit game from being generated by the game ball moving on the other movement path before the occurrence of. As a result, after the movement route for generating the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement route that is against the player's will, that is, at the time (timing) when the special game is against the intention. It is prevented from being generated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the player selects a movement route in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, various events can be generated by using the preparation time. In this way, when the player selects a travel route that requires a long preparation time, various events are generated using the preparation time, so that the preparation time that the player is less interested in and tends to be boring Can be enjoyed depending on the outbreak. As a result, the player's interest in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device by launching a small number of game balls (for example, one ball) in the second movement route in which the movement of the game balls is delayed, while the first movement is performed. In the path, the accessory continuous operation device is operated by launching more game balls (for example, 4 balls to 5 balls) than in the second movement path. In this way, in the second movement path, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device by launching a small number of game balls (for example, one ball), and thus in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) The reduction of the "base" which is the payout rate (ball payout rate) is prevented, and as a result, a disadvantage is prevented from being caused by the player selecting the second movement route R2. On the other hand, in the first movement path, the accessory continuous actuating device is activated by launching more game balls (for example, 4 balls to 5 balls) than in the second movement path, and thus the role is achieved within a few seconds from the start of launching the game balls. It is possible to operate an object continuous operation device. With this, since it is possible to operate the accessory continuously operating device in a short time after being hit on the first movement path, it is possible to release the irritation and stress caused by the long time until the accessory continuously operating device is operated. It In addition, it is possible to minimize the generation of waste balls by performing a so-called stop hit, in which the launch of a game ball is stopped each time one game ball is shot in order to suppress the generation of waste balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player can select either the first movement route or the second movement route by adjusting the launching strength (launching strength) of the game ball. In this way, the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path the game ball is to be moved to, so that the condition device is activated and then the accessory continuous operation device is activated. It becomes possible for the player to select the length of preparation time up to. Also, since the player can select either the first movement route or the second movement route depending on the shooting intensity of the game ball, it becomes possible to easily select the length of the preparation time.

  It should be noted that it may be considered that the player cannot select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is moved to, and the game machine 10 selects the movement. In this way, by selecting which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is to be moved by the game machine 10, the preparation time from the operation of the condition device to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, That is, the time until the big hit game is started is determined by the gaming machine 10. As a result, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the timing when the jackpot game is started, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Here, as the event executed during the preparation time, for example, grant of a privilege, grant of a right to which the privilege is granted, execution of a predetermined effect such as special effect, and activation of game setting can be cited. As the privilege to be given, for example, presentation of performance information that is an index of the above-mentioned payout performance (for example, setting value, base information, continuous character ratio information, character ratio information, explicit or suggestion of the number of lots per unit lottery) ( (Presentation of information capable of recognizing or guessing game information). By presenting performance information that is an index of payout performance, such as information that allows recognition or estimation of game information, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the payout performance such as set values. It is possible and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, as the special effect (predetermined effect), for example, a replay of the jackpot effect executed in the variable game that triggered the operation of the condition device, the appearance of the premier character, the display of an image in which the game information can be recognized or estimated, and the preparation Examples include game explanation effects for the progress of games over time. As the game settings to be validated, for example, selection of music output from the speaker 26 in the jackpot game, adjustment of its volume, selection settings for various effects executed in the jackpot game such as selection of characters appearing in the jackpot game, etc. Is mentioned. In this way, since the setting of various effects executed in the jackpot game is enabled, it is possible to reduce the need to perform various game settings in the jackpot game, and thus it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game effect.

  Further, the event executed during the preparation time is generated when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific time (event generation right grant period) set during the preparation time, or a specific condition satisfied during the specific time. It is conceivable to generate an event with a level and content according to the number of. In this way, by setting that a specific condition is satisfied in the preparation time as an event occurrence condition, it is possible to focus on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in the preparation time, which improves the enjoyment of the game. It In particular, by raising an event with a level and content according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the preparation time, it is possible to focus not only on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but also on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when an event of a level or content corresponding to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the preparation time is generated, the content of the event can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  The specific condition is, for example, in a specific area (for example, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a through gate 317, a predetermined area set in a special device such as a clune device or a rotating body). Examples include passing of the game ball 99, acquisition of a right that can be acquired by a right acquisition effect (predetermined effect) executed on the symbol display unit 341, and the like. As the number of established specific conditions, the number of game balls 99 passing through the specific area, the number of coins, the points that can be acquired in the right acquisition effect, the number of coins, money, power, game level, distance, number of characters, etc. Examples include numerical indicators that can be correlated with numbers. As the right acquisition effect, for example, a numerical index acquisition effect (predetermined effect) such as a point acquisition game effect executed on a symbol display unit or the like can be considered. Examples of the point acquisition game effect include effects such as a coin acquisition game, a mission achievement game, a battle game, a quiz game, and a prediction game. It suffices that there is a correlation between the numerical index and the number of established specific conditions. For example, it may correspond to the case where one specific condition is satisfied per point, or it may be specified for each specific point other than 1 point. It may be possible to correspond to the case where one of the conditions is satisfied. By correlating the number of specific conditions with the numerical index in this way, the content of the event can be diversified, and the event can be executed as a point acquisition effect such as a game effect. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an event (for example, a predetermined effect such as a special effect or a right acquisition effect) that is executed during the preparation time is a predetermined area in which a jackpot game can be generated by passing a game ball (entering a ball) ( It is forcibly terminated based on the passage (entering) of the game ball in the entering area. Specifically, the game effect as the predetermined effect is that the accessory continuous operation device is operated by the passage (entering) of the game ball through the second combination continuous operation gate as the second predetermined area (second ball entering area). It is forcibly terminated when (a big hit game occurs). In this way, the event such as the predetermined effect is ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, so that the jackpot game effect can be appropriately executed without being disturbed by the execution of the event such as the predetermined effect. In addition, the player can finish the event such as a predetermined effect by the player's intention by passing (entering) the game ball into a predetermined area (ball entering area) and operating the accessory continuous operation device. It will be possible. As a result, the player can end the event early and can operate the accessory continuous operation device (generate a big hit game) at various timings, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Even when an event such as a predetermined effect is forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (the occurrence of a big hit game), the event may be re-executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. .. In this case, the re-execution of the event such as the predetermined effect may be re-executed from the continuation of the forcedly terminated portion, and the re-execution of the event may be executed until the end of the scheduled event. In this way, by re-executing the event such as the predetermined effect from the continuation of the part that was forcibly ended to the end, even if the event such as the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, the event is executed to the end, The profit that the player should get is guaranteed. Of course, when the event is killed, the event may be re-executed from the beginning and the event may be executed to the scheduled end. In this case, it becomes possible to execute a series of events without interruption. As a result, it becomes possible to further enhance the interest in the game by the predetermined effect.

  In addition, events such as predetermined effects, from the end of notification that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big jackpot due to the variable game (decorative display is stopped by a combination of jackpot symbols) until the game ball passes through the predetermined area It may be executed during a specific period set in the period, and may be re-executed when a jackpot game is generated. In this way, an event such as a predetermined effect is executed in a specific period, and when the jackpot game is executed, the event is re-executed, so that the event such as the predetermined effect can be executed in the jackpot game. In other words, when an event such as a predetermined effect is interrupted midway due to the passage of the game ball into the predetermined area, the event can be executed in the jackpot game generated by the passage of the game ball into the predetermined area. This makes it possible to re-execute the event immediately after the end of the event when the event such as the predetermined effect is forcibly ended, shorten the time when the event such as the predetermined effect is interrupted, and Even when the event is forcibly terminated, the event is executed without a feeling of strangeness as in the case where the event is continuously executed until the end.

  Further, as the predetermined condition for re-execution of the event to be forcibly ended, for example, the jackpot game generated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a specific jackpot game. Specifically, the specific jackpot game generated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device as a predetermined condition is, for example, a probability variation jackpot game, 16R (probability variation) jackpot game (long game time (predetermined number (eg, 7-10) or more round games are executed) jackpot game), 5R certainty variation jackpot game, (5R) regular jackpot game, etc.

  By re-executing an event such as a predetermined effect when the specific jackpot game is executed, the predetermined effect is re-executed as a privilege for executing the specific jackpot game. Further, since the specific jackpot game is the probability variation jackpot game, it is possible to further provide a bonus for the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player, such as a re-execution of an event such as a predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated. Further, since the specific jackpot game is a jackpot game in which a large number (a predetermined number or more) of round games such as 16R probability variation jackpots are executed, an event such as a predetermined effect can be effectively utilized by utilizing the length of the game time. It becomes possible to re-execute. In addition, since the specific jackpot game is a normal jackpot game, it is possible to re-execute an event such as a predetermined effect as compensation for a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player.

  The re-execution of the event such as the predetermined effect may be performed in any of the opening of the big hit game, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending, and may be executed over two or more of these periods. Of course, the re-execution of the event such as the predetermined effect may be executed at a timing other than the big hit game. Further, as a predetermined condition for re-executing an event such as a predetermined effect, passage of a game ball in a predetermined area (ball entry area) in which a big hit game can be generated by passing a game ball (ball entry) (ball entry) ), It is also possible to stop the launch of the game ball 99 for a certain period of time. Since these are the predetermined conditions for re-execution of the predetermined effect, the player can intentionally re-execute the predetermined effect.

  When the predetermined effect as an event is a numerical index acquisition effect such as a game effect, when the numerical index acquisition effect is re-executed, the numerical index acquired in the specific period may be carried over, or the numerical index may be carried over. May be acquired from 0.

  Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 72 to 88.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the condition device is operated by the decorative display being stopped and displayed in a combination of big hits in the variable game, and when the condition device is operated, the first accessory continuous operation gate described later. A game ball passes through G1 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "first role continuous operation gate") or second accessory continuous operation gate G2 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "second role continuous operation gate"). As a result, the accessory continuous operation device is operated, and the opening / closing door 319 for opening / closing the variable winning a prize port 316 is continuously operated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, so that a large amount of game balls can be obtained. Is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is based on the passage (ball entry) of the game ball 99 at the first winning combination operation gate G1 or the second winning combination operation gate G2, which is a predetermined area (ball entering area). It is possible to generate a jackpot game.

  Here, FIG. 72 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 73 is a view showing a main part of the game board shown in FIG. 72. In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the clune device 37 and the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above are omitted. In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variable winning port 316 is provided below the second winning port 316 (below the center of the game board 31), and the main display portion 36 is provided in the lower right part of the gaming board 31. However, the roles and functions of the variable winning a prize port 316 and the main display section 36 are basically the same as in the case of the above-described first embodiment. However, although the game ball 99 that is launched in the right side area of the game board 31 can enter the variable winning opening 316 of the above-described first embodiment, the variable winning opening of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. It is preferable that at least a game ball 99 that is hit in the left side area of the game board 31 and hit in the third movement route R3 can enter the ball 316. Of course, among the game balls 99 launched in the right side area of the game board 31, a game ball 99 launched in at least one of a first movement route R1 and a second movement route R2 described below may be allowed to enter.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the branch portion 48 is provided between the decorative portion 310 provided above the symbol display portion 341 and the outer rail 312. The branching unit 48 defines a first moving route R1 and a second moving route R2 as the moving route of the game ball 99 that is launched in the right area of the game board 31. The decorative portion 310 and the branch portion 48 are formed by, for example, assembling a resin member or the like on the game board 31. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a first winning combination operation gate G1 through which the game ball 99 moving along the first moving path R1 can pass, and a second winning combination operation through which the game ball 99 moving along the second moving path R2 can pass. The gate G2 and the one-hole clune device 60 arranged above the second combination operation gate G2 are further provided.

  The first movement route R1 is defined between the decorative portion 310 and the branching portion 48, and among the game balls 99 that are launched in the right side area of the game board 31, the movement of the game ball 99 that is launched with relatively low strength. Define the route. The first moving path R1 is further defined by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482 on the downstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball 99, and the separating ball 481 and the guiding nail 482 move the gaming ball 99 moving along the first moving path R1. It guides to the 1st winning combination operation gate G1. The separating nail 481 is lined up from the downstream position of the downstream end portion in the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the branch portion 48 to the upper left portion of the one-hole clune device 60, which is the lower right portion of the first winning combination operation gate G1. It is located at. The guide nails 482 are arranged side by side from the downstream position of the downstream end of the decorative portion 310 in the moving direction of the game ball 99 to the upper left side of the first combination operation gate G1. In addition, the guide nail 482 is provided with a drop portion 483 having an interval larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Therefore, the game ball 99 moving on the first movement route R1 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 when it does not pass through the dropping portion 483, and the first winning combination operation gate when passing through the dropping portion 483. Do not pass G1. That is, the game ball 99 launched on the first movement route R1 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 with a certain probability. Instead of the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482, a resin member or the like can play the same role as the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482.

  Then, in the present embodiment, among the game balls 99 launched on the first movement route R1, the game balls 99 passing through the first winning combination operation gate G1 and the game balls 99 dropped without passing through the first winning combination operation gate G1. The ratio with the game ball 99 passing through the portion 483 is set, for example, in the range of 1: 1 to 1:10, preferably 1: 2 to 1: 5, and typically 1: 3 to. It is set to about 4. That is, the probability that the game ball 99 hit on the first movement route R1 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 is set, for example, in the range of 1/2 to 1/11, and preferably 1/3 to 1/6. Is set in the range of, and is typically set to about 1/4 to 1/5. By setting the probability that the game ball 99 hit on the first movement route R1 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 in such a range, when the game ball 99 is continuously hit, the game takes about several seconds. The ball 99 can be passed through the first combination operation gate G1. As a result, while suppressing the stress on the player, the game ball 99 launched in the first movement route R1 can be passed through the first winning combination operation gate G1, and the first winning combination operation gate G1 is played. It is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the ball 99 passes. In addition, in order to suppress the generation of waste balls, the so-called stop hitting, in which the launch of the game ball 99 is stopped every time one of the game balls 99 has been shot, is performed, so that the first movement is performed while minimizing the generation of waste balls. It is also possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not the one game ball 99 moving on the route R1 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1.

  The drop portion 483 of the guide nail 482 may be omitted. That is, the probability that the game ball 99 hit on the first movement route R1 will pass through the first winning combination operation gate G1 may be set to 100%. In this way, the probability that the game ball 99 launched on the first movement route R1 will pass through the first winning combination operation gate G1 is set to 100%, so that the first ball is launched by launching at least one game ball 99. It becomes possible to pass the game ball 99 through the continuous operation gate G1. As a result, since it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device without generating waste balls, the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) The drop is prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from occurring due to the player selecting the first movement route R1.

  Further, the general winning opening may be arranged at a position where the game ball 99 passing through the drop portion 483 of the guide nail 482 can enter. In this way, by arranging the general winning opening at a position where the game ball 99 passing through the drop portion 483 of the guide nail 482 can enter, the game ball 99 launched in the first movement route R1 is the first winning combination. Waste balls generated by passing through the drop portion 483 without passing through the operation gate G1 can be guaranteed by a prize ball (eg, 5 to 10 balls per winning prize) for winning the game ball 99 in the general winning opening. .. As a result, the base is prevented from being lowered, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being caused by the player selecting the first movement route R1.

  A first route detection sensor Rs1 is provided on the first movement route R1 on the upstream side of the first winning combination operation gate G1. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is a sensor that detects that the game ball 99 has passed the first movement route R1. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high frequency transmission type sensor, a capacitance sensor, a magnetic sensor) or the like. The first route detection sensor Rs1 is connected to the MPU 41 via the input / output I / F 42 of the main controller 4 (see FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed the first movement route R1 based on the output from the first route detection sensor Rs1.

  However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 as a sensor detection process in the main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 4, the MPU 41 operates the condition device (condition device operation flag is It is set to ON), and when neither the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag nor the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is ON, it is detected that the game ball 99 has moved along the first movement route R1. That is, when the condition device is operated, the MPU 41 detects the game ball 99 by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is determined that the game ball 99 has moved along the first movement route R1.

  The first winning combination operation gate G1 gives an opportunity to operate the winning accessory continuous operation device by the passage of the game ball 99. The first winning combination operation gate G1 vertically penetrates so as to pass the game ball 99 hit on the first movement route R1. The first winning combination operation gate G1 has a first winning object continuous operation gate sensor Gs1 (hereinafter, also referred to as “first winning combination gate sensor”) capable of detecting passage of the game ball 99. The first combination gate sensor Gs1 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high frequency transmission type sensor, an electrostatic capacity sensor, a magnetic sensor) and the like, and is connected to the MPU 41 via the input / output I / F 42 of the main controller 4. (See FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed the first winning combination operation gate G1 based on the output from the first winning combination gate sensor Gs1.

  Here, the MPU 41 is conditioned on the condition device being activated and the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag not being set to ON in the sensor detection process executed by the main control device 4 of FIG. 77 described later. When the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the first winning combination gate sensor Gs1, it is determined whether or not the first winning combination operating gate G1 has been passed. That is, the MPU 41, when the condition state is operating, on the condition that the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, the first winning combination operation gate It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through G1. When the game ball 99 is launched on the first movement route R1, the game ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 with a certain probability. Therefore, from the start of launching the game ball 99 to the first movement route R1, the game ball 99 can be passed through the first winning combination operation gate G1 in a short time (for example, about several seconds) to operate the accessory continuous operation device. it can. Thereby, when the player selects the first movement route R1, it is possible to start the jackpot game in a short time from the start of launching. In other words, the player selects the first movement route R1, and when the condition device is activated by the symbol display of the jackpot being stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341, the variable game is early after the end of the variable game. The jackpot game can be started. As a result, the player selects the first movement route R1 when, for example, the closing time of the game hall is approaching or the playing time is limited due to personal circumstances, etc. You can secure an opportunity to win more jackpots without wasting. In addition, even if the user does not wish to execute the setting value suggesting effect (estimation of the setting value), which will be described later, by selecting the first movement route R1, the jackpot game can be started early without wasting time. ..

  On the other hand, the second movement route R2 is defined between the branch portion 48 and the outer rail 312, and of the game balls 99 launched in the right side area of the game board 31, a game ball that is launched with high strength such as maximum strength. 99 movement routes are defined. The second moving route R2 is further defined by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484 on the downstream side in the moving direction of the gaming ball 99, and the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484 move the gaming ball 99 that moves on the second moving route R2. Guide to the one hole clune device 60. The separating nail 481 is arranged side by side from the downstream position of the end portion on the downstream side in the moving direction of the game ball 99 in the branch portion 48 to the upper left portion of the one-hole clune device 60 as described above. The guide nails 484 are arranged side by side from a predetermined position of the outer rail 312 to a position above a central portion of the one-hole clune device 60 (above a through hole 605 described later). That is, the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 are guided to the left side of a through hole 605 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) described later in the one-hole clincher device 60. In this way, the game ball 99 is guided to the left side of the through hole 605 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484, that is, to a position avoiding the through hole 605, and thus the through hole 605. It is prevented that the game ball 99 is directly entered. Further, the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484 are arranged without forming a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass, and the game ball 99 passing through the second movement route R2 is always the game ball 99. It is guided to the one hole clune device 60. In this way, the game ball 99 that passes through the second movement route R2 is always guided by the one hole clune device 60, so that the first game ball 99 is launched onto the second movement route R2. It becomes possible to pass the game ball 99 through the double-role continuous operation gate G2. As a result, the base is prevented from being lowered, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being caused by the player selecting the second movement route R2. Note that instead of the guide nail 484, the guide nail 484 can also play the same role as with a resin member or the like.

  Further, between the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 is defined by the branching portion 48 and the separating nail 481, and these branching portion 48 and the separating nail 481 are provided in series without a gap through which the game ball 99 passes. ing. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball 99 launched in the first movement route R1 is changed to the second movement route R2 while the first movement route R1 is moving, and conversely, the second movement route It is prevented that the game ball 99 launched in R2 is changed to the first movement route R1 during the movement of the second movement route R2. That is, mutual movement of the game ball 99 between the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the movement route selected by the player from being changed against the intention of the player, and it is possible to reliably reflect the intention of the player regarding the selection of the movement route.

  In the second movement route R2, the game ball 99 is always guided to the one-hole clune device 60 by the separation nail 481 and the guide nail 484, but the game ball 99 guided to the one-hole clune device 60 will be described later. When it is discharged from the one-hole clincher device 60, it always passes through the second combination continuous operation gate G2 (second accessory continuous operation gate sensor Gs2). On the other hand, in the first movement route R1, as described above, the first combination operating gate has a predetermined probability by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482, for example, a probability set from the range of 1/2 to 1/11. Pass G1. That is, the game ball 99 launched on the second movement route R2 passes through the winning combination operation gate with a higher probability than the game ball launched on the first movement route R1. As a result, in the second movement route R2 in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, it is possible to activate the accessory continuous operation device by launching less game balls 99 than in the first movement route R1. Therefore, in the second movement route R2, there is an advantage that the generation of waste balls can be suppressed as compared with the case where the game ball 99 is hit in the first movement route R1 to operate the accessory continuous operation device.

  A second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided above the one-hole clincher device 60 on the second movement route R2. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is a sensor that detects that the game ball 99 has passed through the second movement route R2. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high frequency transmission type sensor, an electrostatic capacity sensor, a magnetic sensor) or the like. The second route detection sensor Rs2 is connected to the MPU 41 via the input / output I / F 42 of the main controller 4 (see FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the second movement route R2 based on the output from the second route detection sensor Rs2.

  However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 as a sensor detection process in the main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 4, the MPU 41 operates the condition device (condition device operation flag is It is set to ON), and when neither the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag nor the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is ON, it is detected that the game ball 99 has moved along the second movement route R2. That is, when the condition device is operated, the MPU 41 detects the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. It is detected that the game ball 99 has moved along the second movement route R2.

  The one hole clune device 60 delays the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the second movement route R2 to the actuation of the accessory continuous operation device. Specifically, the one-hole clune device 60 limits (delays) the fall of the game ball 99 on the game board 31 by orbiting while rotating the game ball 99 in a clune unit 601, which will be described later. The time from when the game ball 99 is detected by the two-route detection sensor Rs2 to when the game ball 99 passes through the second winning combination operation gate G2 arranged below the lower opening 606 of the one-hole clune device 60 is a predetermined time. The above is secured. This predetermined time is set, for example, in the range of 1 minute or more and 20 minutes or less, preferably in the range of 5 minutes or more and 15 minutes or less, and is typically set to about 10 minutes. By setting the predetermined time (residence time, delay time) in such a range, while the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one hole clune device 60, numerical values such as the payout performance including the set value are set. The information can be expressed or suggested (at least part of which is displayed). In this way, the game information regarding the payout performance such as the set value is explicitly or suggested while the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one hole clune device 60, so that the player is less interested and bored. It is possible to recognize or estimate the payout performance such as a set value and enjoy the often-prepared time (the time from when the condition device is operated to when the accessory continuous operation device is operated). As a result, the player's interest in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Here, FIG. 74 is a perspective view showing the one-hole clune device 60, and FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional view taken along a portion corresponding to the X4-X4 cutting line in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the one-hole clune device 60 includes a clune part 601 and a discharge part 602.

  The clune portion 601 has a bottomed cylindrical shape having a bottom wall portion 603 and a peripheral wall portion 604. A through hole 605 is provided in the center of the bottom wall portion 603. The peripheral wall portion 604 extends upward from the peripheral edge portion of the bottom wall portion 603, and the game ball 99 is prevented from protruding from the bottom wall portion 603. In this clune part 601, the game ball 99 guided by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484 circulates on the bottom wall portion 603 along the peripheral wall portion 604, and the orbiting radius becomes, for example, due to the attenuation of the moving speed of the game ball 99. As it becomes smaller, it enters the through hole 605. The discharge part 602 is formed in a hollow shape having a lower opening 606, and the inside thereof communicates with the through hole 605. That is, the emission part 602 has a closed cross-section structure (structure surrounded by the periphery) in the emission direction (movement direction) of the game ball 99. In this discharge part 602, the game balls 99 that are inserted into the through holes 605 are discharged below the game board 31 one by one. As a result, in the clune device 60, it is possible to prevent the plurality of game balls 99 from being released at the same time, and to release the game balls 99 one by one.

  It should be noted that the one-hole clune device 60 may be configured so that only one game ball 99 is guided. Specifically, the front and rear through holes for moving the game ball 99 to the back side of the game board 31 above the second route detection sensor Rs2, and the front and rear through holes when opening and closing the front and rear through holes and opening the front and rear through holes. A through-hole opening / closing door for guiding the game ball 99 is provided, and at least the front-and-rear through hole is provided at least from the time when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 until the game ball 99 passes through the second combination operation gate G2. It is conceivable to guide the game ball 99 to the back side of the game board 31 by the through hole opening / closing door and the front and rear through holes with the open state. In this way, by configuring so that only one game ball 99 is guided to the one-hole clune device 60, even when a plurality of game balls 99 are continuously launched into the second movement route R2. Only one game ball 99 can be guided to the one-hole clune device 60. As a result, a plurality of game balls 99 are guided to the one-hole clune device 60, so that the retention time of the game balls 99 in the one-hole clune device 60 is significantly shortened due to mutual interference of the plurality of game balls 99, for example. When the second movement route R2 is selected, the delay time of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device in the one-hole crush device 60 can be made uniform. Further, even when a plurality of game balls 99 are continuously launched into the second movement route R2, only one game ball 99 is guided to the one-hole clune device 60, and thus a plurality of game balls 99. The clogging of the one-hole clune device 60 that may be caused by being guided to the one-hole clune device 60 is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 484 guide the gaming ball 99 moving along the second moving route R2 to the clune portion 601 of the one-hole clune device 60, but moving along the second moving route R2. The game ball 99 to be played may be guided to the clune part 601 by moving it to the back side of the game board 31 above the clune part 601.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the second combination operation gate G2 is arranged below the lower opening 606 of the discharging portion 602 of the one-hole clune device 60, and the game ball 99 discharged from the lower opening 606 can pass therethrough. Is.

  The second winning combination operating gate G2, like the first winning combination operating gate G1, gives an opportunity to operate the accessory continuous operating device by passing the game ball 99. The second winning combination operation gate G2 is struck in the second movement route R2 and vertically penetrates the game ball 99 discharged from the one-hole clune device 60 so as to pass therethrough. In addition, the second winning combination operating gate G2 is provided directly below the discharging portion 602 of the one-hole clune device 60, and the game ball 99 discharged from the discharging portion 602 always passes through the second winning combination operating gate G2. The second winning combination operation gate G2 has a second winning object continuous operation gate sensor Gs2 (hereinafter, also referred to as "second winning combination gate sensor") capable of detecting passage of the game ball 99. The second combination gate sensor Gs2 is composed of, for example, an optical sensor, a proximity sensor (a high-frequency transmission type sensor, an electrostatic capacity sensor, a magnetic sensor) or the like, and is connected to the MPU 41 via the input / output I / F 42 of the main controller 4. (See FIG. 76). That is, the MPU 41 can detect that the game ball 99 has passed through the second winning action gate G2 based on the output from the second winning action gate sensor Gs2.

  Here, the MPU 41 is conditioned on the condition device being activated and the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag not being set to ON in the sensor detection process executed by the main control device 4 of FIG. 77 described later. , When the passing of the game ball 99 is detected by the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2, it is determined whether the second winning combination operation gate G2 has been passed. That is, the MPU 41, when the condition state is operating, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the second winning combination operation gate G2 is played. It can be detected that the ball 99 has passed.

  Then, when the game ball 99 is launched into the second movement route R2, the game ball 99 can be guided to the one-hole clune device 60 by launching one game ball 99, and the game ball 99 is After being retained for a predetermined time or longer in the hole clune device 60, it is discharged from the one hole clune device 60 to pass through the second combination operation gate G2. In this way, since the game ball 99 can be passed through the second winning combination operation gate G2 by launching one game ball 99, the minimum game ball 99 required to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Is 1 ball, and it is possible to suppress the generation of waste balls for operating the accessory continuous operation device.

  Further, when the second movement route R2 is selected, the accessory continuous operation device is not activated immediately from the start of operation of the condition device as in the case where the first movement route R1 is selected, and at least the game ball During the time from when the game ball 99 is moved to the one-hole clune device 60 until the game ball 99 is discharged from the one-hole clune device 60, the accessory continuous operation device is not activated. Therefore, the player can delay the operation of the accessory continuous operation device and delay the start of the big hit game by selecting the second movement route R2. Further, in the present embodiment, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 after the operation of the condition device, as described later. Numerical information for recognizing or estimating the payout performance including the set value is explicitly or suggested.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the condition device is operated by the symbol display of the big hit being stopped and displayed on the symbol display portion 341, the character continuously operating device is operated. By selecting either the first moving route R1 or the second moving route R2 with different times, the jackpot game is started immediately after the condition device is activated, or the time until the jackpot game is started is set longer. It is possible to select whether or not to obtain information (privilege) by which the numerical information regarding the payout performance including the value can be estimated. Then, by selecting the first movement route R1 and immediately starting the jackpot game after the condition device is activated, the game time is limited due to, for example, the closing time of the game hall or personal circumstances. Even in the case, it is possible to secure an opportunity to receive more jackpot lottery without wasting the remaining game time. In addition, even if it is not necessary to estimate the numerical information regarding the payout performance, for example, if the set value or the like has already been recognized or if the set value or the like is not interested, the first movement route R1 can be used to make the same time. You can secure an opportunity to win more jackpots in your area. On the other hand, when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by selecting the second movement route R2, in the time until the accessory continuous operation device is operated, the numerical information regarding the payout performance etc. is estimated and the game is played. You can enjoy

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80.

[Main timer interrupt process of main controller 4]
The main timer interrupt process executed by the main controller 4 in this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the content of the sensor detection process (see step S1001 in FIG. 20).

[Sensor detection processing]
In the sensor detection processing of the present embodiment, the processing when the condition device is activated is different from that of the first embodiment described above, and the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first combination gate sensor Gs1, and the second route detection. Based on the detection results of the sensor Rs2 and the second combination gate sensor Gs2, various flags relating to these sensors Rs1, Gs1, Rs2, and Gs2 are set to ON or OFF, and the combination gate sensor Gs1 and the second combination gate are set. A command relating to the detection result of the gate sensor Gs2 is set. Here, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sensor detection processing of the present embodiment.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the sensor detection processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is set to ON (step S3401). The condition device operation flag is a flag indicating that the condition device, which is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, is operated, and in step S3605 of the variable game control process of FIG. 79, which will be described later, the first special It is set to ON when it is determined that the first special symbol in the symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display unit 363 is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol. Then, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3402 if the condition device operation flag is on (step S3401: Yes), and moves the process to step S3415 if the condition device operation flag is off (step S3401: No). Transition.

<Step S3402>
When the condition device operation flag is on (step S3401: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set on (step S3402). The first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is a flag for disabling the detection of the game ball 99 by the first combination gate sensor Gs1 when the game ball 99 is detected by the first combination gate sensor Gs1. In step S3409, which will be described later, it is set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1. Then, when the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3411, and sets the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF. If so (step S3402: NO), the process moves to step S3403.

<Step S3403>
When the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402). S3403). The second winning combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is a flag for invalidating the detection of the gaming ball 99 by the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2 when the gaming ball 99 is detected by the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2. In step S3405 to be described later, it is set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2. When the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3413, and sets the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF. If so (step S3403: NO), the process moves to step S3404.

<Step S3404>
When the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to OFF (step S3403: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3404). .. The first route detection sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor, and the passage of the game ball 99 is detected by the output from the first route detection sensor Rs1 in step S3415 described later. Set on if detected. Then, when the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3405, and when the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3404: No), the process proceeds to step S3407.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
When the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag and the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag are set to OFF (NO in both steps S3403 and S3404), the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON. When the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, that is, when the game ball 99 is detected (step S3404: Yes), the MPU 41 refers to the above-described second role referred to in step S3403. The continuous gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3405), the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3406), and the process proceeds to step S3415.

<Step S3407>
When the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag and the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag are set to OFF (No in steps S3403 and S3404), the first route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF. When it is (step S3404: No), that is, when the game ball 99 is not detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 sets the second route detection sensor detection flag to ON. It is determined whether it has been done (step S3407). The second route detection sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball 99 has been detected by the second route detection sensor, and the passage of the game ball 99 by the output from the second route detection sensor Rs2 in step S3415 described later. Set on if detected. When the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3407: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3408, and when the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3407: No), the process proceeds to step S3415.

<Steps S3408 to S3510>
When the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3407: Yes), that is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 prior to the first route detection sensor Rs1, the MPU 41 Sets the second route detection command (step S3408). The second route detection command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the second movement route R2 has been selected after the operation of the condition device, and is a command of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output processing in step S1301. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second route detection command, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 and the 7-segment display section 39 to start the set value suggestion production process for suggesting the set value.

  Next, the MPU 41 sets the first winning combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag referred to in step S3402 to ON (step S3409), and sets the second route detection sensor detection flag to OFF (step S3410), The process moves to step S3415.

<Step S3411>
When the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3402: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the second combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3411). ). The second winning combination gate sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the gaming ball 99 has been detected by the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2, that is, that the gaming ball 99 has passed through the second winning combination operation gate G2. This second winning combination gate sensor detection flag is an output from the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2 when the game ball 99 passes through the second winning combination operation gate G1 in the other sensor detection processing of step S3415 described later. It is set to ON when the output of the second combination gate sensor Gs2 is ON in the determination process based on OFF. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the second combination operation gate G2. To do. When the second winning combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3411: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3412, and when the second winning combination gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3411: No), the process proceeds to step S3415.

<Step S3412>
When the 2nd combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3411: Yes), MPU41 sets a 2nd combination gate sensor detection command (step S3412), and transfers a process to step S3415. The second winning combination gate sensor detection command notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has passed through the second winning combination operation gate G2 when the second movement route R2 is selected after the operation of the condition device. It is a command and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the second combination gate sensor detection command, the voice lamp control device 5 ends the set value suggestion production process for suggesting the set values on the symbol display section 341 and the 7-segment display section 39.

<Step S3413>
When the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to ON (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3413). ). The first winning combination gate sensor detection flag is a flag indicating that the gaming ball 99 is detected by the first winning combination gate sensor Gs1, that is, the gaming ball 99 has passed through the first winning combination operation gate G1. This first winning combination gate sensor detection flag is an output from the first winning combination gate sensor Gs1 when the game ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 in the other sensor detection processing of step S3415 described later. It is set to ON when the output of the first combination gate sensor Gs1 is ON in the determination process based on OFF. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed the first winning combination operation gate G1. To do. When the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3414, and when the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF. (Step S3413: No), the process proceeds to step S3415.

<Step S3414>
When the first winning combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3413: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first winning combination gate sensor detection command (step S3414), and shifts the processing to step S3415. The first combination gate sensor detection command notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the game ball 99 has passed through the first combination operation gate G1 when the first movement route R1 is selected after the condition device is activated. It is a command and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78) executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 5 ends the game explanation effect on the symbol display unit 341 when the first winning combination gate sensor detection command is received.

<Step S3415>
In step S3415, the MPU 41 executes other sensor detection processing and ends the sensor detection processing. In the other sensor detection processing, in addition to the sensor detection processing executed by the main controller 4 in the above-described first embodiment, the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first combination gate sensor Gs1, and the second route detection sensor Rs2. , And when the game ball 99 is executed by the second combination gate sensor Gs2, a flag indicating that the game ball 99 is detected by these sensors Rs1, Gs1, Rs2, and Gs2 is set to ON, and When the route detection sensor detection flag or the second route detection sensor detection flag is set to ON, a process of setting those flags to OFF is executed. The first winning combination gate sensor detection flag and the second winning combination gate sensor detection flag are referred to in the conditional device operation processing of FIG. 80 described later, and therefore, in the case where these flags are set to ON. However, it is not set to OFF in this step S3415.

  In the sensor detection processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 41 is more likely to detect the game ball 99 than the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 on condition that the condition device is operated (condition device operation flag is set to ON). When the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the presence or absence of the game ball 99 at the first combination operation gate G1 is determined based on the output from the first combination gate sensor Gs1. To be done. On the contrary, when the condition device is operated, the MPU 41 detects the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. In this case, whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the second winning combination operation gate G2 is determined based on the output from the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2.

  In this way, on condition that the condition device is operated, the MPU 41 plays the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 based on the outputs from the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is detected that the sphere 99 has moved. Therefore, even if the game ball 99 is launched in the right area of the game board 31 in a state where the condition device is not operating, the MPU 41 is based on the outputs from the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2. The movement of the game ball 99 on the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 is not detected, and the passage of the game ball 99 on the first winning combination operation gate G1 and the second winning combination operation gate G2 is not detected. This prevents the accessory continuous actuating device from being operated in a state where the condition for operating the accessory continuous actuating device is not satisfied, and prevents the variable winning port 319 from being opened.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the condition device is operated, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. , The passage of the game ball 99 in the first winning combination operation gate G1 is detected, the process of detecting the passage of the gaming ball 99 in the second winning combination operation gate G2 is not executed, while the first route detection sensor Rs1 When the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected, the passage of the game ball 99 at the second winning combination operation gate G2 is detected, and the first winning combination is detected. The process of detecting the passage of the game ball 99 at the operation gate G1 is not executed. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the game ball 99 passes through the second winning combination operation gate G2. Is detected, while the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first winning combination is detected. The passage of the game ball 99 at the operation gate G1 is restricted from being detected. Therefore, after the first movement route R1 is selected, it is prevented that the accessory continuously operating device is operated by the game ball 99 moving on the second movement route R2, while the second movement route R2 is selected. It is prevented that the accessory continuous operation device is operated by the game ball 99 that moves on the first movement route R1. As a result, when the second moving route R2 is selected, the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one hole clune device 60, and in the state where the operation of the accessory continuous device is delayed, it is launched to the first moving route R1. Even if the game ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1, the winning object continuous operation device is prevented from being operated. Therefore, for example, numerical information about a payout performance including a set value described later in a state in which the operation of the condition device is delayed is explicitly or suggested, but it may be interrupted by the passage of the game ball 99 at the first combination operation gate G1. It is prevented from being terminated.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
The main processing executed by the main control device 4 in this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the content of the variable game control (see FIG. 79). Further, in the main process of the present embodiment, a condition device operation process is executed (see FIG. 78) in addition to the main process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23). Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 79 is the variable game processing executed by the main processing of FIG. 78. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of FIG.

[Variable game control processing]
As shown in FIG. 79, in the sensor detection processing of the present embodiment, the execution of the variable game is restricted while the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are operated, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. After the end of the variation game for the case, the process of operating the condition device is executed.

<Steps S3601 and S3602>
In the variation game control process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is set to ON (step S3601), and when the condition device operation flag is set to OFF (step S3601). (S3601: No), it is determined whether or not the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is set to ON (step S3602). Here, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is a flag for continuously operating the opening / closing door 319 of the variable winning port 316, and the condition device is operated in step S3707 in the condition device operation process of FIG. 80 described later. When the game ball 99 is detected to pass through the first winning combination operating gate G1 or the second winning combination operating gate G2 in the above case, it is set to ON.

  When the condition device operation flag and the accessory continuous operation device operation flag are both set to OFF (No in steps S3601 and S3602), the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process as in the first embodiment. (Steps S1401 to S1408). In addition, when one of the condition device operation flag and the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is set to ON, the variation game process is ended.

<Step S3603>
In step S3603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot type flag is set to ON when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, when the variable game is ended. (Step S3603), if the jackpot type flag is set to on (step S3603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3604, and if the jackpot type flag is set to off (step S3603: No), The variation game control process ends. Here, the jackpot type flag is a flag that indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and that the jackpot type is a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It includes a jackpot flag, a 5R probability variation jackpot flag, and a 16R probability variation jackpot flag. The jackpot type flag is set to ON, for example, when setting the first hold command or the second hold command to be transmitted to the voice lamp controller 5 in the first hold command setting process or the second hold command setting process of FIG. ..

<Steps S3604 and S3605>
When the jackpot type flag is set to ON (step S3603: Yes), the condition device operation command is set (step S3604), and the condition device operation flag is set to ON (step S3605), and the variation game process is executed. finish. The condition device activation command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the condition device is activated, and the voice lamp control device 5 executes the voice lamp in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 78). It is transmitted to the control device 5. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the condition device operation command, it causes the symbol display portion 341 or the like to start the game explanation effect.

[Condition device operation processing]
The condition device actuation process of the present embodiment is a process executed when the condition device is actuated, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first winning combination gate sensor detection flag or the second winning combination gate sensor detection flag. When is set to ON, a process of operating the accessory continuous operation device is executed. Here, FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the condition device actuation process executed in the main process of FIG.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 80, in the conditional device operation process of the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the conditional device operation flag is set to ON (step S3701), and the conditional device operation flag is set to ON. In the case (step S3701: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3702, and when the condition device operation flag is set to OFF (step S3701: No), the condition device operation process is ended.

<Step S3702>
When the condition device operation flag is set to ON (step S3701: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3702), and the first combination. When the continuous gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3703, and when the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3702: No). , And moves the process to step S3709.

<Steps S3703 and S3704>
When the first winning combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3702: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first winning combination gate detection flag to OFF (step S3703), and the first winning combination gate sensor detection is performed. It is determined whether the invalid flag is set to ON (step S3704). When the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to ON (step S3704: YES), the MPU 41 ends the conditional device operation process, and the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is turned off. If set (step S3704: NO), the process proceeds to step S3705.

<Steps S3705 and S3706>
When the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to OFF (step S3704: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to ON (step S3704). S3705). If the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3705: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF (step S3706), The process moves to step S3707. On the other hand, when the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to OFF (step S3705: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3707.

<Steps S3707 and S3708>
In step S3707, the MPU 41 sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to ON, and the condition device operation flag referred to in step S3602 in the variable game control process of FIG. 79 and step S3701 in the condition device operation process. Is set to OFF (step S3708), and the condition device operating process is ended. In other words, when the condition device is operating and the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2). When the gaming ball 99 is detected by the first winning combination gate sensor Gs1 (when the gaming ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1), the opening / closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable winning opening 316 is opened. The accessory continuous operation device that operates continuously is operated.

<Step S3709>
When the first combination gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3702: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3709). If the second winning combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3709: YES), the process proceeds to step S3710, and if the second winning combination gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S3709). S3709: No), and the condition device operating process is ended.

<Steps S3710 and S3711>
When the second winning combination gate sensor detection flag is set to ON (step S3709: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the second winning combination gate detection flag to OFF (step S3710), and the second winning combination gate sensor detection. It is determined whether the invalid flag is set to ON (step S3711). When the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to ON (step S3711: YES), the MPU 41 finishes the condition device operation process and turns off the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag. If it is set (step S3711: No), the process moves to step S3712.

<Steps S3712 and S3713>
When the second combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to OFF (step S3711: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to ON (step S3711). S3712). When the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (step S3712: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag to OFF (step S3713), The process moves to step S3707. On the other hand, when the first combination gate sensor detection invalidation flag is set to OFF (step S3712: No), the process proceeds to step S3707. Here, in step S3707, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is set to ON, and the condition device operation flag is set to OFF (step S3708), whereby the condition device operation process is ended. That is, if the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON when the condition device is operating (the game ball 99 is set by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1). When the game ball 99 is detected by the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2 (when the gaming ball 99 passes through the second winning combination operation gate G2), the opening / closing door 319 that opens and closes the variable winning opening 316 is opened. The accessory continuous operation device that operates continuously is operated.

  In the condition device operation process of the present embodiment, when the condition device is operating, the second combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON (first route before the second route detection sensor Rs2). When the game ball 99 is detected by the detection sensor Rs1), when the game ball 99 is detected by the first winning combination gate sensor Gs1 (when the gaming ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1), the variable winning opening The accessory continuous operation device for continuously operating the opening / closing door 319 for opening / closing 316 is operated. On the contrary, when the first combination gate sensor detection invalid flag is set to ON when the condition device is operating (by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1). When the game ball 99 is detected), when the game ball 99 is detected by the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2 (when the gaming ball 99 passes through the second winning combination operation gate G2), the variable winning opening 316 is opened and closed. The accessory continuous operation device for continuously operating the opening / closing door 319 is operated.

  In this way, the condition continuous device is operated on condition that the condition device is operated, so that the game ball 99 is launched in the right side area of the game board 31 in a state where the condition device is not operated. Even if it does, MPU41 does not detect passage of the game ball 99 in the 1st winning combination operation gate G1 and the 2nd winning combination operation gate G2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the accessory continuous actuating device from being operated and to prevent the variable winning port 319 from being opened in a state where the condition for operating the accessory continuous actuating device is not satisfied.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the condition device is operated, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. , The passage of the game ball 99 at the first winning combination operation gate G1 is detected, and the process of detecting the passage of the gaming ball 99 at the second winning combination operation gate G2 is not executed, but by the first route detection sensor Rs1. When the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected, the passage of the game ball 99 at the second winning combination operation gate G2 is detected, and the first winning combination is detected. The process of detecting the passage of the game ball 99 at the operation gate G1 is not executed. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the game ball 99 passes through the second winning combination operation gate G2. Is detected, while the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first winning combination is detected. The passage of the game ball 99 at the operation gate G1 is restricted from being detected. Therefore, after the first movement route R1 is selected, it is prevented that the accessory continuously operating device is operated by the game ball 99 moving on the second movement route R2, while the second movement route R2 is selected. It is prevented that the accessory continuous operation device is operated by the game ball 99 that moves on the first movement route R1. As a result, when the second moving route R2 is selected, the drop of the game ball 99 is delayed by the one hole clune device 60, and in the state where the operation of the accessory continuous device is delayed, it is launched to the first moving route R1. Even if the game ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1, the winning object continuous operation device is prevented from being operated. Therefore, for example, numerical information about a payout performance including a set value described later in a state in which the operation of the condition device is delayed is explicitly or suggested, but it may be interrupted by the passage of the game ball 99 at the first combination operation gate G1. It is prevented from being terminated.

  In the condition device operation process of the present embodiment, when the condition device operation flag is set to ON, the passage of the game ball 99 by the first combination gate sensor Gs1 and the second combination gate sensor Gs2 is determined. However, it may be possible to determine whether or not the condition device is activated when the passage of the game ball 99 at the first winning combination gate sensor Gs1 and the second winning combination gate sensor Gs2 is detected. That is, when the passage of the game ball 99 at the first combination gate sensor Gs1 or the second combination gate sensor Gs2 is detected, whether or not the jackpot game can be generated based on the condition device operation flag or the like. Alternatively, it may be determined.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 88, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
In the sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment, the set value is replaced with the set value suggestion process (see FIG. 34) of the sub timer interrupt process in the first embodiment described above. Suggestive effect processing is executed (see FIG. 81). Further, in the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, in addition to the sub timer interrupt process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 34), a game explanation effect process is executed (see FIG. 81). Further, in the sub timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, the content of the command determination processing is different from the sub timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 82).

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, in addition to the command determination process of the first embodiment described above, a command necessary to start or end the game explanation effect process and the set value suggestion effect process described later is received. It is determined whether or not. Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 82, in the command determination processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not a conditional device operation command has been received (step S3901). The condition device operation command is a command indicating that the condition device is operated, and is set in step S3604 in the variable game control process of FIG. 79 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. Then, when the MPU 51 receives the conditional device operation command (step S3901: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3902, and when the conditional device operation command is not received (step S3901: No), the process proceeds to step S3903. Transition.

<Step S3902>
When the condition device operation command is received (step S3901: YES), the MPU 51 sets the game explanation effect start flag to ON (step S3902) and ends the command determination process. The game explanation effect start flag is a flag for starting a game explanation effect (see FIG. 84) described later, and is for determining whether to start the game explanation effect in step S4001 of the game explanation effect process of FIG. 83 described later. Is referred to by the MPU 51. That is, the game explanation effect is started when the condition device is operated, that is, when the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

<Step S3903>
When the condition device operation command has not been received (step S3901: NO), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second route detection command has been received (step S3903). The second route detection command is a command indicating that the second movement route R2 has been selected after the operation of the condition device, and is set in step S3408 in the sensor detection process of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. To be done. When the MPU 51 receives the second route detection command (step S3903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3904, and when the second route detection command is not received (step S3903: No), the process steps. It moves to S3905.

<Step S3904>
When the second route detection command is received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value suggestive effect start flag to ON (step S3904), and ends the command determination process. The set value suggestion effect start flag is a flag for terminating the game explanation effect described later and starting the set value suggestion effect, and whether or not to end the game explanation effect in step S4007 of the game explanation effect process of FIG. 83 described later. In order to determine whether or not to start the setting value suggesting effect in step S4101 of the setting value suggesting effect process of FIG. 86, which will be described later, the MPU 51 refers. That is, when the condition device is operated, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, when the second movement route R2 is selected. The game explanation effect is finished and the set value suggestion effect is started.

<Step S3905>
When the second route detection command is not received (step S3903: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the first combination gate sensor detection command is received (step S3905). The first combination gate sensor detection command is a command indicating that the game ball 99 has passed through the first combination operation gate G1 when the first movement route R1 is selected after the operation of the condition device, and the main controller It is set in step S3414 in the sensor detection process of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of No. 4 in FIG. When the MPU 51 receives the first combination gate sensor detection command (step S3905: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3906, and when the first combination gate sensor detection command is not received (step S3905: No), the process proceeds to step S3907.

<Step S3906>
When the first combination gate sensor detection command is received (step S3905: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game explanation effect end flag to ON (step S3906), and ends the command determination process. The game explanation effect end flag is a flag for ending the game explanation effect described later, and is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine whether to end the game explanation effect in step S4006 of the game explanation effect process of FIG. 83 described later. It That is, the game explanation effect is that the game ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 when the first movement route R1 is selected after the operation of the condition device, that is, the winning object continuous operation device is operated. If you are finished.

<Step S3907>
When the first combination gate sensor detection command is not received (step S3905: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second combination gate sensor detection command is received (step S3907). The second winning combination gate sensor detection command is a command indicating that the game ball 99 has passed through the second winning combination operation gate G2 when the second movement route R2 is selected after the operation of the condition device, and the main controller It is set in step S3412 in the sensor detection processing of FIG. 77 executed by the MPU 41 of No. 4 in FIG. Then, when the MPU 51 receives the second combination gate sensor detection command (step S3907: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3908, and when the second combination gate sensor detection command is not received (step S3907: No) returns the process to step S3909.

<Step S3908>
When the second combination gate sensor detection command is received (step S3907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value suggestion production end flag to ON (step S3908) and ends the command determination process. The set value suggestion effect end flag is a flag for ending the set value suggestion effect described later, and the set value suggestion effect (display on the 7-segment display unit 39) is performed in step S4129 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 88 described later. Referenced by the MPU 51 to determine whether to terminate. That is, in the set value suggesting effect (game effect and display on the 7-segment display unit 39), the game ball 99 passes through the second combination operation gate G2 when the second movement route R2 is selected after the operation of the condition device. By doing so, that is, when the accessory continuous operation device is operated, the operation is ended. Further, the set value suggestion effect end flag is also referred to by the MPU 51 in order to determine whether or not to end the game effect in the set value suggestion effect in step S4112 in the set value suggestion process described later. That is, when the game ball 99 passes through the second winning combination gate G2 in the middle of the game effect, the game effect is forcibly ended.

<Step S3909>
When the second combination gate sensor detection command has not been received (step S3907: No), the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands (step S3909) and ends the command determination processing. The process based on other commands is, for example, the process executed in the command determination process of the first embodiment described above.

[Game explanation effect processing]
In the game explanation effect process of the present embodiment, a game explanation effect (see FIG. 84) for explaining the game progress contents when the first movement route R1 is selected and the game progress contents when the second movement route R2 is selected, respectively. Is executed (see FIG. 84). Here, FIGS. 83 and 85 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game explanation effect process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, and FIG. 84 is a display on the symbol display unit 341 in the game explanation effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 83, in the game explanation effect process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the game explanation effect start flag is on (step S4001). The game explanation effect start flag is a flag for starting the game explanation effect, and in the command determination process of FIG. 82, when it is determined that the condition device operation command is received (step S3901: Yes), the command determination process of the command determination process is started. It is turned on in step S3902. That is, in the MPU 51, the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 (the variation game that clearly indicates the lottery result when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is ended), and the condition device is activated. In this case, the game explanation effect is started. When the game explanation effect start flag is ON (step S4001: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4002, and when the game explanation effect start flag is OFF (step S4001: No), the process is stepped. The processing moves to S4005.

<Steps S4002 to S4004>
When the game explanation effect start flag is ON (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 starts the game explanation effect (step S4002). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game explanation effect flag indicating that the game explanation effect is being executed to ON (step S4003), and sets the game explanation effect start flag to OFF (step S4004), and the game explanation effect concerned. The process ends.

  Here, the game explanation effect is an effect that explains the game progress content when the first movement route R1 is selected and the game progress content when the second movement route R2 is selected, and is executed in the symbol display unit 341. To be done. As shown in FIG. 84, in the game explanation effect, the symbol display portion 341 prompts a game board image in which the upper half of the game board 31 is viewed from the front, and a right-hand strike arranged at the bottom of this game board image, and A A character image (a character image of "Right-handed! Choose a route!") That prompts the user to select either the route (first moving route R1) or the B route (second moving route R2) is displayed. The game board image is an image explaining the A route (first moving route R1) and the B route (second moving route R2) (broken line arrow image), and each route displayed in the portion corresponding to the symbol display portion 341. Includes an explanatory image (a character image of "a big hit game will start immediately if you select route A" and "may be set value if you select route B") that explains the advantages of selecting.

  In this way, by executing the game explanation effect, it is possible to know the respective advantages when the A route (first movement route R1) is selected and when the B route (second movement route R2) is selected. .. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select a route that can obtain the advantage that he or she wants to enjoy by referring to the game explanation effect.

  Further, the game explanation effect is started when the condition device is operated, that is, when the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, by stopping the launch of the game ball 99 before or immediately after the decorative design is stopped and displayed, it is possible to secure a sufficient time to grasp the content of the game progress by the game explanation effect. In particular, in the case where an effect in which a combination of jackpot symbols is likely to be stopped and displayed is executed on the symbol display portion 341, it is generally performed to stop the launch of the game ball 99 in order to prevent the generation of waste balls. Similarly, in order to prevent the generation of waste balls, a fixed time from when the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed until the opening of the variable winning port 316 is started without immediately starting the launch of the game ball 99. It is generally performed to stop the launch of the game ball 99. In this way, when the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display portion 341, since the launch of the game ball 99 for a certain period of time is often stopped, in this respect also, the game based on the game explanation effect. It will be possible to secure time to fully understand the progress.

  The explanation image is an A route selection explanation image for explaining the advantages when the A route (first movement route R1) is selected, and B is an explanation image when the B route (second movement route R2) is selected. The route selection explanation images do not have to be displayed at the same time, and for example, the A route selection explanation image and the B route selection explanation image may be switched and displayed. Further, for example, when the A route selection explanation image and the B route selection explanation image are switched and displayed, they may be automatically switched at regular intervals, and the player operates the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) and the selection determination unit 21. It is conceivable that the plurality of selection buttons 21A and the decision button 21B (see FIG. 53) are switched.

  In the present embodiment, when the condition device is operated, the game explanation effect is unconditionally started. For example, when the first movement route R1 (A route) is selected, the game explanation effect is started, and The setting value suggestion effect may be started without executing the game explanation effect when the two movement routes R2 (route B) are selected.

<Step S4005>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 83, when the game explanation effect start flag is OFF (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game explanation effect flag set to ON in step S4003 is set to ON. Yes (step S4005). When the game explanation effect flag is set to ON (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4006, and when the game explanation effect flag is set to OFF (step S4005: No), the process To step S4010 of FIG. 85.

<Step S4006>
When the game explanation effect flag is set to ON (step S4005: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game explanation effect end flag is set to ON (step S4006). The game explanation effect end flag is a flag for ending the game explanation effect, and when it is determined that the first winning combination gate sensor detection command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 82 (step S3905: Yes), It is turned on in step S3906 of the command determination processing. That is, the MPU 51, when the game ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1 when the first movement route R1 is selected after the operation of the condition device, that is, when the winning object continuous operation device is operated, The explanation production is ended. When the game explanation effect end flag is on (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4007, and when the game explanation effect end flag is off (step S4006: No), the game explanation. The production process ends.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game explanation effect is started by the operation of the condition device (the decorative display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols in the symbol display portion 341), and the first combination gate Gs1 is displayed. It ends when the game ball 99 passes, or when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, but the game explanation effect is provided at the start of operation of the condition device. In the symbol display unit 341, etc., the right-handing request effect that requires the player to launch the game ball 99 in the right area of the game board 31 (to perform right-handing) without starting the operation of the condition device is performed. It may be executed. In this case, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 after the condition device is activated (when the game ball 99 is guided to the clune device 60). Alternatively, the right-handed request effect may be ended, and the game explanation effect may be executed while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device in the clune device 60 is delayed. The game explanation effect may be the same as the above-mentioned game explanation effect described with reference to FIG. 84, or may be different from the above-mentioned game explanation effect. However, in the game explanation effect, it is possible to select at least one of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2, and the respective advantages when the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 are selected will be described. It is necessary for the player to recognize that the game is to be played.

  By the way, in a gaming machine that hits right when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of jackpot symbols on a display device such as a symbol display unit, many players hit a gaming ball in the right area of the gaming board with maximum strength. .. Therefore, if the player does not fully understand the game content on the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the gaming ball 99 is unconditionally hit with the maximum strength as in the conventional gaming machine.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball 99 is launched in the right side area of the gaming board 31 with the maximum strength, the gaming ball 99 moves along the second movement route R2, and the accessory continuously operating device. Operation is delayed. Therefore, if the right-handed request effect is executed at the start of operation of the condition device and the game explanation effect is executed at the time of selecting the second movement route R2, the contents of the game on the gaming machine 10 are not fully understood. When the player hits the game ball 99 with the maximum strength when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 by the combination of the jackpot symbol, the game contents can be understood by explaining the game. .. That is, the player selects at least the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 when the player hits the game ball with the maximum strength unconditionally even if he / she does not fully understand the contents of the game. It is possible, and it becomes possible to understand the respective advantages when the first moving route R1 and the second moving route R2 are selected. As a result, the player understands the contents of the game after the next big hit (the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the design display portion 341 by a combination of big hits), and the first movement route R1 and the second movement route according to his / her preference. Either of the movement routes R2 can be selected. In particular, since the second movement route R2 is a movement route in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, it is possible to spend a sufficient amount of time for game explanation when selecting the second movement route R2. Therefore, it becomes possible to more surely inform the player of the game contents.

  In addition, when the condition device is operated for the case where the result of the big hit lottery in the low probability mode is a big hit, the right-handed request effect at the start of the operation of the condition device and the game explanation effect at the time of selecting the second movement route R2 are executed. Applied to (so-called first hit), when the condition device operates when the result of the big hit lottery in the high probability mode is a big hit (so-called condominium), the game explanation effect is executed by the operation of the condition device, It is preferable that the set value suggestion effect is executed when the second movement route R2 is selected.

<Steps S4007 to S4009>
When the game explanation effect end flag is on (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game explanation effect (step S4007). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game explanation effect flag indicating that the game explanation effect is being executed to OFF (step S4008) and sets the game explanation effect end flag to OFF (step S4009), and the game explanation effect. The process ends.

<Step S4010>
When the game explanation effect flag is set to OFF (step S4005: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the set value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON as shown in FIG. 85 (step S4010). ). The set value suggesting effect start flag is a flag for ending the game explanation effect and starting a set value suggesting effect to be described later, and when it is determined in the command determination process of FIG. 82 that the second route detection command is received. (Step S3903: Yes), it is set to ON in step S3904 of the command determination process. That is, when the condition device is operated, the MPU 51 detects the gaming ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, selects the second movement route R2. When the game explanation effect is finished, the game explanation effect is ended. That is, the game explanation effect is started after the condition device is activated, the first movement route R1 is selected, and the second movement route R2 is selected in addition to the case where the game ball 99 passes through the first winning combination operation gate G1. Is ended when the set value suggesting effect is started.

  If the set value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4011, and if the set value suggestion effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4011: YES). S4010: No), the game explanation effect process is ended.

<Steps S4011 and S4012>
When the set value suggestion effect start flag is ON (step S4010: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game explanation effect (step S4011). Next, the MPU 51 sets the game explanation effect flag indicating that the game explanation effect is being executed to OFF (step S4012), and ends the game explanation effect process.

[Set value suggestion production process]
In the set value suggestion effect process of the present embodiment, when the second movement route R2 is selected after the operation of the condition device, the game effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 is executed, and the points acquired in this game effect ( In accordance with the number of established specific conditions), a 7-segment production in which a non-set value other than the set value defining the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery is explicitly or suggested on the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed. Here, FIG. 86 and FIG. 88 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggesting effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment.

<Step S4101>
As shown in FIG. 86, in the set value suggestion production process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the set value suggestion production start flag is set to ON (step S4101). The set value suggestion effect start flag is a flag for starting the set value suggestion effect, and in the command determination process of FIG. 82, when it is determined that the second route detection command is received (step S3903: Yes), the command concerned. It is set to ON in step S3904 of the determination process. That is, when the condition device is operated, the MPU 51 detects the gaming ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, that is, selects the second movement route R2. If the setting value suggestion effect is started, the setting value suggestion effect is started. If the set value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4102, and if the set value suggestion effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4102). S4101: No), and the process proceeds to step S4107.

<Step S4102>
When the set value suggestion production start flag is set to ON (step S4101: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game production type to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 (step S4102).

  The game effect of the present embodiment is a game in which points can be acquired, and the points acquired in this game effect correspond to the number of satisfied specific conditions. That is, the game effect is an opportunity to meet a specific condition in a specific period, and in this game effect, one specific condition is satisfied each time one point is acquired in the game effect. In this way, by giving an opportunity (a performance such as a game effect is performed) in which a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, paying attention to the opportunity provided in the specific period, the condition device is activated and the accessory continuity is continued. It becomes possible to increase interest in the progress of the game in the waiting period until the operating device is activated. In particular, by providing an opportunity for a specific condition to be satisfied as an effect such as a game effect, it is possible to further increase interest in the number of satisfied specific conditions (points to be acquired) that are satisfied during a specific period.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, since the game setting values are six of 1 to 6, the five game setting values excluding the setting values are non-setting values. On the other hand, the 7-segment display section 39 displays numbers using the seven segments A to G. Therefore, 7 specific conditions need to be satisfied in order to grasp one non-set value, and 35 specific conditions must be satisfied in order to grasp all non-set values. . Therefore, in the game production, one non-setting value can be grasped every time 7 points are acquired, and all non-setting values can be grasped by acquiring 35 points or more. As a result, the setting value can be grasped. it can.

  Here, FIG. 87 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a game type determination table used by the audio lamp control device, and the MPU 51 determines the game type based on this game type determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (A), in the game type determination table, the coin type game (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and Five games of the expected game (game E) are defined by the game type lottery counter, and the MPU 51 selects the game according to the value of the game type lottery counter.

  Here, in the coin acquisition game (game A), for example, the coin displayed on the symbol display portion 341 is acquired by selecting the advancing direction of the character, and points are awarded according to the value of the acquired coin. In the mission achievement game (game B), for example, a plurality of missions are sequentially given to the player, and points are given according to the number of achievements of the mission and the achievement level. In the battle game (game C), for example, a teammate character of a player and an enemy character are confronted with each other, and points are awarded according to the number of enemy characters the teammate character has defeated and the degree of strong enemy. In the quiz game (game D), for example, a question and a plurality of answers are presented, and points are awarded according to the number of questions correctly answered by the player and the difficulty level. In the prediction game (game E), points are awarded according to the number and value of the jewels in the treasure box selected by the player from a plurality of treasure boxes, for example.

  In this way, a game for acquiring points (the number of satisfied specific conditions) for explicitly or suggesting a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 is selected from a plurality of games having different points acquisition methods. Therefore, a decrease in interest in the game effect due to the repeated execution of the same game is reduced. In addition, when the same game is repeatedly executed, it is feared that the game will be easily captured by the player, but it is possible to increase the difficulty of the game capture by setting a plurality of games. It is prevented that the non-set value is easily grasped.

  In the game type determination table, as the game types, there are five coin-acquiring games (game A), mission achievement games (game B), battle games (game C), quiz games (game D), and expected games (game E). Each of the two games is configured as, for example, a player participation type game or a scenario management type game. The player participation type game is a game in which the player's operations on the operation buttons 20 and the selection determination unit 21 determine the progress process and results (the number of points acquired) of the game. The coin acquisition game (game A), the mission achievement game (game B), the battle game (game C), the quiz game (game D), and the prediction game (game E) are easily configured as player participation type games. In the player participation type game, since the progress process and the result of the game are determined by the operation of the player, it is easy to improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, the scenario management type game is executed according to a scenario in which the progress of the game and the result (the number of points to be acquired) of the game are predetermined, and a coin acquisition game (game A), a mission achievement game (game B), and a battle game (game). C) is easy to configure as a scenario management type game. In the scenario management type game, points corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios are always given to a player who does not actively participate in the game. Therefore, the non-set value is explicitly or suggested on the 7-segment display unit 39 even for a player who is not interested in the game.

  The game type lottery counter is a loop counter having a counter value of 0 to 149, which is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 149. .. Then, the coin acquisition game (game A) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 0 to 49, and the selection rate is 33.3%. The mission achievement game (game B) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 50 to 89, and the selection rate is 26.7%. The battle game (game C) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 90 to 119, and the selection rate is 20.0%. The quiz game (game D) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 120 to 139, and the selection rate is 13.3%. The predicted game (game E) is selected when the counter value of the game type lottery counter is 140 to 149, and the selection rate is 6.7%. As described above, the selection rates of the five coin-acquiring games (game A), mission achievement game (game B), battle game (game C), quiz game (game D), and expected game (game E) are different. , The coin acquisition game (game A), the mission achievement game (game B), the battle game (game C), the quiz game (game D), and the expected game (game E) have the highest selection rate.

  In addition, five games, a coin acquisition game (game A), a mission achievement game (game B), a battle game (game C), a quiz game (game D), and an expected game (game E), have respective point difficulty levels. different. The point acquisition difficulty is, for example, the expected value of the points acquired in the game, and the lower the expected value, the higher the point acquisition difficulty. Conversely, the higher the expected value, the higher the point acquisition difficulty. Low. The point acquisition difficulty level may be defined by including an initial point described later (see FIG. 87 (B)), but in the present embodiment, the initial point is not included. The point acquisition difficulty level may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the start of the game effect. The point acquisition difficulty level is displayed, for example, by the number of star images or the like correlated with the difficulty level. The point acquisition difficulty level is higher in the order of the coin acquisition game (game A), the mission achievement game (game B), the battle game (game C), the quiz game (game D), and the expected game (game E). On the other hand, the selection rate, the point acquisition difficulty, the coin acquisition game (game A), the mission achievement game (game B), the battle game (game C), the quiz game (game D), and the expected game (game E) in this order. Low. In this way, by setting a plurality of games with different point acquisition difficulty levels, each game is characterized by the point acquisition difficulty level, which makes it possible to improve interest in the game production. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to which is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a game having a higher point acquisition difficulty has a higher selection rate, while a game having a lower point acquisition difficulty has a lower selection rate, which means that the points acquisition difficulty and the selection rate are high. There is a conflicting relationship. As described above, a game having a higher degree of difficulty in obtaining points has a higher selection rate, so that it is possible to prevent many points from being easily obtained and prevent a non-set value (set value) from being easily grasped. . On the other hand, the lower the selection rate is, the lower the selection rate of the game is, and therefore the selection rate is low, and therefore, the opportunity for many point games is given when the selection rate is selected. Therefore, the non-set value (set value) is grasped. Opportunity is given, and a decrease in interest in the game effect due to repeated selection of a game having a low point acquisition difficulty is suppressed. Therefore, due to the contradictory relationship between the high degree of difficulty in acquiring points and the high selection rate, it is possible to prevent a non-set value (set value) from being easily grasped and to prevent a decrease in interest in game production. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the selection rate and the point acquisition difficulty of each game are set unevenly, but at least one of the selection rate and the point acquisition difficulty may be set uniformly. Further, the number of games is not limited to five and may be another number, and the type of game is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 87 (A).

<Steps S4103 and S4104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 86, in step S4103, the MPU 51 sets an initial point, and further sets the initial point as the value of the point counter (step S4104). The initial points are points that are given to the player at the start of the game, separately from the points acquired in the game. In this way, by providing the initial points, it is possible to obtain points even in a game other than the game. Therefore, even when a game with a high degree of difficulty in obtaining points is selected, it is possible to prevent the desire to obtain points in the game from decreasing.

  Here, FIG. 87 (B) is a diagram showing an example of an initial point determination table used by the voice lamp control device, and the MPU 51 determines an initial point based on this initial point determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (B), in the initial point determination table, the initial point lottery counter is defined for each game type, and the MPU 51 selects an initial point according to the game type and the value of the initial point lottery counter. . In this way, by setting the initial points for each game type, each game is characterized not only by the point acquisition difficulty level but also by the initial points, which makes it possible to further increase interest in the game production, Further, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to which game is selected.

  The initial point lottery counter is a loop counter having a counter value of 0 to 299, which is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 299. Then, in the coin acquisition game (game A), initial points are selected from 0 points, 1 point, 2 points, 3 points and 5 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial point is 5 points, which is all points. It is the lowest in the game, and the higher the initial point, the harder it is to select. In the coin-winning game (game A), the expected value of the initial points is 1.4 points, which is the lowest among all the games. In the mission achievement game (Game B), the initial point is selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial point is comparatively 8 points. High, but the higher the initial point, the harder it is to choose. Further, in the mission achievement game (game B), the expected value of the initial points is 2.6 points, which is the second lowest among all games. In the battle game (game C), initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial point is relatively high at 8 points. , High initial points are relatively easy to select. Further, in the battle game (game C), the expected value of the initial points is 3.8 points, and this expected value is an intermediate value in all the games. In the quiz game (game D), the initial points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points and 8 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial point is relatively high at 8 points. , The higher the initial point, the easier the selection. In addition, in the quiz game (game D), the expected value of the initial points is 4.9 points, which is the second highest in all games. In the prediction game (Game E), the initial point is selected from 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, 8 points and 10 points according to the value of the initial point lottery counter, and the maximum initial point is 10 points, which is the whole game. The highest and highest initial points are more likely to be selected. In the expected game (Game E), the expected value of the initial points is 6.9 points, which is the highest among all the games.

  As described above, a game with a higher degree of difficulty in obtaining points has a lower initial point and a lower expected value of the initial points, and a game with a lower degree of difficulty in obtaining points has a higher degree of initial points. Since the points are easily selected and the expected value of the initial points is high, there is a contradictory relationship between the high degree of difficulty in acquiring points and the high initial points and expected values. In this way, the higher the difficulty level of obtaining points, the more difficult it is to select high points as the initial points and the low expected value of the initial points, which prevents many points from being easily obtained. It is possible to prevent the (set value) from being easily grasped. On the other hand, a game with a lower point acquisition difficulty is more likely to select high points as initial points and has a high expected value of initial points, which gives many opportunities for point games, making it easy to grasp non-set values. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game effect due to the repeated selection of the game having a low point acquisition difficulty level. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the non-setting value (setting value) from being easily grasped due to the conflicting relationship between the high point acquisition difficulty, the high point acquisition difficulty, and the initial point or expected value. At the same time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game production.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, there is a contradictory relationship between the high point acquisition difficulty and the high initial points and expected values, but there is a correlation between the high point acquisition difficulty and the high initial points and expected values. You may. That is, a game with a higher degree of difficulty in obtaining points is more likely to be selected as an initial point and has a higher expected value of initial points, while a game with a lower degree of difficulty in obtaining points has a higher initial point and is selected as a higher point. It may be difficult to be done, and the expected value of the initial points may be lowered. In this way, by defining the relationship between the high degree of difficulty in acquiring points and the initial points or expected value, for example, the higher the points acquisition difficulty, the higher the initial points, but the points are less likely to accumulate during the game. A game property that tends to be a start dash type is added. On the other hand, the lower the degree of difficulty in obtaining points, the lower the initial points, but the more points are likely to accumulate during the game, the more the game characteristic of tending to be a rush-type game is given. As described above, the correlation between the degree of difficulty in acquiring points and the height of initial points and expected values enables characterization according to the type of game with respect to the progress of elapsed points (passage of time). As a result, it is possible to enjoy the points earning process according to the game type, so that the enjoyment of the game is further improved.

  The initial points do not have to be set for each game type, and the same points may be selected with the same probability in all games, or the selection rate of each initial point may be made uniform. Further, the initial points are not necessarily required to be given, and the points acquired in the game effect may start from 0 points.

  In addition, the acquired (selected) initial points may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In this case, since the player can grasp the initial points at the start of the game, the acquired points including the initial points can be accurately grasped. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, the initial points do not have to be displayed in the symbol display portion 341. In this case, the player cannot grasp the initial points at the start of the game, and thus cannot accurately grasp the acquired points including the initial points. However, since the initial point is internally added to the value of the point counter in step S4103, if a high point is selected as the initial point, for example, an unexpectedly large number of segments will be included in the 7-segment production described later. By making A to G control targets, it is possible to give a player a sense of surprise.

<Steps S4105 and S4106>
Returning to the description of FIG. 86, in step S4105, the MPU 51 sets the game effect time counter that indicates the remaining time of the game effect, starts the game effect, and sets the game effect flag that indicates that the game effect is being executed. It is set to ON (step S4106), and the set value suggestion effect process is ended. As for the value of the game effect time counter, for example, after the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2, the second role continuous operation gate G2 arranged below the lower opening 606 of the one-hole clune device 60 is used. From the design time (theoretical value) until 99 passes, it is set to a value that is less than or equal to the time obtained by subtracting the minimum time required to display all non-set values as the 7-segment production of the set value suggestion production. .. The minimum time is a time for controlling the seven segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 five times, a total of 35 times. For example, when the time required to control one segment is 0.5 seconds, it is 17 times. .5 seconds.

<Step S4107>
If the set value suggestion effect start flag is set to OFF (step S4101: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the game effect flag set to ON in step S4106 is set to ON, that is, the game effect is executed. It is determined whether it has been done (step S4107). When the game effect flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4108, and when the game effect flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), the process is performed. 88, and the process proceeds to step S4119.

<Step S4108>
When the game effect flag is set to ON (step S4107: Yes), the game effect progress processing is executed. In this game effect progress processing, for example, the image is changed or the screen is switched. The change of the image and the switching of the screen are executed, for example, in accordance with the remaining time of the game effect or the operation of the operation button 20 or the selection determining section 21 by the player. Also, in the game effect progress process, the points that the player has acquired between the end of the set value suggestion effect process in the previous sub timer interrupt process and the set value suggestion effect process in the current sub timer interrupt process. If there is, a process of storing this point in the RAM 512 is executed.

<Step S4109>
In step S4109, the MPU 51 executes a process of updating the value of the point counter. Specifically, the MPU 51, based on the points stored in the RAM 512 in step S4108, sets the set value in the sub timer interrupt process this time from the end of the set value suggestion effect process in the previous sub timer interrupt process. The point acquired by the player until the suggestion effect process is added to the value of the point counter.

<Steps S4110 and S4111>
In step S4110, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the game effect time counter indicating the remaining time of the game effect. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the game effect time counter after subtraction is 0, that is, whether it is the end timing of the game effect, or whether it is the end timing of the game effect (step S4111). ). When the value of the game effect time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to S4113, and when the value of the game effect time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No). , And the process proceeds to S4112.

<Step S4112>
When the value of the game effect time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4111: No), that is, when the game effect execution time remains, it is determined whether or not the set value suggestion effect end flag is set to ON. Yes (step S4112). The set value suggestive effect end flag is a flag for ending the set value suggestive effect, and when it is determined that the second combination gate sensor detection command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 82 (step S3907: Yes). Is set to ON in step S3908 of the command determination process. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through the second winning combination operation gate G2 by discharging the game ball 99 from the one-hole clune device 60 while the game effect time is left. to decide. Then, when the set value suggestion effect end flag is set to on (step S4112: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4116 of FIG. 88, and the set value suggestion effect end flag is set to off. In the case (step S4112: No), the set value suggestion effect is ended.

<Steps S4113 to S4115>
When the value of the game effect time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4111: Yes), that is, when the game effect end timing is reached, the 7-segment effect start flag is set to ON (step S4113), and the game effect flag is further set. Is turned off (step S4114), a game effect end process is executed (step S4115), and the set value suggestion effect process is ended.

  The 7-segment effect start flag is a flag for starting the 7-segment effect that explicitly or suggests a non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39, and whether or not to start the 7-segment effect in step S4119 of FIG. 88 described later. Is referenced by the MPU 51 to determine

<Steps S4116 to S4118>
When the set value suggestion effect end flag is set to ON (step S4112: Yes), the MPU 51 clears the value of the game effect time counter as shown in FIG. 88 (step S4116), and further sets value suggestion effect. Along with setting the end flag to OFF (step S4117), a game effect end process such as setting the game effect flag to OFF is executed (step S4118), and the set value suggestion effect process is ended.

  By the way, the staying time (delay time) of the game ball 99 in the one-hole clune device 60 is not constant, and for example, variations occur depending on the ball entry angle and position of the game ball 99, and a plurality of game balls 99 are one-hole clune. When the game balls 99 are simultaneously present in the device 60, it is assumed that the game balls 99 are discharged from the one-hole clune device 60 in a time shorter than the design time (theoretical value) due to mutual interference of the game balls 99. That is, in a situation where the game effect time is left, the game ball 99 is discharged from the one hole clune device 60, so that the game ball 99 passes through the second winning combination operation gate G2. Is assumed to be activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game effect is forcibly ended when the stay time of the game ball 99 in the one hole clune device 60 is shorter than the design time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game effect from being executed in the symbol display portion 341 after the jackpot game is started, and it is possible to appropriately execute the jackpot game effect.

  When the game effect is forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, unlike the case where the game effect is ended by the end timing of the game effect (the value of the game effect time counter is 0), 7 The segment effect start flag is never set to ON. That is, when the game effect is forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the set value suggestion effect is ended without executing the 7-segment effect. As a result, the set value suggestion effect can be completed before the accessory continuous operation device is activated.

  Even if the game effect is forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to execute the 7-segment effect. For example, by not using the 7-segment display unit 39 in the big hit game effect, it is possible to execute the 7 segment effect even after the start of the big hit game. In other words, when the display device for explicitly indicating or suggesting the non-set value in the set value suggestion effect is not used in the jackpot game effect, the game effect is forcibly terminated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. Also, it is possible to explicitly or suggest a non-set value on the display device. In this way, by explicitly indicating or suggesting a non-set value on the display device that is not used in the jackpot game, even if the game effect is forcibly terminated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the non-set value is given to the player. Can be provided, and the player can enjoy the progress of the game by guessing the non-set value even after the jackpot game is started. Further, when the game effect is forcibly terminated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, information indicating or suggesting a non-set value may be provided on the symbol display unit 341 during the jackpot game. The information may be provided by any of the opening in the jackpot game, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending, but for example, the setting value suggestion screen (FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2) described in the first embodiment described above. ), Similar to FIG. 47 (C)), an additional image including five setting value suggestive images imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 can be displayed by opening or ending.

  Even when an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the event (predetermined effect) is executed again when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Good. By re-executing the event (predetermined effect) in this manner, it is possible to secure many opportunities to confirm the event (predetermined effect). Thereby, it becomes possible to improve interest in the game by re-execution of the event (predetermined effect), and it becomes possible to improve interest in the game.

  Further, the predetermined condition to be re-executed when the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect is forcibly ended is, for example, an event such as the game effect before the end timing of the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect arrives It is conceivable that the (predetermined effect) is ended. That is, when the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect is finished before the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect arrives, the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect is re-executed. In this way, when the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect ends before the end timing of the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect comes, the event (predetermined effect) such as the game effect is re-executed. Thus, even if an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is interrupted midway, the event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect can be executed to the end as compensation. This makes it possible to further increase interest in the game by re-execution of an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect, and when the event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect provides a privilege The period during which you get is compensated to the end without interruption.

  Further, as the predetermined condition re-executed when an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is forcibly ended, for example, a jackpot game is executed. In this way, since the predetermined condition is that the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to execute an event (a predetermined effect) such as a game effect in the jackpot game. That is, by passing (entering) the game ball to the first winning combination operation gate G1 (first predetermined (entering ball) area) or the second winning combination operating gate G2 (second predetermined (entering ball) area), When an event such as an effect (predetermined effect) is interrupted midway, a first winning combination operation gate G1 (first predetermined (entering ball) area) or a second winning combination operation gate G2 (second predetermined (entering ball) area It is possible to execute an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect in the jackpot game generated by the passage of the game ball to). Accordingly, when an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is forcibly ended, an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect can be re-executed immediately after the event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect ends. It is possible to shorten the time for which an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is interrupted, and even if an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect is forcibly terminated midway, an event (predetermined effect) such as a game effect Similar to the case where is continuously executed until the end, the predetermined effect is executed without a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, as the predetermined condition, it is possible to limit the fact that a specific jackpot game is executed. Specifically, the specific jackpot game is, for example, a probability variation jackpot game, 16R (probability variation) jackpot game (long game time is long (a predetermined number (eg, 7 to 10) or more round games are executed) jackpot game ), 5R certainty variation jackpot game, (5R) regular jackpot game, and so on. When the specific jackpot game as the predetermined condition is a probability variation jackpot game, the privilege of re-execution of a predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated when the probability variation game is advantageous to the player is given, and the player's advantage is further improved. To be done. In particular, when the specific jackpot game as the predetermined condition is a jackpot game in which a large number (a predetermined number or more) of round games such as 16R probability variation jackpots are executed, the execution time of the particular jackpot game is long, so that the game effect, etc. It becomes possible to sufficiently secure the re-execution time of the event (predetermined effect). Further, when the specific jackpot game as the predetermined condition is a normal jackpot game, since this normal jackpot game is more disadvantageous to the player than the probability variation jackpot game, it is forcibly terminated as compensation for the jackpot game which is disadvantageous to the player. An event (a predetermined effect) such as a game effect is re-executed.

  In addition, when the game effect is forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, if the non-set value is explicitly indicated or suggested, for example, the non-set value is explicitly specified based on the points acquired until the game effect is forcibly ended. Or suggested. Further, when the game effect is forcibly terminated, the player takes a short time to obtain points, but this disadvantage is caused by, for example, a seventh embodiment described later. As will be described, it is also possible to perform compensation such as adding compensation points to the points acquired at the end of the game production.

<Step S4119>
When the game effect flag is set to OFF (step S4107: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 7-segment effect start flag is set to ON (step S4119). The 7-segment effect start flag is a flag for starting the 7-segment effect, and when the game effect is ended, step S4113 of FIG. 86 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to start the 7-segment effect by the end of the game effect. If the 7-segment production start flag is set to ON (step S4119: Yes), the process proceeds to step S4120, and if the 7-segment production start flag is set to OFF (step S4119: No), the process proceeds to step S4128.

<Steps S4120 and S4121>
When the 7-segment production start flag is set to ON (step S4119: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the value of the point counter (step S4120) and determines whether the value of the point counter is 1 or more. (Step S4121). When the value of the point counter is 1 or more (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4122, and when the value of the point counter is not 1 or more (0), moves the process to step S4122. To do.

<Steps S4122 to S4124>
When the value of the point counter is 1 or more (step S4121: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a process for explicitly or suggesting non-setting on the 7-segment display unit 39 (steps S4122 to S4124). The processing of steps S4122 to S4124 in the set value suggestion effect of the present embodiment is basically the same as steps S2303 to S2306 in the 7-segment display unit control processing of FIG. 49 in the first embodiment described above, and It suffices to replace the number of game balls 99 entered in the special out opening 373 of the clune device 37 in the first embodiment with the acquisition points of the present embodiment. Specifically, in step S4122, MPU 51 reads the segment display unit control information from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) set in RAM 512 of voice lamp control device 5. Then, the MPU 51 determines the control content for the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the point counter acquired in step S4120 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S4122. (Step S4123), the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed based on the control content (Step S4124).

<Steps S4125 to S4127>
In step S4125, the MPU 51 clears the value of the point counter. Then, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment control flag to ON (step S4126), sets the 7-segment production start flag to OFF (step S4127), and ends the set value suggestion production.

<Step S4128>
When the 7-segment production start flag is set to OFF (step S4119: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 7-segment control flag indicating that the 7-segment display section 39 is being controlled is set to ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the 7-segment display unit 39 is being controlled (step S4128). When the 7-segment control flag is set to on (step S4128: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4329, and when the 7-segment control flag is set to off (step S4128: No). , The set value suggesting effect ends.

<Step S4129>
When the 7-segment control flag is set to ON (step S4128: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the set value suggestion production end flag for ending the set value suggestion production is set to ON, that is, 7 segment production. It is determined whether or not to end (step S4129). When the set value suggestion production end flag is set to ON (step S4129: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4131, and when the set value suggestion production end flag is set to OFF (step S4129: No), the process proceeds to step S4130.

<Step S4130>
When the set value suggestion production end flag is set to OFF (step S4129: No), the MPU 51 executes control of the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S4130) and ends the set value suggestion production. That is, the MPU 51 sequentially controls the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the control content set in step S4123 while the 7-segment control in-progress flag is set to ON. In this step S4130, by receiving the second combination gate sensor detection command in step S3907 in the command determination processing of FIG. 82, the set value suggestive effect end flag is set to ON, that is, the second combination continuous operation. It is repeatedly executed until the game ball 99 passes through the gate G2. This controls the number of segments A to G according to the points the player has earned in the game, and clearly or suggests the non-set value.

  In the 7-segment production, the number of segments A to G is controlled by the player according to the points acquired in the game, but the control status of the segments A to G may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. This prevents the occurrence of a blank period in which the effect is not executed in the symbol display unit 341 between the end of the game effect and the start of the jackpot game effect, and the estimation of the non-set value becomes easier. .

  Further, the display content (display history) of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment production may be displayed as an additional image in the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game. Specifically, the additional image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as, for example, an opening effect or an ending effect of the jackpot game. Further, the additional image may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as an additional image including five setting value suggestive images simulating the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment (FIG. 47). (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C)). In this way, the display history in the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment production in the jackpot game is displayed in the symbol display section 341, so that the information regarding the non-set values displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 in the jackpot game is displayed. It is possible to confirm. As a result, when it is not possible to know that the information regarding the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is overlooked, or the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Even in the case of forgetting, the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can again identify or infer the non-setting value and recognize or infer the setting value based on the additional image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game.

  By the way, as described above, the retention time (delay time) of the game ball 99 in the one-hole clune device 60 is not constant, and the game ball 99 is released from the one-hole clune device 60 in a time shorter than the design time (theoretical value). It is supposed to be done. In other words, the game ball 99 is discharged from the one-hole clune device 60 in a situation where the control of the segments A to G corresponding to the points acquired by the player in the game is not finished, and thus the second winning combination operation gate It is assumed that the accessory continuously operating device is operated by the game ball 99 passing through G2. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the control of the segments A to G corresponding to the points is not completed, the 7-segment production is forcibly ended when the accessory continuous operation device is operated. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the 7-segment production from being executed in parallel during the execution of the jackpot game effect, and it is possible to appropriately execute the jackpot game effect. Further, when the 7-segment production is forcibly ended, if the additional image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game as described above, it is originally planned to be presented in the 7-segment production by this additional image. All the information provided will be presented again. As a result, the player can surely enjoy the privilege according to the right (point) acquired in the game effect even when the 7-segment effect is forcibly terminated.

  Further, even when the jackpot game is started by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, it is possible to execute the 7-segment effect as in the case where the game effect is forcibly ended. For example, by not using the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game effect, it is possible to continuously execute the 7 segment effect even while the jackpot game is in effect. In other words, by not using the display device for explicitly or suggesting the non-set value in the set value suggestion production in the jackpot game production, even when the jackpot game is executed, the non-set value is set in the display device. It is possible to continue to carry out explicit or suggestion. In this way, when the jackpot game effect is started in the situation where the control of the number of segments A to G corresponding to the points is not finished by explicitly or suggesting the non-set value in the display device that is not used in the jackpot game. Even if it is, the player can continue to be provided with information indicating or suggesting the non-set value, and the player can infer the non-set value and enjoy the progress of the game even after the jackpot game is started. be able to.

<Steps S4131 and S4132>
When the set value suggestion production end flag is set to ON (step S4129: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S4131), and the 7-segment control is being performed. The flag is set to off (step S4132), and the set value suggestion effect process is ended.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the 7 segment effect is ended when the set value suggestion effect end flag is set to ON, but the non-setting is explicitly or suggested in the 7 segment display unit 39 even in the jackpot game. The information to be displayed may be continuously displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the information clearly indicating or suggesting non-setting in the 7-segment display unit 39 during the big hit game, it becomes possible to estimate the non-set value even during the big hit game. .. This allows more time to guess the non-set value, so it is possible to more accurately guess the non-set value, and it is possible to improve interest in jackpot games that tend to be boring. ..

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first movement route R1 is selected when the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation device is operated in a short time. On the other hand, when the second movement route R2 is selected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, and the game effect is executed while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed. At the same time, the 7-segment display unit 39 provides information for identifying or estimating the non-setting value according to the points obtained in the game effect. Therefore, by selecting the first movement route R1 when the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation device is operated in a short time, and the time until the big hit game (opening / closing execution mode) is started is wasted. This can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented. Furthermore, by selecting the first movement route R1 when the game time of the player is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings such as irritation and discomfort due to a slow start of the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine. On the other hand, if the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by selecting the second movement route R2 when the condition device is operated, the information for specifying or inferring the non-set value is provided, and thus the non-set value is not set. The value can be guessed and specified, and the interest in the game is improved. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated, the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 can be selected, and the advantages obtained when the respective movement routes R1 and R2 are selected are different. .. As a result, the player can select the movement routes R1 and R2 according to his / her interests and circumstances, so that convenience and interest in the game are improved.

  It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, the same design changes as the design changes in the first to fifth embodiments described above are possible, and the technical matters of the first to fifth embodiments described above. It is also possible to combine.

[Seventh Embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, the player can select which of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 the game ball 99 is moved to when the condition device is activated, and the first movement route R1 When selecting, the accessory continuously operating device is activated in a short time, while when the second movement route R2 is selected, the operation of the accessory continuously operating device is delayed by the one-hole clune device 60, and the accessory continuously operating. The case where the game effect is executed and the information for identifying or estimating the non-set value according to the points acquired in the game effect is provided while the operation of the device is delayed has been described.

  However, in the above-described sixth embodiment, the staying time of the game ball 99 in the one-hole clune device 60 is not necessarily constant as described above, and variations occur in the staying time. It is expected that the execution time will be shorter than the design time (theoretical time). When the execution time of the game production becomes shorter than the design time (theoretical time), the game production is forcibly terminated, the expected value of points obtainable in the game production becomes lower than the theoretical value, and a non-set value is specified or The amount of information to be inferred is also disadvantageous in that it is smaller than the expected value, which may cause a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the accessory continuous operation device is activated before the design time (theoretical time) capable of satisfying the specific condition is reached, that is, the specific time (for example, the game effect execution time) is In the case of shortening, it is assumed that a certain number of specific conditions are satisfied in addition to the number of specific conditions already satisfied (for example, points acquired in the game). In this way, when the accessory continuous operation device is operated before the theoretical time is reached, a certain number of specific conditions are considered to be satisfied, so that the expected number of satisfied specific conditions is small. If the case is compensated. As a result, when the time that can satisfy the specific condition becomes shorter than the theoretical time (when the specific time is shortened), the disadvantage to the player is reduced, and the interest in the game is suppressed. .

  In the following, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

[Set value suggestion production process]
In the present embodiment, a part of the procedure of the set value suggestion effect processing is different from that of the sixth embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 89 and FIG. 90 (A) are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion effect process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 89, in the set value suggestion effect process of the present embodiment, when the set value suggestion effect end flag is set to ON, the game effect is in the middle of execution (the value of the game effect time counter is not 0). Even in the case), the point that the game effect is ended is common to the sixth embodiment described above (steps S4116 to S4118).

<Step S4201>
In the set value suggestion effect process of the present embodiment, when the game effect is ended (step S4118), the compensation point addition process is executed (step S4201), and then the set value suggestion effect process is ended. In this compensation point addition processing, compensation points are added to the points acquired by the player until the game effect is forcibly terminated, and segments A to 7 of the 7-segment display section 39 are added based on the points to which the compensation points have been added. The G control is executed.

  Here, FIG. 90B is a diagram showing an example of a compensation point determination table used by the voice lamp control device 5, and the MPU 51 determines a compensation point based on this compensation point determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (B), in the compensation point determination table, the compensation points are defined by the compensation point lottery counter for each game type, and the MPU 51 compensates according to the game type and the value of the compensation point lottery counter. Select points. The compensation point lottery counter is a loop counter having a counter value of 0 to 149, which is incremented by 1 in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 81, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches 149. In the coin acquisition game (game A), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, 8 points and 10 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the maximum compensation point is 10 points, which is a total of 10 points. It is the highest in the game, and the higher the compensation point, the harder it is to select. In the coin-winning game (Game A), the expected value of compensation points is 6.9 points, which is the highest among all games. In the mission achievement game (Game B), the compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the maximum compensation point is relatively 8 points. The higher the compensation point is, the easier it is to select. Further, in the mission achievement game (game B), the expected value of the compensation points is 4.9 points, which is the second highest value in all the games. In the battle game (Game C), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the maximum compensation point is relatively high at 8 points. , High compensation points are relatively easy to select. Further, in the battle game (game C), the expected value of the compensation points is 3.8 points, and this expected value is an intermediate value in all the games. In the quiz game (Game D), compensation points are selected from 1 point, 2 points, 3 points, 5 points and 8 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the maximum compensation point is relatively high at 8 points. , The higher the compensation point, the harder it is to select. Further, in the quiz game (game D), the expected value of the compensation points is 2.6 points, which is the second lowest among all games. In the prediction game (Game E), compensation points are selected from 0 points, 1 points, 2 points, 3 points, and 5 points according to the value of the compensation point lottery counter, and the maximum compensation points are 5 points, which is the whole game. The lowest and highest compensation points are less likely to be selected. In the expected game (Game E), the expected value of compensation points is 1.4 points, which is the lowest among all games.

  In this way, when the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole clune device 60 in a shorter time than the design time (theoretical time) (when the specific period is shortened), compensation points are given, and the points in the game are given. The disadvantage that the player receives can be compensated by shortening the time that can be acquired by the player.

  Further, in the compensation point determination table, contrary to the initial points, the higher the difficulty level of obtaining points, the higher the points of compensation points are likely to be selected and the higher the expected value of the compensation points is, the higher the difficulty of obtaining points is. The lower the degree, the harder it is to select high points as compensation points, and the lower the expected value of the compensation points, the higher the degree of difficulty in obtaining points and the higher the compensation points or the expected values are in correlation. As described above, a game that is more disadvantageous to the player is more likely to obtain greater compensation, while a game that is more advantageous to the player is less likely to obtain greater compensation. While it is more advantageous to drop the game ball 99 from the one-hole clune device 60 in a shorter time than the above), the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole clune device 60 in a shorter time than the design time for a more advantageous game. It is possible to add a game property which is more disadvantageous. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game not only by the game type but also by paying attention to the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one hole clune device 60 according to the game type, so that the interest of the game is improved. To be done. Further, when the game ball 99 is dropped from the one-hole clune device 60 in a shorter time than the design time, the progress of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the acquired compensation points. In particular, when a game that is disadvantageous to the player is selected because the expected value of initial points is low and the difficulty of obtaining points is high, the one hole clune device 60 can be obtained in a shorter time than the design time in order to obtain many compensation points. You can enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball 99 in the one hole clune device 60 while hoping that the game ball 99 will fall from the one hole clown device 60. Also, you can play from the one hole clune device 60 in a shorter time than the design time. When the ball 99 falls, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game while paying attention to the compensation points while expecting to obtain larger compensation points.

  In the present embodiment, the high degree of difficulty in obtaining points and the high level of compensation points or expected values have a correlation, but the high degree of difficulty in obtaining points and the high levels of compensation points or expected values have a contradictory relationship. You may. That is, the higher the difficulty level of obtaining points, the more difficult it is to select high points by compensating points, and the lower the expected value of compensation points. In addition to being easy, the expected value of the compensation point may be increased. By defining the relationship between the high difficulty level of point acquisition and the compensation points and expected values in this way, it is possible to give compensation points in proportion to the difficulty level of point acquisition in each game. The superiority or inferiority of the expected value of points is maintained. As a result, when a game that is advantageous to the player is selected, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage to the player when the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole clune device 60 in a shorter time than the design time. Become.

  It is also possible to give the compensation points according to the remaining time of the game effect (time until the game ball falls from the one-hole clune device 60). For example, as the remaining time of the game production is longer (the time until the game ball 99 is dropped from the one-hole clune device 60 is shorter), more points are given (the expected value of the compensation points is increased). Be done. In this case, the shorter the time during which points can be acquired in the game, the more compensation points (expected values), and accordingly, the compensation corresponding to the disadvantage to the player is compensated. Of course, even when the compensation points to be given according to the remaining time of the game effect (the time until the game ball falls from the one hole clune device 60) are given, the game type (for example, the point acquisition difficulty level) as described above. It is also possible to give compensation points according to the above.

  Also, it is not necessary to set compensation points for each game type, and the same points may be selected with the same probability in all games. In this case, the expected value of compensation points in each game is uniform. As a result, the unfairness between the games is eliminated.

  Further, the selection rate of each compensation point may be made uniform, and of course, it is not always necessary to provide compensation points.

<Step S4202>
Returning to the description of FIG. 89, in step S4202, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment production start flag to ON. The 7-segment effect start flag is a flag for starting the 7-segment effect as described above, and is referred to in step S4119 of the set value suggestion effect process of FIG. 88. That is, in the present embodiment, if the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole clune device 60 is short and the game effect is forcibly ended, even if the accessory continuous operation device is activated, a 7-segment effect is produced. Is executed as a compensation effect described later. As a result, even if the game effect is forcibly terminated, the 7-segment effect is executed as the compensation effect based on the points obtained by adding the compensation points to the points acquired until the game effect is forcibly terminated, and the game is played. It is possible to give information to a person who estimates a non-set value.

<Steps S4203 and S4204>
In step S4203, the MPU 51 sets the compensation effect time counter, and further sets the compensation effect flag to ON (step S4204). The compensation effect time counter is a counter indicating the remaining time of the 7-segment effect executed as the compensation effect. The compensation effect flag is a flag indicating that the compensation effect is being executed, and in step S4205 in order to determine whether to set the 7-segment control flag to ON, FIG. In step S4206, the MPU 51 refers to it.

<Step S4205>
In step S4205, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the compensation effect flag set to be on in step S4204 is set to be on. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the compensation effect is started as the 7-segment effect, and when it is not the compensation effect (step S4205: Yes), sets the 7-segment controlling flag to ON (step S4126). When the set value suggestion effect end flag is turned on, that is, the 7-segment effect that is ended by the game ball 99 passing through the second combination continuous operation gate G2 is executed. On the other hand, when it is not the compensation effect (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 maintains the compensation effect flag on without setting the 7-segment control flag on, and uses the compensation effect time counter set in step S4203. Compensation production is executed in which the prescribed 7-segment production is ended when a prescribed time elapses (the value of the compensation production time counter is 0).

<Step S4206>
When the 7-segment control flag set in step S4126 is off (step S4128: No), the MPU 51 executes the compensation effect set to on in step S4204 as shown in FIG. 90 (A). It is determined whether or not the compensation effect flag indicating that there is is on (step S4206). When the compensation effect flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4207, and when the compensation effect flag is off (step S4206: No), ends the installation value suggestion effect process. ..

<Steps S4207 and S4208>
When the compensation effect flag is on (step S4206: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the compensation effect time counter (step S4207), and determines whether or not the value of the compensated effect time counter after subtraction is 0. It is determined (step S4208). When the value of the compensation effect time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4210, and when the value of the compensation effect time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4208: No). ), And the procedural steps proceed to step S4209.

<Steps S4209 to S4211>
When the value of the compensation effect time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4208: No), the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled similarly to step S4130 (step S4209), and the set value suggestion effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the compensation effect time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4208: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 as in step S4131 (step S4210). The compensation effect flag is set to off (step S4211), and the set value suggestion effect process is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, if the time until the game ball 99 falls from the one-hole clune device 60 is short and the game effect is forcibly ended (when the specific period is shortened), the character series continues. Even after the actuation of the actuating device, the 7 segment effect is executed as the compensation effect. As a result, even if the game effect is forcibly terminated, the 7-segment effect is executed as the compensation effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the player receives when the game effect is forcibly terminated and the 7-segment effect is not executed, that is, the disadvantage that the information for estimating the non-set value cannot be obtained. Further, in the compensation effect, the 7-segment effect is executed as the compensation effect based on not only the points earned until the game effect is forcibly terminated, but also the points to which the compensation points are added. Therefore, the disadvantage can be compensated for as a compensation point for a player who is disadvantaged in that a part of the opportunity to obtain points in the game is lost due to the forced termination of the game effect.

  It should be noted that in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, the same design changes as those in the first to sixth embodiments described above can be made, and the technical matters of the first to sixth embodiments described above are possible. It is also possible to combine.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, as described in the above-described seventh embodiment, the stay time of the game ball 99 in the one-hole clune device 60 is not always constant, and the execution time of the game effect is designed. When the time becomes shorter than the theoretical time, the game production is forcibly terminated, the expected value of points that can be acquired in the game production becomes lower than the theoretical value, and the amount of information for identifying or estimating a non-set value is also expected. The player may be disadvantaged with less than the value, and this may cause a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game ball moving on the second movement path is delayed in that the accessory continuous operation device is operated by the rotating body. For example, the rotating body is a game ball in a predetermined area (for example, a second winning combination gate) from a predetermined posture (first posture) in a standby state to start the operation of the accessory continuous operation device when the condition device is operated. Is rotationally driven so that the time until it is changed to the specific posture (third posture) for moving is constant. In this way, by delaying the operation of the accessory continuous operating device by driving the rotating body, the delay time of the operation of the accessory continuous operating device by the accessory continuous operating device is made uniform. As a result, when a time that can satisfy a specific condition becomes shorter than the theoretical time, a disadvantage to the player is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above.

  In this embodiment, the configuration for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Here, FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 92 (A) is a view showing a main part of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 92 (B). Is a perspective view of the rotating body 70 provided on the game board 31, and FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the function of the rotating body 70.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92 (A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as means for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, instead of the clune device 60 of the sixth embodiment described above. A rotating body 70 is provided. Further, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the sixth embodiment in the peripheral configuration of the rotating body 70 due to the adoption of the rotating body 70.

  The rotating body 70 restricts or delays the fall of the game ball 99 hit on the second movement route R2 on the game board 31, and the game ball 99 is arranged in the lower right portion of the rotating body 70 to form a second winning combination operation gate. It is to move to G2. The rotating body 70 can be rotated clockwise in a front view of the game board 31 by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), the rotating body 70 is a substantially columnar shape having a constant thickness approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball 99, and has a housing portion 701 and a peripheral surface 702. The accommodating portion 701 is recessed toward the central portion in the radial direction and is open to the front-rear direction D1 and the outer side in the radial direction. That is, the accommodating portion 701 has an open cross-section structure (a structure in which a part of the periphery is not enclosed (open structure)). The accommodating portion 701 is capable of accommodating one game ball 99 that is launched into the second movement route R2, and the rotating body 70 is rotated while the game ball 99 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 701, whereby the accommodating portion. The game ball 99 stored in 701 is discharged toward the second winning combination operation gate G2 while the one game ball 99 rolls (see FIGS. 93 (B) and 93 (C)). That is, the discharging portion of the game ball 99 in the delay means is not limited to the closed cross-section structure like the discharging portion 602 of the clune device 60 of the sixth embodiment described above with respect to the discharging direction (moving direction) of the game ball 99. The open section structure may be used like the accommodating portion 701 of the rotating body 70. That is, at least a part of the discharging portion of the delay means is provided if the gaming balls 99 can be discharged while rolling one by one toward the second winning combination operation gate G2, which is a predetermined area (ball-in area). It may have an open configuration, and may be configured as a groove or a cutout, for example. Of course, the accommodating portion 701 of the rotating body 70 of the present embodiment may have a closed cross-section structure in the discharging direction (moving direction) of the game ball 99.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92 (A), a separating nail 481 and a guiding nail 482 are provided above the rotating body 70 to guide the game ball 99, which is hit in the second movement route R2, to the rotating body 70. There is. The separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482 are basically the same as the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482 of the above-described sixth embodiment, but the lowermost ends of the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482 are the same as the rotating body 70. A holding portion 485 for holding the game ball 99 in contact with the peripheral surface 702 is configured (see FIG. 93 (A)). The game ball 99 is held in contact with the peripheral surface 702 of the rotating body 70 by the holding portion 485, so that the gaming ball 99 is relatively rolled on the peripheral surface 702, and the accommodating portion 701 of the rotating body 70 faces upward. When it is in the open position, it is stored in the storage portion 701 (see FIG. 93 (B)). The holding portion 485 may be formed of a member made of resin or the like. In this case, the holding portion 485 is formed as, for example, a gate penetrating vertically.

  The second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided in the vicinity of the holding portion 485, and the second route detection sensor Rs2 has the game ball 99 on the second movement route R2 as in the sixth embodiment. It detects that it has been launched. The second route detection sensor Rs2 can further detect that the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485. In addition to the second route detection sensor Rs2, a sensor for detecting that the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485 may be provided. In this case, the second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided above (upstream) the sensor that detects that the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485. As a result, the game ball 99 that is launched into the second movement route R2 can be detected earlier than when the second route detection sensor Rs2 is provided near the holding portion 485. When the holding unit 485 is configured as a gate, the holding unit 485 may include the second route detection sensor Rs2 as in the case of the first combination communication gate sensor Gs1 and the second combination communication gate sensor Gs2.

  In addition, the separation nail 481 is provided with a drop portion 486 having a spacing larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. The drop portion 486 serves to drop the game ball 99, which is hit in the second movement route R2 in the state where the game ball 99 is held by the holding portion 485, from the left side of the second combination operation gate G2 downward. (See FIG. 93A). In this way, the separation nail 481 is provided with the drop portion 486, and the game ball 99 that is launched in the second movement route R2 in the state where the game ball 99 is held by the holding portion 485 is moved to the left of the second combination operation gate G2. By dropping downward from one side, when a large number of game balls 99 are hit in a state where the game balls 99 are held in the holding portion 485, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a ball jam in the second movement route R2.

  As described above, the second winning combination operation gate G2 is arranged on the lower right side of the rotating body 70, and the guiding nail 487 is provided above the second winning combination operation gate G2. The guiding nail 487 guides the game ball 99 to the second combination operation gate G2 when the game ball 99 held by the holding portion 485 of the rotating body 70 is discharged from the rotating body 70 (FIG. 93 (C. )reference).

  The rotator 70 can rotate clockwise in the front view as described above, but the rotating state and the stopped state are controlled by the MPU 51. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the rotating body 70 is stopped in the first posture in which the accommodating portion 701 is opened downward when the condition device is not operated, and the stop position is It is fixed. When the condition device is activated, the MPU 51 detects the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 (holding unit). When it is detected that the game ball 99 is held in 485), the rotating body 70 starts rotating in the clockwise direction, and the rotating body 70 rotates when the rotating body 70 is in the first posture again. To stop. That is, the rotating body 70 starts rotating from the fixed position, and when it reaches the fixed position again by making one rotation, the rotation is stopped at the fixed position. Then, when the rotating body 70 is rotated once from the first posture, it passes through the second posture shown in FIG. 93 (B) and the third posture shown in FIG. 93 (C) during that time. The second posture shown in FIG. 93 (B) is a posture in which the housing portion 701 of the rotating body 70 is opened upward. In this second posture, the game ball 99 held by the holding portion 485 is held by its own weight in the housing portion 701. It falls and is accommodated. The third posture shown in FIG. 93 (C) is a posture in which the storage portion 701 of the rotating body 70 is opened to the right, and in this third posture, the game balls 99 stored in the storage portion 701 are discharged.

  Here, when the rotating body 70 is rotated, the rotation speed of the rotating body 70 is constant or substantially constant at least from the first posture shown in FIG. 93 (A) to the third posture shown in FIG. 93 (C). It is said that. As described above, the posture of the rotating body 70 in the standby state is the first posture, and the rotation speed of the rotating body 70 is constant or substantially constant between at least the first posture and the third line of sight, and the accessory continuous operation is performed. The time during which the operation of the device is delayed is constant or substantially constant. As a result, it is possible to prevent the point-obtainable time from being shortened by preventing the game effect from being forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device before the game effect is ended. As a result, irritation and discomfort caused by forcibly ending the game effect or the 7-segment effect (setting value suggestion effect) is prevented, and the player receives it because the time when points can be acquired is shortened. Since the disadvantages can be eliminated, a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

  Further, the rotation speed when the rotating body 70 is rotationally driven is, for example, the time until the rotating body 70 is changed from the first posture to the third posture, and the one-hole clune device 60 in the sixth embodiment described above. The rotation speed is set to a time that is approximately the same as the design time (theoretical time) of the stay time of the game ball 99 in. Specifically, the time until the rotating body 70 is changed from the first posture to the third posture is set, for example, in the range of 1 minute to 20 minutes, and preferably in the range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes. And is typically set to about 10 minutes. By setting the time until the rotating body 70 is changed from the first posture to the third posture in such a range, the game is performed while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by the rotating body 70. It is possible to reliably execute the set value suggestion effect including the effect and the 7-segment effect.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 70 rotatable in the clockwise direction in the front view has been described, but the rotating body 70 may be rotatable in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, or the clockwise body in the downward view. It may be rotatable in a clockwise direction or a counterclockwise direction, for example, a roulette wheel. That is, the rotating body 70 is not particularly limited with respect to the rotation direction and shape as long as it can delay the operation of the accessory continuous operation device.

  Further, if the rotation driving method of the rotating body 70 is a driving method in which the operation delay time of the accessory continuous operation device is constant or substantially constant, the rotation is always started from the first posture and is constant or constant. The method of making one rotation at a substantially constant rotation speed is not necessary. For example, the rotation may be started from the first posture, the rotating body 70 may be stopped for a certain period of time at one place or a plurality of places such as the second posture and the third posture, and the rotating body 70 may be rotated again. When the rotating body 70 is stopped in the second posture, the game ball 99 held by the holding portion 485 can be reliably stored in the storage portion 701 of the rotating body 70. When the rotating body 70 is stopped in the third posture, the game ball 99 stored in the storage portion 701 of the rotating body 70 can be surely guided to the second winning combination operation gate G2 and passed therethrough.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the condition device is operated, the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 ( When it is detected that the game ball 99 is held in the holding portion 485), the rotating body 70 has started to rotate in the clockwise direction, but the rotating body 70 may be constantly rotated. . In this case, the rotating body 70 is preferably rotated at a constant or substantially constant speed, but in addition to the inconstant speed rotation, it may be driven to perform irregular rotation by repeating rotation and stop. By thus always rotating the rotating body 70, the time when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed is the timing at which the game ball 99 is launched on the second movement route R2 (the posture of the rotating body 70 (accommodation Position 701)). Therefore, by constantly rotating the rotating body 70, a game property in which the player can select the time for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the launch timing of the game ball 99 is added, and the interest of the game is improved. To be done.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
In the sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment, in addition to the set value suggestion process (see FIG. 81) of the sub timer interrupt process in the sixth embodiment described above, The operation control process is executed (see step S4301 in FIG. 94). Further, in the sub timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, the content of the command determination processing is different from that of the sub timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 82) in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 95).

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the second route detection command is received, unlike the command determination process of the sixth embodiment, the process required for operating the rotating body 70 is executed. Executed. Here, FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of the present embodiment.

<Steps S4401 and S4402>
As illustrated in FIG. 95, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 receives the second route detection command in the command determination processing according to the sixth embodiment described above. Similarly to the case where it is determined that the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S3904). Further, the MPU 51 sets the rotating body operation start flag to ON (step S4401), sets the rotating body operation time counter (step S4402), and ends the command determination process.

  Here, the rotary body operation start flag is a flag for starting the rotation of the rotary body 70, and it is determined whether or not the rotation of the rotary body 70 is started in step S4501 of the rotary body operation control process of FIG. 96 described later. For reference by the MPU 51.

  The rotating body operating time counter is a counter indicating the remaining operating time (rotating time) of the rotating body 70, and the rotation of the rotating body 70 is stopped when the value of the rotating body operating time counter becomes zero. That is, when the condition device is operated, the MPU 51 detects the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2 prior to the first route detection sensor Rs1 (the holding unit 485 holds the game ball 99). If it is detected), the rotation body rotation start flag is set to ON to start the rotation of the rotation body 70, and the rotation body operation time counter that defines the rotation time of the rotation body 70 is set.

  It should be noted that the value of the rotating body operation time counter is such that when the rotating body 70 starts rotating from the first posture (see FIG. 93 (A)) and is rotated at a constant speed, the rotating body 70 again has the first posture ( 93 (A)) is set to a value corresponding to the time. The operation of the rotating body 70 may be controlled by using a sensor that can detect the posture of the rotating body. For example, when the rotating body 70 is in the first to third postures, a detection sensor such as an optical sensor is provided in each of the portions where the housing portion 701 is located, and while confirming the position of the housing portion 701 by these sensors, the rotating body The operation of 70 may be controlled.

[Rotating body operation control processing]
In the rotating body operation control process of the present embodiment, a process of starting the rotation of the rotating body 70 and stopping the rotation of the rotating rotating body 70 is executed. Here, FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the rotor operation control process of the present embodiment.

<Step S4501>
In the rotating body operation control process of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the rotating body operation start flag for starting the rotation of the rotating body 70 is set to ON (step S4501). ). When the rotating body operation start flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4502, and when the rotating body operation start flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No) , The process proceeds to step S4505.

<Steps S4502 to S4504>
When the rotating body operation start flag is set to ON (step S4501: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the rotating body 70 in the first posture (FIG. 93 (A)) so that the rotating body 70 rotates at a constant speed. (See step S4502), and sets the rotating body operation flag indicating that the rotating body 70 is rotating to ON (step S4503). Then, the MPU 51 sets the rotating body operation start flag to OFF (step S4504), and ends the rotating body operation control process.

<Step S4505>
When the rotating body operation start flag is set to OFF (step S4501: No), the MPU 51 sets the rotating body operation flag indicating that the rotating body 70 set to ON in step S4503 is rotating to ON. It is determined whether or not the rotating body 70 is rotating (step S4505). When the rotating body operation flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4506, and when the rotating body operation flag is set to OFF (step S4505: No), The rotating body operation control process is ended.

<Steps S4506 and S4507>
When the rotating body operation flag is set to ON (step S4505: Yes), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the rotating body operation time counter indicating the remaining rotation time of the rotating body 70 (step S4506). It is determined whether or not the value of the rotating body operation time counter is 0 (step S4507). When the value of the rotating body operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4508, and when the value of the rotating body operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4507). : No), the rotation body operation control process is ended.

<Step S4508 and Step S4509>
When the value of the rotating body operating time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4507: Yes), the MPU 51 stops the rotation of the rotating body 70 (step S4508) and sets the rotating body operating flag to off (step S4508). In S4509), the rotating body operation control process is ended. As described above, when the rotation of the rotating body 70 is stopped when the value of the rotating body operating time counter becomes 0, the rotating body 70 stops rotating, and the rotating body 70 makes one rotation (FIG. 93 (A). ) See) is restored.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the first route detection sensor Rs1 when the condition device is operated (the game is executed by the holding unit 485). When it is detected that the sphere 99 is held), the rotating body 70 starts rotating from the same first posture in each rotation, and rotates at the same constant speed in each rotation. Therefore, when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by using the rotating body 70, the time during which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device in the rotating body 70 is delayed is equalized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the point-obtainable time from being shortened by preventing the game effect from being forcibly ended by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device before the game effect is ended. As a result, irritation and discomfort caused by forcibly ending the game effect or the 7-segment effect (setting value suggestion effect) is prevented, and the player receives it because the time when points can be acquired is shortened. Since the disadvantages can be eliminated, a decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

  The delay means for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is not limited to the one-hole clincher device 60 of the sixth embodiment and the rotating body 70 of the present embodiment, and may be other means. Good. The delay means may be any means as long as it delays or stops the downward fall of the game ball 99 to delay the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. For example, the means for lengthening the movement path and the movement speed are reduced. Means, means for opening and closing the upper opening of the second combination gate, and the like may be used. As such delay means, for example, means for defining the movement path of the game ball 99 by a member made of resin or the like that is assembled to the game board 31, means for adjusting the layout of the nails placed on the game board 31, and the like can be considered. . Further, the delay means may be a means for executing upward movement of the game ball 99 reaching a predetermined position once or plural times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, it is possible to make design changes similar to the design change items in the first to seventh embodiments described above, and the technical matters of the first to seventh embodiments described above. It is also possible to combine.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, depending on the firing intensity of the game ball 99, whichever of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 the time from the launch of the game ball 99 to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device is different. The case has been described where the player can select whether to move the game ball 99.

  However, when the player selects which of the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 to move the game ball 99 according to the firing intensity of the game ball 99, an error in the adjustment of the firing intensity and the launch of the game ball 99 There is a concern that the game ball 99 may be hit on a moving path against the player's will due to a defect or the like. In this way, when the game ball 99 is launched on a movement path that is against the player's will, it is assumed that the player's impression on the game machine is deteriorated due to feelings such as irritation and discomfort.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the movement path along which the game ball can move is switched by the distribution member that is activated by the operation of the condition device. In this way, the movement path through which the game ball can move is switched by the distribution member, so that the player shoots the game ball while confirming the operation of the distribution member, and thereby the first movement path and the second movement path. It is possible to select which of the movement paths the game ball is moved to. Since this eliminates the need to adjust the firing intensity, the possibility of selecting a movement path that is contrary to the player's will is reduced, and the deterioration of the impression on the gaming machine is suppressed.

  In the following, the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. Note that FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration for allowing the player to select whether to pass the game ball 99 to the first combination operation gate G1 or to pass the game ball 99 to the second combination operation gate G2 is the above-described sixth part. The embodiment of FIG. In addition, in the present embodiment, the lamp display unit 35 (see FIG. 64) in the fifth embodiment described above is applied instead of the 7-segment display unit 39 as a device that explicitly or suggests a non-set value. . Here, FIG. 97 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 98 is a main part of the game board 31 shown in FIG. 97 for explaining the function of the distribution member 80. It is a figure which shows a part.

  As shown in FIG. 97, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the branch portion 48 in the sixth embodiment described above is omitted, and the fourth movement is defined between the decoration portion 310 and the outer rail 312. By the route R4, the game ball 99 that is launched toward the right side area of the game board 31 is guided to the upper right side of the game board 31. Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the distribution member 80 is provided above the separating nail 481, and by switching the posture of the distribution member 80, the first combination continuous operation gate G1 and the second combination continuous operation. It is possible to select which of the gates G2 the game ball 99 passes through.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 (A) and 98 (B), the distribution member 80 has a distribution unit 801 and a rotation shaft 802. This distributing member 80 is rotatable leftward and rightward about the rotary shaft 802 in the front view of the game ball 31 by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back surface side of the game board 31, so that FIG. ) And the second posture shown in FIG. 98B can be switched. The first posture shown in FIG. 98 (A) guides the game ball 99, which is launched in the right side area of the game board 31, to the first movement route R1 which can pass through the first winning combination operation gate G1, and the second winning combination. It is a posture that limits the guidance of the game ball 99 to the second movement route R2 (single hole clune device 60) that can pass through the operation gate G2. On the other hand, the second posture shown in FIG. 98 (B) is a second movement route R2 (one hole clune device 60) that allows the game ball 99 to be launched in the right side area of the game board 31 to pass through the second combination operation gate G2. ) And restricts the guidance of the game ball 99 to the first movement route R1 that can pass through the first combination operation gate G1.

  The distribution member 80 is rotatable between the first posture and the second posture as described above, but the rotating state and the stopped state are controlled by the MPU 51. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the distribution member 80 is stopped in the first posture and the stop position is fixed when the condition device is not operated. Therefore, when the condition device is not operated, the distribution member 80 is in the first posture, and when the game ball 99 is launched in the right side area of the game board 31, the game ball 99 is in the first winning combination. It is guided toward the operating gate G1.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similar to the sixth embodiment described above, the game ball 99 is guided to the first winning combination operation gate G1 by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482. In the embodiment, the guide nail 482 is not formed with the drop portion 483 through which the game ball 99 can pass. As a result, when the distribution member 80 is in the first posture, all the game balls 99 are guided to the first winning combination operation gate G1 by the separating nail 481 and the guiding nail 482, and pass through the first winning combination operation gate G1. On the other hand, the guidance of the game ball 99 to the one-hole clune device 60 is restricted. Therefore, when the game balls 99 are launched in the right side area of the game board 31 in a state where the condition device is not operated, it is restricted that a large number of game balls 99 are guided to the one hole clune device 60, and one hole is used. The clogging of the game balls 99 in the klune device 60 is prevented.

  Then, the MPU 51 switches the posture of the distribution member 80 between the first posture and the second posture at regular time intervals when the condition device is operated. When the condition device is operated, the MPU 51 stops the distribution member 80 in the first posture when the game ball 99 is detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is said to have been done. In this way, when the game ball 99 is detected by either the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, the distribution member 80 is stopped in the first posture. Even when the game ball 99 is launched in the right side area of the game board 31 in the operating state, it is restricted that a large number of game balls 99 are guided to the one-hole clune device 60, and the game in the one-hole clune device 60 is restricted. The ball 99 is prevented from being clogged.

[Processing of voice lamp controller 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 104, focusing on the differences from the sixth embodiment described above.

[Sub-timer interrupt process of voice lamp controller 5]
In the sub timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment, in addition to the setting value suggestion process (see FIG. 81) of the sub timer interrupt process in the sixth embodiment described above, the distribution The member operation control process is executed (see step S4601 in FIG. 99). Further, in the sub timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, the content of the command determination processing is different from that of the sub timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 82) in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIGS. 100 and 101). ..

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the condition device actuation command, the first gate detection command, and the second gate detection command are received, the command determination process in the sixth embodiment described above is Differently, the processing required to operate the rotating body 70 is executed. Here, FIG. 100 and FIG. 101 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of this embodiment.

<Step S4701>
As shown in FIG. 100, when it is determined that the condition device actuation command has been received (step S3901: Yes), it is determined that the MPU 51 has received the condition device actuation command in the command determination processing according to the sixth embodiment. Similar to the case of determination, the game explanation effect start flag for starting the game explanation effect is set to ON (step S3902). Further, the MPU 51 sets the left operation flag to ON (step S4701) and ends the command determination process.

  Here, the left operation flag indicates that the distribution member 80 is moved in the left direction when viewed from the front so as to switch the distribution member 80 from the first position shown in FIG. 98 (A) to the second position shown in FIG. 98 (B). This is a flag for rotating the distribution member 80, and is referred to by the MPU 51 in order to determine whether or not the distribution member 80 is rotated (actuated) to the left in step S4801 of the distribution member operation control process of FIG. To be done. That is, the left operation flag is also a flag that starts switching control of the distribution member 80 in the distribution member operation control process. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the condition device is operated, the distribution member 80 is in the second posture in which the game ball 99 can be guided to the second movement route R2, that is, the one-hole clune device 60 (second winning combination operation). The player can immediately switch to the second posture in which the game ball 99 can be guided to the gate G2).

<Steps S4702 and S4703>
When it is determined that the condition device operation command has not been received (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the first route detection command has been received (step S4702) and receives the first route detection command. If it is determined that the command has been performed (step S4702: YES), the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4703), and the command determination process ends.

  Here, the first route detection command, when the condition device is operating, the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. Is a command set by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. Then, the first route detection flag indicates the distribution member 80 when the game ball is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. FIG. 98 (A) is a flag that is in a stopped state in the first posture shown in FIG. 98A, and shows the distribution member 80 in FIG. It is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 in the stopped state in the first posture.

<Step S4704>
As shown in FIG. 101, when it is determined that the second route detection command has been received (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 receives the second route detection command in the command determination processing according to the sixth embodiment described above. Similarly to the case where it is determined that the setting value suggestion effect start flag is set to ON (step S3904). Further, the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to ON (step S4704), and ends the command determination process.

  Here, the second route detection command, when the condition device is operating, the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. Is a command set by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. The second route detection flag indicates the distribution member 80 when the game ball is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1. FIG. 98 (A) shows the distribution member 80 in steps S4808 and S4822 of the distribution member operation control processing of FIGS. It is referred to by the MPU 51 to determine whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 in the stopped state in the first posture.

[Distribution member operation control processing]
In the distribution member control process of the present embodiment, the distribution member 80 is controlled to a stopped state in the first attitude shown in FIG. 98 (A), and the first attitude shown in FIG. 98 (A) and FIG. The process for controlling the rotation state to switch the second posture shown in FIG. Here, FIG. 102 to FIG. 104 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the distribution member operation control processing of the present embodiment.

<Step S4801>
As shown in FIG. 102, in the distribution member control process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801). Here, the left operation flag is a flag that is set to ON when the operation of the condition device is triggered (see FIG. 100), and the distribution member 80 is rotated to the left when viewed from the front. This is a flag for starting the switching control. That is, the distribution member 80 is switch-controlled by the operation of the condition device. When the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4802, and when the left operation flag is set to OFF (step S4801: NO), the process is performed. The process moves to step S4805 of 103.

<Steps S4802-4804>
When the left operation flag is set to ON (step S4801: YES), the MPU 51 rotates the distribution member 80 leftward in front view (step S4802). Accordingly, the posture of the distribution member 80 is switched from the first posture shown in FIG. 98 (A) to the second posture shown in FIG. 98 (B), and the switching control of the distribution member 80 triggered by the operation of the condition device is performed. Is started. In this way, the switching control of the distribution member 80 is started with the operation of the condition device as a trigger, so that it is possible to recognize that the condition device has been operated when the switching of the distribution member 80 is started. It is possible to recognize that the accessory continuously operating device can be operated. As a result, the condition device is not operated, for example, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being unnecessarily launched toward the combination operation gates G1 and G2 during the execution of the variation game, and the disadvantage to the player is reduced. .. Then, the MPU 51 sets the left moving flag indicating that the sorting member 80 has been moved to the left (that is, the second posture) to ON (step S4803). Further, the MPU 51 sets the left operation time counter (step S4804) and ends the distribution member operation control process.

  Here, the left operation time counter is a counter indicating the remaining time (the remaining time until switching to the first attitude) in which the sorting member 80 maintains the second attitude, and the value of the left operation time counter becomes zero. In this case, the distribution member 80 is rotated to the right to switch the posture of the distribution member 80 from the second posture to the first posture. The value of the left operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to the time during which the player can select the second movement route R2 with a margin, for example. Specifically, the value of the left operation time counter is set, for example, in the range of 1 second to 20 seconds, preferably in the range of 2 seconds to 10 seconds, and more preferably in the range of 2 seconds to 7 seconds. Is set to the value corresponding to the time.

<Step S4805>
If the left operation flag is set to OFF (step S4801: No), the MPU 51 moves the leftward movement indicating that the sorting member 80 has been moved leftward (that is, the second posture), as shown in FIG. 103. It is determined whether the medium flag is set to ON (step S4805). When the left moving flag is set to ON (step S4805: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4805, and when the left moving flag is set to OFF (step S4805: No), the process To step S4819 of FIG. 104.

<Steps S4806 and S4807>
When the left moving flag is set to ON (step S4805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 (FIG. It is determined whether or not (see 100) is set to ON (step S4806). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 by stopping the distribution member 80 by detecting the game ball 99 with the first route detection sensor Rs1. When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4806: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag to OFF (step S4807) and moves the process to step S4816. On the other hand, when the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4806: NO), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4808.

<Steps S4808 and S4809>
When the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4806: No), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag which is set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is determined whether or not (see FIG. 101) is set to ON (step S4808). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 by stopping the distribution member 80 by detecting the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. When the second route detection flag is set to ON (step S4808: YES), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to OFF (step S4809) and moves the process to step S4816. On the other hand, when the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4808: NO), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4810.

<Steps S4810 and S4811>
When the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4808: No), the MPU 51 indicates the remaining time for maintaining the second posture of the sorting member 80 (remaining time until switching to the first posture). The value of the left operation time counter is decremented by 1 (step S4810), and it is determined whether or not the value of the left operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4811). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to switch the distribution member 80 from the second posture to the first posture. When the value of the left operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4811: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4812, and when the value of the left operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4811: No). ), The distribution member control process is ended.

<Steps S4812 to S4815>
When the value of the left operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4811: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the sorting member 80 rightward based on the lapse of the specified time (step S4812). Thereby, the posture of the distribution member 80 is switched from the second posture to the first posture, the guiding of the game ball 99 to the first movement route R1 (first winning combination operation gate G1) is permitted, and the second movement route. The guidance of the game ball 99 to R2 (second winning combination operation gate G2) is restricted (see FIG. 98 (A)). Then, the MPU 51 sets the right-moving flag indicating that the sorting member 80 has been moved to the right (that is, the first posture) to ON (step S4813). Further, the MPU 51 sets the right operation time counter (step S4814), sets the left moving flag to off (step S4815), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

  Here, the right operation time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining time during which the distribution member 80 maintains the first posture (the remaining time until switching to the second posture), and the value of the right operation time counter becomes zero. In this case, the distribution member 80 is rotated leftward to switch the posture of the distribution member 80 from the first posture to the second posture. The value of the right operation time counter is set to a value corresponding to the time when the player can select the first movement route R1 with a margin, for example, and is set to the same level as the value of the left operation time counter. It That is, the value of the right operation time counter is set, for example, in the range of 1 second to 20 seconds, preferably in the range of 2 seconds to 10 seconds, and more preferably in the range of 2 seconds to 7 seconds. Is set to the value corresponding to. Further, by setting the value of the right operation time counter to be approximately the same as the value of the left operation time counter, the distribution member 80 is regularly switched between the first posture and the second posture. This makes it easier for the player to set the launch timing of the game ball 99 that selects the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2.

<Steps S4816 to S4818>
When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4806: Yes), when the first route detection flag is set to OFF (step S4807), or the second route detection flag is set to ON In that case (step S4808: Yes), if the second route detection flag is set to OFF (step S4809), the MPU 51 rotates the sorting member 80 to the right (step S4816). As a result, when either the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 is selected, the posture of the distribution member 80 is switched from the second posture to the first posture. Further, the MPU 51 clears the value of the left operation time counter (step S4817), sets the left moving flag to OFF (step S4818), and ends the distribution member operation control process. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2 after the switching control of the distribution member 80 is started, the MPU 51 shows the distribution member 80 in FIG. 98 (A). The switching control of the distribution member 80 is terminated by setting the first posture to the stopped state.

<Step S4819>
When the left moving flag is set to OFF (step S4805: No), the MPU 51, as shown in FIG. 104, indicates to the right that the sorting member 80 has been moved to the right (the first posture). It is determined whether or not the moving flag is set to ON (step S4819). When the right moving flag is set to ON (step S4819: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4820, and when the right moving flag is set to OFF (step S4818: No), The distribution member operation control process is ended.

<Steps S4820 and S4821>
When the right moving flag is set to ON (step S4819: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 (FIG. It is determined whether or not (see 100) is set to ON (step S4820). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 by stopping the distribution member 80 by detecting the game ball 99 with the first route detection sensor Rs1. When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4820: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first route detection flag to OFF (step S4821) and moves the process to step S4830. On the other hand, when the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4820: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4822.

<Steps S4822 and S4823>
When the first gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4820: No), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag which is set to ON when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is determined whether or not (see FIG. 101) is set to ON (step S4822). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not to end the switching control of the distribution member 80 by stopping the distribution member 80 by detecting the game ball 99 by the second route detection sensor Rs2. When the second route detection flag is set to ON (step S4822: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the second route detection flag to OFF (step S4823) and moves the process to step S4830. On the other hand, when the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4822: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S4824.

<Steps S4824 and S4825>
When the second gate sensor detection flag is set to OFF (step S4822: No), the MPU 51 indicates the remaining time for maintaining the first posture of the sorting member 80 (remaining time until switching to the second posture). The value of the right operation time counter is decremented by 1 (step S4824), and it is determined whether the value of the right operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4825). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to switch the distribution member 80 from the first posture to the second posture. When the value of the right operation time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4825: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4826, and when the value of the right operation time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4825: No). ), The distribution member control process is ended.

<Steps S4826 to S4829>
When the value of the right operation time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S4825: Yes), the MPU 51 rotates the sorting member 80 leftward based on the lapse of the specified time (step S4826). Thereby, the posture of the distribution member 80 is switched from the first posture to the second posture, and the guiding of the game ball 99 to the second movement route R2 (second winning combination operation gate G2) is permitted, and the first movement route. The guidance of the game ball 99 to R1 (first winning combination operation gate G1) is restricted (see FIG. 98 (B)). Then, the MPU 51 sets the left moving flag indicating that the sorting member 80 has been moved to the left (that is, the second posture) to ON (step S4827). Further, the MPU 51 sets the left operation time counter (step S4828), sets the right moving flag to OFF (step S4829), and ends the distribution member operation control process.

<Steps S4830 and S4831>
When the first route detection flag is set to ON (step S4820: Yes), when the first route detection flag is set to OFF (step S4821), or the second route detection flag is set to ON. In that case (step S4822: Yes), if the second route detection flag is set to off (step S4823), the MPU 51 clears the value of the right operation time counter (step S4830) and turns off the right moving flag. Is set (step S4831), and the distribution member operation control process is ended. That is, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2 after the switching control of the distribution member 80 is started, the MPU 51 shows the distribution member 80 in FIG. 98 (A). The switching control of the distribution member 80 is terminated by setting the first posture to the stopped state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by switching control of the distribution member 80 triggered by the operation of the condition device, the game ball 99 can be guided to the first winning combination operation gate G1 on the first movement route R1 that can be guided. The state in which the ball 99 is guided and the state in which the game ball 99 is guided to the second movement route R2 capable of guiding the game ball 99 to the second role continuous operation gate G2 (single hole clune device 60) are switched. As a result, the player determines which of the first winning combination operation gate G1 and the second winning combination operation gate G2 the game ball 99 passes through to operate the accessory continuous operation device by switching control of the distribution member 80. , It is possible to select by launching the game ball 99 while confirming the operation of the distribution member 80. Therefore, since it is not necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball 99 in order to select the combination operation gates G1 and G2 for operating the combination continuous operation device, the combination operation gates G1 and G2 against the intention of the player are used. It is prevented that the accessory continuous operation device is operated. Specifically, when it is desired to immediately start the jackpot game by selecting the first combination continuous operation gate G1, the second combination continuous operation gate G2 is selected against the intention of the player, so that the continuous winning effect operation is performed. Delayed operation of the device is prevented. Contrary to this, when it is desired to obtain information necessary for inferring a set value such as a non-set value by selecting the second combination continuous operation gate G2, the first combination is contrary to the intention of the player. It is prevented that the jackpot game is immediately started by selecting the continuous operation gate G1. As a result, the deterioration of the impression of the gaming machine 10 is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball 99 that is launched toward the right side area of the game board 31 moves on the fourth movement route R4, and the game ball 99 is distributed by the distribution member 80 to the first winning combination operation gate G1 or the first combination operation gate G1. Although it is distributed to the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 which can be guided to the double-role continuous operation gate G2 (single-hole clune device 60), the first-role continuous operation gate G1 or second using the distribution member 80. The distribution of the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 that can be guided to the winning combination operation gate G2 (single hole clune device 60) is not limited to the method described above. For example, the combination operation gate G1, which allows the game ball 99 to pass by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball 99 on the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2 described in the sixth to eighth embodiments. The distribution member 80 can be applied to the configuration in which G2 is selected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a distribution member 80 is provided on the left end side of the branch portion 48 that defines the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2, and is shown by a solid line and a virtual line in FIG. As described above, either the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 may be selectable by switching the distribution member 80. In this way, by selecting one of the second movement paths R2 by switching the distribution member 80, when the game ball 99 is shot toward the right side region of the game board 31, the launch strength It is possible to select either the first movement route R1 or the second movement route R2 without performing adjustment. This makes it unnecessary to adjust the firing intensity, so that it is possible to prevent the player from selecting a movement path that is against the will of the player, and suppress the deterioration of the impression of the gaming machine.

  In this case, the distribution member 80 performs switching control of the distribution member 80 from the time when the condition device is activated until the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2. It is preferable to carry out. By the way, when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is executed, it is assumed that the player misunderstands that the game ball 99 needs to be launched in the right area of the game board 31. Therefore, by setting the period during which the distribution member 80 is switched and controlled from the condition device being actuated until the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 or the second route detection sensor Rs2, The player is prevented from unnecessarily hitting the game ball 99 in the right side area of the game board 31.

  Further, when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is not executed as in the case where the condition device or the accessory continuous operation device is not operating, the distribution member 80 is the game ball 99 on the first movement route R1. It is preferable that the movement is allowed and the game ball 99 is stopped in a posture that limits the movement of the game ball 99 on the second movement route R2. By setting the posture of the distribution member 80 when the switching control of the distribution member 80 is not executed in this way, the game ball 99 is placed in the right side area of the game board 31 in a situation where the accessory continuous operation device cannot be operated. Even if the player hits, the game ball 99 can be prevented from being guided to the clune device 60. As a result, when a large number of game balls 99 are launched into the right side area of the game board 31 in a situation where the accessory continuous operation device cannot be operated, the clogging of the clune device 60 occurs. Is prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, within the applicable range, the same design change items as the design change items in the first to eighth embodiments described above are possible, and the technical matters of the first to eighth embodiments described above. It is also possible to combine.

  Further, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, when the condition device is operating, when the game ball 99 is detected by the first route detection sensor Rs1 before the second route detection sensor Rs2. When the detection of the game ball 99 by the second combination gate sensor Gs2 is disabled, and the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the first combination gate sensor The case where the detection of the game ball 99 of Gs1 is invalidated has been described. That is, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by one movement path (combination operation sensor) is selected, the operation by the other movement path (combination operation sensor) is performed. The case where the operation of the object continuous operation device is limited has been described. On the other hand, when the condition device is used, if one of the movement paths is selected and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the movement path (role combination operation sensor) that operates the accessory continuous operation device is moved to the other. It may be possible to change to a route (combination operation sensor). For example, if the movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path is allowed. Then, it becomes possible to change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous operation device by launching the game ball to the other movement route after one movement route is selected. This allows the player to change the movement route in accordance with his or her intention when the selection of the movement route is erroneous or when the mind is changed after the selection of the movement route. Specifically, when the condition device is actuated, for example, when the game ball 99 is detected by the second route detection sensor Rs2 before the first route detection sensor Rs1, the accessory continuous in the one-hole clune device 60. Although the operation of the actuating device is delayed, the game ball 99 is launched into the first movement route R1 during that time, so that the first game combination is detected before the game ball 99 is detected by the second combination gate sensor Gs2. It becomes possible to detect the game ball 99 by the gate sensor Gs1. Therefore, when the movement route contrary to the player's intention is selected, not only the originally desired movement route can be changed, but also when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed in the one-hole clune device 60, it is immediately a big hit. When it is desired to start the game, for example, when it is obvious that many or desired points cannot be obtained in the game effect, it is possible to immediately start the jackpot game.

  It is preferable that the predetermined condition for changing the winning combination operation gate for operating the accessory continuous operation device from the one previously selected is a condition that can be established by the player. In this way, since the predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by the player, it is possible to change the winning combination operation gate that operates the accessory continuous operation device according to the intention of the player.

  There are various possible methods for changing the winning combination operation gate for operating the accessory continuous operation device from the previously selected one. For example, if one of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 detects the game ball 99 before the other route detection sensor, the same movement route as the other route detection sensor The detection of the game ball 99 by the other accessory operation gate (the other accessory operation sensor) provided in (inhibition of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device based on the other accessory operation sensor) is suspended for a certain period ( For example, it is conceivable to set a flag that suspends the detection invalidation for a certain time. That is, it is conceivable that the change of the combination operation operation gate that operates the accessory continuous operation device is allowed for a fixed time. This allows the change of the moving route when the user desires to change the moving route by selecting a moving route that is against the player's will before a certain period of time, but after the certain period of time, the character object is against the player's will. It is possible to prevent the movement route for operating the continuous actuation device from being changed, and to reflect the intention of the player more appropriately.

  As a method for changing the combination operation operation gate for operating the other accessory continuous operation devices from the one previously selected, for example, one of the route detection sensors of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 may be used. When the game ball 99 is detected before the other route detection sensor, the game ball 99 passes through the other accessory operation gate (the other combination operation sensor) provided on the same movement route as the other route detection sensor. In the case where the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the above is restricted, when the fixed number (one or more) of the game balls 99 is detected by the other route detection sensor, the other accessory operation gate (the other accessory connection). It is also conceivable to release the restriction on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the passage of the game ball 99 by the operation sensor) to make it effective. In this case, after one winning action gate is selected first, a certain number or more of game balls 99 are launched in the other movement path and the other route detection sensor detects a certain number of game balls 99, It is possible to change the winning combination operation gate for activating the accessory continuous operation device from the one previously selected. Further, the condition for releasing the restriction of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the passage of the game ball 99 in the other winning combination operation sensor is that a certain number of the game balls 99 are detected in the other route detection sensor. By setting, it is necessary to launch at least a certain number of game balls to the other movement path, and therefore, against the player's intention, the accessory continuous operation device by passing the game ball 99 at the other combination operation sensor. It is suppressed that the restriction of the operation of is released.

  Further, one or both of the route detection sensors of the first route detection sensor Rs1 and the second route detection sensor Rs2 are omitted, and the combination action operation sensor is not invalidated until the accessory continuous action device is activated. It may be possible to keep it valid.

  Further, when the operation button 20 or the like is operated by the player, it may be possible to cancel the invalidation of the detection of the game ball 99 by the other accessory operation gate (the other combination operation sensor).

  In addition, in the case where the winning combination operation gate for operating the winning combination continuous operation device is changed from the previously selected one, for example, when the operation of the winning part continuous operation device in the second winning combination continuous operation gate G2 is selected first In addition, the movement of the game ball 99 in the first movement route R1 is detected before the accessory continuous operation device is activated, or the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the passage of the game ball at the first combination operation gate G1. When activated, it is conceivable to forcibly end the game effect even during the game effect, that is, forcibly end a specific period for satisfying a specific condition. Forcibly ending such a specific period, for example, after the operation of the accessory continuous operation device at the second combination operation gate G2 is selected first, the game ball 99 is shot on the first movement route R1 to play the game. Can be done by the will of the person. In this way, the player can end the specific period (numerical index acquisition effect such as game effect), so that the specific period can be ended by the player's intention. As a result, the player can determine the timing for operating the accessory continuous operation device even after the start of the specific period, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  In addition, in the sixth to ninth embodiments, the first role continuous operation gate G1 and the second role continuous operation gate G2 are provided in the right side region of the game board 31, but the first role continuous operation gate G1 and the At least one of the two-role continuous operation gate G2 may be provided at a position where the game ball 99 launched in the left side area of the game board 31 can pass. In other words, when it is possible to operate (the big hit) the accessory continuous operation device based on the passage (ball entry) of the game ball 99 in the predetermined area (ball entry area), the predetermined area (ball entry area) May be provided at a position that can be passed when left-handed and a position that can be passed when right-handed. For example, the first winning combination operation gate G1 may be provided in the left area of the game board 31, while the second winning combination operation gate G2 may be provided in the right area of the game board 31. In this case, when the condition device operates, the jackpot game is started in a short time by immediately operating the accessory continuous operation device by left-handing, and the operation of the accessory continuous operating device by right-handing (starting the big hit game ), It is possible to obtain information indicating or suggesting a non-set value. Further, if the winning combination operation gate can be selected by separately distinguishing between the left-handed stroke and the right-handed stroke, the selection of the winning combination operation gate can be facilitated.

  Further, in the above-described sixth to ninth embodiments, the role-combining operation gates G1 and G2 and the role-combining gate sensors Gs1 and Gs2 are individually provided on the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2, respectively. However, one winning combination operating gate and one winning combination gate sensor may be provided, and one winning combination operating gate and one winning combination gate sensor may be shared by both the first movement route R1 and the second movement route R2. .. In other words, when it is possible to operate (the big hit) the accessory continuous operation device based on the passage (ball entry) of the game ball 99 in the predetermined area (ball entry area), the predetermined area (ball entry area) May be provided in only one place.

  Further, in the sixth to ninth embodiments described above, the delay means such as the clune device 60 and the rotating body 70 is provided in the second movement route R2, but the delay means may be provided in the first movement route R1. Good. That is, the first movement route R1 may be a delay route that delays the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and the second movement route R2 may be a route in which the accessory continuous operation device is operated in a short time.

[Outline of the Invention]
The outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be additionally described below. It should be noted that in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, a reference numeral or the like may be added for convenience, but the invention according to the appendix is limited to a specific configuration with the reference numeral. Not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select each configuration and each processing function described below and combine them arbitrarily.

[Appendix A1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is shown. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during the specified period when specific conditions are satisfied. It As a result, the player can specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical value information by displaying all the specific numerical value information. is there. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix A1, which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix A3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix A1, which is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A2 or supplementary note A3, not only the specific information but also the special information that does not show the plural types of numerical information or the special information that shows a part of the plural types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix A4]
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A2 or supplementary note A3, wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information by a part of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A4, the special information is displayed by a part of the plurality of display areas of the display unit on which the specific information is displayed. That is, the display area for the special information is shared with the display area for the specific information. Accordingly, since the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display unit, the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display unit can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4, wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A5, the display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the display means for displaying the specific information and the special information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase of the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A6]
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A6, the specific information and the special information are displayed as an image on the display means. Therefore, there are many options for the image type and display mode to be displayed as the specific information and the special information, and the specific information and the special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in identifying or inferring the specific numerical value information or the predetermined numerical value information based on the specific information and the special information.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, wherein the image display means (341) can display a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly shows the result of the shift determination is variably displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, the specific information and the special information are displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the symbol that suggests or clearly shows the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed by using the image display means. Thereby, the specific image is displayed by using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific information and the special information, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A7, wherein the prescribed period is set to a period that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the shift determination.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A8, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, and the predetermined period during which the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means is the transition determination time. It is set to a period that suggests or clarifies the result. Therefore, it becomes possible to display the specific information together with the result of the shift determination. For example, when a variable display image of a pattern that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to simultaneously display the specific information on the image display means. This makes it possible to improve interest in suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination by displaying the specific information.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through a specific area (373).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9, the specific condition can be established when the specific region passes, and thus the player can easily understand that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to further enjoy whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. The display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to be progressed inorganically, it becomes possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A10]
Further provided with a discharge port (373) for discharging to the back side of the game board (31) on which the game balls are launched,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A9, wherein the specific region is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix A11]
Further, a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out prize balls by entering game balls are provided.
The discharge port (373) is a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). A second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A10, wherein the specific region is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12]
The second ejecting port (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game, the gaming machine described in Appendix A11.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary notes A10 to A12, in the special game, when the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the second discharge port into which the ball can enter, the specific information displayed on the display means is displayed. The display content is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game is apt to be progressed inorganically, it becomes possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix A13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A12, wherein the game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316) can pass through the second outlet (373).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A13, when a specific condition is met when the gaming ball passes through the second outlet through which the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning port can pass in the special game, the display means is displayed. The display content of the displayed specific information is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed to the second discharge port by launching the game ball in the game area and winning the game ball in the variable winning a prize port. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by advancing the game as usual in the special game. As a result, compared to a case where a skill difference may occur due to the game ball entering the second outlet, a game difference may occur, so that it is avoided to play a game in the game machine. To be prevented.

[Appendix A14]
A game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) can pass through, and the third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373),
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A14, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution unit, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution unit whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. The game is added. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the distribution means as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A15]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A3.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, A15. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A16, in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the transition determination is the special game. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, specific numerical value information and thus specific numerical value information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix A17]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The start point of the predetermined period is set between the start point of the special game and the start point of the value-adding game, the gaming machine according to supplementary note A15 or supplementary note A16.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A17, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix A18]
The end of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A15 to A17.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A18, the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the shift determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix A19]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine described in appendix A18.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium whose initial hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, then to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number of times is changed to the second special game state. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of single shots. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix A20]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A18 or supplementary note A19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game. By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the specified period is set to an execution period of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A21, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means during the specified period set as the execution period of the special game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy the identification of the specific numerical value information and the estimation or the identification of the predetermined numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game. The interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22]
The special game includes a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode). Have,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21, wherein the prescribed period is set to the ending.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note A22, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix A23]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information (numerical value) indicating at least the specific numerical value information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A21 or supplementary note A22, wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. You can As a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Appendix A24]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first game state is to transfer to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A21 to A23.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A24, the start of the predetermined period is set to a special game executed in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the result of the shift determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special gaming state. To be done. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is followed by the transition to the first game state after the end of the specific game. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the long-distance play. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first hit as a trigger, the end of the special game executed last is set, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to provide the game playability of effectively presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of per-village, it is possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied per per-village after the elapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed, and therefore, based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information. The convenience in specifying or guessing is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set in the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the lapse of the specific period,
Note A23 or A24, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. Gaming machine described in.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note A25 includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when a special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as per condominium, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. In addition, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display unit after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specified periods within the specified period, it is determined whether the specified conditions are met for each specified period, and if the specified conditions are met during the specified period, the specified period is specified. Information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game and to focus on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve.

[Appendix A26]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The specific period includes a period in which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A25, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and after the value-adding game is ended when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed at the ending executed. Therefore, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the value-adding game, and to focus on the content of the specific information in the ending after the end of the value-adding game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively used to provide the game property for displaying the specific information, and since the progress of the game can be focused on in the whole of the special game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A27]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific region (373), and the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific region (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A21 to A26, characterized in that the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A27, the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By thus performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, whether or not the player has won the display lottery when the game ball passes through the specific area (whether the specific information is displayed or not). It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to (), so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, when the display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level or the variation (the difficulty level or the variation for displaying the specific information) satisfying the specific condition. As a result, it is possible to impart various game characteristics to the display of the specific information, depending on the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, characterized by displaying.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A28, when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display unit based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can infer the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical value information by displaying all the specific numerical value information. it can. Further, it is possible to recognize the predetermined numerical value information by specifying all the specific numerical value information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved. In particular, since the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific condition that is satisfied while expecting that the specific conditions are satisfied in the predetermined period in large numbers. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to appendix A28, wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A29, the display means is the information display means. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the specific information based on the display content of the display means. As a result, the player can easily understand the specific information, and thus it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical value information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display unit has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display the number of pieces of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. A game machine described in A29.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A30, the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display unit has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical value information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to add a gaming property in which it is possible to adjust the difficulty of specifying or inferring the specific numerical information depending on which information of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A30, wherein the individual information in a corresponding relationship among the specific information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A31, since individual information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to specify or infer specific numerical value information based on the corresponding relationship. Will be possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or inferring the specific numerical value information while looking forward to which individual information of the plurality of individual information is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A32]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A30 or supplementary note A31, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A32, the information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase of the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A33]
The information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information, The game machine according to Supplementary Note A30 or Supplementary Note A31.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A33, since it is possible to display the specific image in which the specific numerical information can be specified or inferred on the information display means, there are many options of the mode of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical value information can be specified or estimated in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. As a result, the playability for identifying or estimating the specific numerical value information is improved.

[Appendix A34]
The information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) that suggests or clearly shows the result of the shift determination is variably displayed. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A34, the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern that suggests or clearly shows the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed by using the image display means. Thus, the specific image is displayed by using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A35]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas,
The specific information is a number or an alphabet, A game machine according to any one of A29 to A34.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A35, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and to specify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy the guess.

[Appendix A36]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays on the individual display section (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical value information of the plurality of kinds of numerical value information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A29, wherein the specific information is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A36, the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plural types of numerical information. That is, the individual display unit for displaying the specific information is defined for each specific numerical value information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical value information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix A37]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display sections (351 to 356) in one of two modes: a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. A gaming machine described in Appendix A36.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A37, the individual display unit is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical value information can be easily specified according to the mode of the individual display unit. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A36 or supplementary note A37, wherein the plurality of individual display portions (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36 to A38, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A38 and supplementary note A39, it becomes possible to easily and inexpensively form the information display means.

[Appendix A40]
Display order determining means (51) for determining a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Further equipped with,
The display control means (51) is configured to display the display means (51) based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. 35, 39, 341) is displayed the specific information, the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A40, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, the display order of the specific information is determined by satisfying the predetermined condition, so that the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. As a result, the same specific information can be prevented from being repeatedly displayed, and the display of the specific information can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine described in Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A41, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. By the way, the power of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine, and thus the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. As a result, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days or from monotonizing the display of the specific information.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical value information (setting value) is stored in the numerical value information storage means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A42, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical value information, so that it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A43, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information to be monotonous.

[Appendix A44]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A44, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the special game. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information to be monotonous.

[Appendix A45]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A45, the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the value-adding game is started. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information to be monotonous.

[Appendix A46]
Display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage unit (512) on the second display unit (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby state period) different from the specified period. An operation means (21) operated by a player,
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341) for displaying the second display control means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A46, the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means during a special period different from the specified period. Thus, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display unit by operating the operation unit in the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to confirm the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if he / she forgets the display content, or if the player is replaced, etc., he / she should confirm the display content during the special period. You can As a result, the player can identify or infer the specific numerical value information by checking the display content in the specified period in the special period, and whether or not to play the game in the game machine according to the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether.

[Appendix A47]
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A46, wherein the special period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A47, the special period during which the display content can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. With this, the player can carefully and carefully take time to check the display content at his / her own pace without being restricted by time, and determine whether or not to play the game on the game machine.

[Appendix A48]
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods that are different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. At least one of the display contents of the display information of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341), The gaming machine according to Appendix A46 or Appendix A47.

[Appendix A49]
The display content display control means (51) performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period from the display contents of the plurality of pieces of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A48, characterized in that the display contents selected thereby are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A50]
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A49, wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary notes A48 to A50, at least one of the display contents of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of prescribed periods can be displayed on the second display means. For example, the display content selected by the player from the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented to the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the display content desired by the player can be confirmed by the player's intention. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as the previously confirmed information and the information having a small amount of information. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently confirm the display contents. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, a large number of display contents can be confirmed at one time, so that the presented contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A46 to A50, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A51, wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means that variably displays a design (decorative design) that suggests or clearly shows the result of the shift determination.

  The gaming machines according to supplementary note A51 and supplementary note A52 are provided with a first display means that is displayed during a specified period and a second display means that is displayed during a special period. Specific information is displayed. Therefore, during the prescribed period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being disturbed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means from being disturbed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented by the second display unit such as the variable display image display unit in which the symbols are variably displayed. In general, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, the visibility is improved when the variable display image display means is presented with the display content of the specific information in the specified period. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to make various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented to the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period is variably displayed by an operation similar to the operation for making various settings. It is possible to present it on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A8.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A53, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix A54]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Appendix A53, which is characterized by being displayed on.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A54, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note A54 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix A55]
A display order selecting means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
The display order selection means (51) further comprises a selection display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine described in Appendix A53, which is characterized by being displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A55, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A56]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A55, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A56, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, it is possible to set the display order for each predetermined numerical value information. Thus, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A56, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders in which the probability (selection rate) of selection by the display order selection means (51) is different.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A57, it is possible to make it easy to select a specific display order and make it difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders are selected with the same probability, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. Will also be possible. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the possibility of being a high setting value and the possibility of being a low setting value.

[Appendix A58]
The plurality of display orders are the first display with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including order,
The probability of being selected by the display order selecting means (51) (selection rate) is set to be higher (including 100%) in the first display order than in display orders other than the first display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A58, the first display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is lowest Is easy to select. That is, except for the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information, the specific information having the lowest advantage determination probability and the most disadvantageous specific numerical value information for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most unfavorable to the player is displayed last, and until the last specific information is displayed, the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player and more advantageous to the player than that The possibility of an advantage determination probability remains. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability is the most disadvantageous determination probability for the player, so it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine from being ended early, and to improve the operating rate of the game machine. The decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59]
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical value information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the highest probability among them,
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority order of the first identification information and the second identification information is the lower two.
The probability of being selected by the display order selecting means (51) (selection rate) is set to be higher (including 100%) in the second display order than in the display orders other than the second display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A59, the second display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low is Easy to select. Therefore, similarly to the gaming machine according to supplementary note A58, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability is the most disadvantageous advantageous determination probability for the player, and thus the game on the gaming machine may end early. It is possible to suppress, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Further, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the highest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp not only the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player but also the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the priority of the two pieces of specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability that is unfavorable to the player and the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, so that the advantage is conflicting with the player. Since it is difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities to perform until the end, it is possible to improve interest in the specific information displayed on the display unit.

[Appendix A60]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. A third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a probability lower than the probability,
The third display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix A57.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A60, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the higher probability than the first advantage determination probability becomes the advantage determination probability having the lower probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical value information, is set to be high. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible for the player to have a higher probability of advantage determination than the actual first advantage determination probability immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. You can expect it. Thus, until just before the first advantage determination probability is grasped, it is possible to infer and enjoy the specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high.

[Appendix A61]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. A fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the probability,
The fourth display order is set (including 100%) to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix A57.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A61, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the probability lower than the first advantage determination probability becomes the advantage determination probability having the higher probability than the first advantage determination probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical value information, is set to be high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower than the first advantage determination probability is obtained immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate of the first advantage determination probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantage determination probability and the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower in probability than the first advantage determination probability. As a result, finally, the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the player's advantageous first advantageous judgment probability is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the set value is grasped. The joy of is improved.

[Appendix A62]
Additional notes A1 to A3, further comprising a display restriction means (51) for restricting the display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period. The game machine described in any one.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A62, it is restricted that the specific information is displayed on the display means during a period other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played the game that satisfies the specific condition for displaying the specific information. This can prevent another player from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player to obtain specific information for identifying or estimating the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix A63]
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A62, wherein the period other than the specified period is a period in a standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A63, it is restricted that the specific information is displayed on the display unit during the standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of the player is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by limiting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player, and specifies or estimates the specific numerical value information. It is possible to prevent more reliably from obtaining specific information for.

[Appendix A64]
The display limiting means (51) is configured to limit the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A62 or supplementary note A63.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A64, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display unit during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display history of past specific information is also restricted to be displayed outside the specified period. As a result, since it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player based on the display history and identifies the specific numerical value information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for inferring.

[Appendix A65]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. When the second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) are displayed in the first display order different from the first display order by the display means (35, 39, 341). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A65, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed when the second specific condition is satisfied. The information (numerals) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that holds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of pieces of specific numerical value information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from early grasping that the advantage determination probability is low when the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even when the advantage determination probability is low, the game on the game machine is prevented from being ended early, and the operating rate of the game machine is prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix A66]
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical value information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is the numerical value information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to supplementary note A65, wherein the gaming machine is stored in.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A66, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means, and the second specific condition is stored in the numerical value information storage means. Including that information is stored. That is, the type of the specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical value information. Therefore, the display order is defined based on the predetermined numerical value information, and the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Thus, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix A67]
When one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selection means (51) for
The display order selection means (51) further comprises a selection display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to supplementary note A65 or supplementary note A66, characterized by being displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A67, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A68]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A67, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A68, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, it is possible to set the display order for each predetermined numerical value information. Thus, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix A69]
A second display control means (41) for displaying predetermined information (number) indicating the predetermined numerical value information on the second display means (45),
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A3, wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the prescribed period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A69, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted ( Predetermined information is displayed in 45). That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical information is provided in a position visible to the player during the specified period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and all the specific numerical value information can be displayed to recognize the predetermined numerical value information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is limited, so that the predetermined value is given to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent the information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the game hall can grasp the predetermined information. Thereby, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical value information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during the non-business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical value information, the predetermined numerical value information after the change. Since it is possible to confirm the predetermined information indicating, the operation of changing the predetermined numerical value information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70]
A game board (31) on which game balls are launched is further provided,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A69, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A70, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is on the rear side of the game board. Is displayed on the second display means provided in the. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means can be easily viewed, and the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted from being viewed.

[Appendix A71]
The game board (31) is openably and closably fixed to the frame body (12),
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A71, the second display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board that is fixed to the frame body so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player by closing the game board, while the predetermined information displayed on the second display means by opening the game board. Can be confirmed at the game hall side. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information of the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is limited by a simple work of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72]
The second display control means (41) is
Control is possible between a display state in which the predetermined numerical value information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
When the first operation is performed on the specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the non-display state is controlled to the display state,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A70 or supplementary note A71, wherein when the second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A72, a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed are selected by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. it can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even when the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means. It can be surely prevented from being grasped by.

[Appendix B1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is shown. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area (373).
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B1, since the specific condition can be established when the specific region passes through, the player can easily understand that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to further enjoy whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. The display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to be progressed inorganically, it becomes possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix B1, which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix B3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix B1, which is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B2 or supplementary note B3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
Further provided with a discharge port (373) for discharging to the back side of the game board (31) on which the game balls are launched,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein the specific region is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix B5]
Further, a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out prize balls by entering game balls are provided.
The discharge port (373) is a first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). A second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to Appendix B4, wherein the specific region is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6]
The game machine according to Appendix B5, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes B4 to B6, in the special game, the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the second discharge port into which the ball can enter The display content is controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game is apt to be progressed inorganically, it becomes possible to improve the playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the second discharge port.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B6, wherein the second discharge port (373) can pass a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B7, when a specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second discharge port through which the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning port can pass in the special game, the display means is displayed. The display content of the specific information displayed is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed to the second discharge port by launching the game ball in the game area and winning the game ball in the variable winning a prize port. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill simply by advancing the game as usual in the special game. As a result, compared to a case where a skill difference may occur due to the game ball entering the second outlet, a game difference may occur, so that it is avoided to play a game in the game machine. To be prevented.

[Appendix B8]
A game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) can pass through, and the third discharge port (378) different from the second discharge port (373),
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge opening (373) or the third discharge opening (378),
The gaming machine according to Appendix B7, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B8, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution unit, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution unit whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. The game is added. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the distribution means as to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B8.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B9, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix B10]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Appendix B9, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B10, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note B10 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as a maximum setting value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix C1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period when the specific condition is satisfied, in the specified period from the predetermined start timing to the predetermined end timing, at least the predetermined numerical value information of the plurality of types of numerical value information Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (number) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually estimating or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical value information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in appendix C1, which can be displayed on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix C3]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (a part of the numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of kinds of numerical information during the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, which can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C2 or supplementary note C3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
Appendix C1 to Appendix C3, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4, the transition determination result is a special game in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be transitioned to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, specific numerical value information and thus specific numerical value information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C4, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C5, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes C1 to C5, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C6, the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the shift determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix C6.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C7, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium whose initial hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, then to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number of times is changed to the second special game state. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of single shots. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix C8]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6 or Appendix C7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note C8, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix C9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1 to Appendix C8.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C9, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix C10]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix C9, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C10, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in the display means in the specified display period in the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note C10 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as a maximum setting value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix D1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is shown. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A game machine characterized in that the specified period is set to an execution period of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information when the specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means during the specified period set as the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy the identification of the specific numerical value information and the estimation or the identification of the predetermined numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game. The interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D2]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical value information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in appendix D1, which can be displayed on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) displays the specific information and the special information (a part of the numeral) indicating a part of the plurality of kinds of numerical information during the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, which can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D2 or supplementary note D3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix D4]
The special game includes a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode). Have,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D3, wherein the prescribed period is set to the ending.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note D4, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix D5]
The display control means (51) displays the specific information (numerical value) indicating at least the specific numerical value information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes D1 to D4, wherein the specified period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. You can As a result, the enjoyment of the game is improved in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the display of the specific information after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[Appendix D6]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first game state is to transfer to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine described in Appendix D5.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D6, the start of the predetermined period is set to a special game executed in the special game state, which is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game state. To be done. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is followed by the transition to the first game state after the end of the specific game. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed last, regardless of whether it is the first hit or the long-distance play. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first hit as a trigger, the end of the special game executed last is set, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to provide the game playability of effectively presenting the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of per-village, it is possible to collectively present the number (amount) of information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied per per-village after the elapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed, and therefore, based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information, the specific numerical information, and thus the predetermined numerical information. The convenience in specifying or guessing is improved.

[Appendix D7]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set in the special game started within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the lapse of the specific period,
Appendix D5 or Appendix D6, characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. Gaming machine described in.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note D7 includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when a special game is started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as per condominium, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. In addition, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display unit after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specified periods within the specified period, it is determined whether the specified conditions are met for each specified period, and if the specified conditions are met during the specified period, the specified period is specified. Information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game and to focus on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to improve.

[Appendix D8]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The specific period includes a period in which the value-adding game is executed,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D7, wherein the prescribed period is set to the ending.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D8, it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and after the value-adding game is ended when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed at the ending executed. Therefore, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the value-adding game, and to focus on the content of the specific information in the ending after the end of the value-adding game when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively used to provide the game property for displaying the specific information, and since the progress of the game can be focused on in the whole of the special game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D9]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific region (373), and the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific region (373) is won.
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D8, characterized in that the prescribed period is after winning the display lottery.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D9, the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area. By thus performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, whether or not the player has won the display lottery when the game ball passes through the specific area (whether the specific information is displayed or not). It is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to (), so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, when the display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level or the variation (the difficulty level or the variation for displaying the specific information) satisfying the specific condition. As a result, it is possible to impart various game characteristics to the display of the specific information, depending on the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D1 to D9.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix D11]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Appendix D10, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D11, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a specified display order during the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note D11 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix E1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least the plurality of types of numerical information Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (number) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the display unit displays the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical value information by displaying all the specific information. .. Further, it is possible to recognize the predetermined numerical value information by specifying all the specific numerical value information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved. In particular, since the specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, the number of the specific conditions satisfied is expected while expecting many specific conditions to be satisfied in the predetermined period. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention.

[Appendix E2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix E1, which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix E3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix E1, which is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E2 or supplementary note E3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix E4]
The game according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E3, wherein the display means is information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the display means is the information display means. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the specific information based on the display content of the display means. As a result, the player can easily understand the specific information, and thus it is easy to specify or guess the specific numerical value information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display unit has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
The display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display the number of pieces of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in E4.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E5, the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical value information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to add a gaming property in which it is possible to adjust the difficulty of specifying or inferring the specific numerical information depending on which information of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to appendix E5, wherein the individual information in the corresponding relationship among the specific information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E6, since individual information in a corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, it is possible to specify or infer specific numerical value information based on the corresponding relationship. Will be possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or inferring the specific numerical value information while looking forward to which individual information of the plurality of individual information is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E7, the information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such information display means can be realized by a readily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying the specific information while suppressing the complication of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase of the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, wherein the information display unit (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, since it is possible to display the specific image of the specific numerical information that can be specified or estimated on the information display means, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process for displaying the specific image. Therefore, the specific numerical value information can be specified or estimated in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process of displaying the specific image. As a result, the playability for identifying or estimating the specific numerical value information is improved.

[Appendix E9]
The information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decorative pattern) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the shift determination is variably displayed. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E9, the specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the variable display image of the pattern that suggests or clearly shows the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying the variable display image on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed by using the image display means. Thus, the specific image is displayed by using the display means necessary for the game machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E10]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E5 to E9, wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E10, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so it is easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and to specify the specific numerical information without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy the guess.

[Appendix E11]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays on the individual display section (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical value information of the plurality of kinds of numerical value information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in Appendix E4, wherein the specific information is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E11, the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information of the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, the individual display unit for displaying the specific information is defined for each specific numerical value information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical value information can be easily specified. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix E12]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display sections (351 to 356) in one of two modes: a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine described in appendix E11.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E12, the individual display unit is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical value information can be easily specified according to the mode of the individual display unit. This enhances the convenience of specifying the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix E13]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E11 or supplementary note E12, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E11 to E13, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E13 and supplementary note E14, it becomes possible to form the information display means easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E14, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E15, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, Appendix E15. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E16, the transition determination result is the special game in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be transitioned to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix E17]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note E15 or supplementary note E16, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E17, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix E18]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E15 to E17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E18, the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the shift determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix E19]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine described in appendix E18.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is transitioned to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium whose initial hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, then to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number of times is changed to the second special game state. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of single shots. Become. As a result, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired more as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also more specific information for specifying the specific numerical information, and the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. Can be easily guessed or specified.

[Appendix E20]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The ending point of the predetermined period is set to the ending, the gaming machine according to supplementary note E18 or supplementary note E19.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note E20, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix E21]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix E1 to Appendix E20.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E21, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix E22]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix E21, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E22, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the specified display order during the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note E22 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as a maximum setting value is not presented in that all of the plurality of pieces of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix F1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information of at least the plural types of numerical information. Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numerals) indicating
Display order determining means (51) for determining a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) is configured to display the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Display the specific information at (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, the display order of displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this way, the display order of the specific information is determined by satisfying the predetermined condition, so that the display order of the specific information is prevented from becoming constant. As a result, the same specific information can be prevented from being repeatedly displayed, and the display of the specific information can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1 characterized in that there is.

[Appendix F3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix F1 which is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2 or Supplementary Note F3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F4, the display order of displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. By the way, the power of the game machine is often turned on before the opening of the game hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine, and thus the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. As a result, the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days or from monotonizing the display of the specific information.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, characterized in that the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (setting value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F5, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical value information, so that it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F6, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information to be monotonous.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F7, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the special game. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information to be monotonous.

[Appendix F8]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F8, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by starting the value-adding game. Thereby, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information to be monotonous.

[Appendix F9]
A display order selecting means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
Selection display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
Further equipped with,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F8, characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F9, the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix F10]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to Appendix F9, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, it is possible to set the display order for each predetermined numerical value information. Thus, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix F11]
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of notes F1 to F10.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F11, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first game state is to transfer to the special game, and the supplementary note F11. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, in the first game state in which the probability of the start of the predetermined period being determined to be shifted to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state, the result of the shift determination is the special game. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix F13]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The start point of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, the gaming machine according to Appendix F11 or Appendix F12.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F13, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix F14]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F11 to F13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14, the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the shift determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix F15]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game is transitioned to the first game state after the special game ends. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium whose initial hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, then to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number of times is changed to the second special game state. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of single shots. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix F16]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F14 or Supplementary Note F15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F16, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix F17]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes F1 to F16.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F17, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix F18]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to Appendix F17, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F18, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order during the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Appendix F18 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as a maximum setting value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix G1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is shown. First display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (numerals) on the first display means (35, 39, 341),
Display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage unit (512) on the second display unit (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby state period) different from the specified period. An operation means (21) operated by a player,
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341) for displaying the second display control means (51),
Equipped with
In the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operation means during a special period different from the specified period. Thus, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display unit by operating the operation unit in the special period. Therefore, if the player wants to confirm the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period, for example, if he / she forgets the display content, or if the player is replaced, etc., he / she should confirm the display content during the special period. You can As a result, the player can identify or infer the specific numerical value information by checking the display content in the specified period in the special period, and whether or not to play the game in the game machine according to the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether.

[Appendix G2]
The display control means (51) may cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix G1, which is possible.

[Appendix G3]
The display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1 characterized in that it is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2 or supplementary note G3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. .. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also when the special information is displayed on the first display means. It is possible to infer specific numerical information based on the special information. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix G4]
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G3, wherein the special period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, the special period during which the display content can be confirmed during the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. With this, the player can carefully and carefully take time to check the display content at his / her own pace without being restricted by time, and determine whether or not to play the game on the game machine.

[Appendix G5]
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods that are different from each other,
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. At least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341), The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G4.

[Appendix G6]
The display content display control means (51) performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period from the display contents of the plurality of pieces of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine described in Appendix G5, wherein the display content selected by the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G7]
The display content display control means (51) stores the plurality of display contents stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5, characterized in that two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5 to supplementary note G7, at least one display content of the display content of the plurality of specific information displayed in the plurality of prescribed periods can be presented on the second display means. For example, the display content selected by the player from the display content of the plurality of pieces of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512) can be presented to the second display means. In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented on the second display means from the display content of the plurality of specific information, the display content desired by the player can be confirmed by the player's intention. As a result, it is possible to effectively confirm the display contents while avoiding confirmation of the display contents such as the previously confirmed information and the information having a small amount of information. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently confirm the display contents. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, a large number of display contents can be confirmed at one time, so that the presented contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G7, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G8, wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means for variably displaying a design (decorative design) that suggests or clearly shows the result of the shift determination.

  The gaming machines according to supplementary note G8 and supplementary note G9 are provided with a first display means that is displayed during the specified period and a second display means that is displayed during the special period. Specific information is displayed. Therefore, during the prescribed period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being disturbed. For example, when the second display means is the variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means from being disturbed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented by the second display unit such as the variable display image display unit in which the symbols are variably displayed. In general, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, the visibility is improved when the variable display image display means is presented with the display content of the specific information in the specified period. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to make various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented to the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period is variably displayed by an operation similar to the operation for making various settings. It is possible to present it on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience of displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G9.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G10, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix G11]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to supplementary note G10 characterized by being displayed on.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G11, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined display order on the display means during the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note G11 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix H1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least a plurality of pieces of specific numerical information (non Display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display a plurality of pieces of specific information (numerical values) indicating set values, respectively, in a distinguishable manner;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H1, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix H2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, which is characterized in that

[Appendix H3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in Appendix H1, which is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H2 or supplementary note H3, not only the specific information but also the special information that does not show the plural types of numerical information or the special information that shows a part of the plural types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix H4]
A display order selecting means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
The display order selection means (51) further comprises a selection display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H3 characterized by displaying.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H4, the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix H5]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix H4, wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H5, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, it is possible to set the display order for each predetermined numerical value information. Thus, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H5, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) selected by the display order selection means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, it is possible to make it easy to select a specific display order and make it difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders are selected with the same probability, it is easy to specify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-set value. Will also be possible. As a result, it becomes possible to adjust the possibility of being a high setting value and the possibility of being a low setting value.

[Appendix H7]
The plurality of display orders are the first display with the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including order,
The first display order is set (including 100%) to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the first display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix H6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H7, the first display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority Is easy to select. That is, except for the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information, the specific information having the lowest advantage determination probability and the most disadvantageous specific numerical value information for the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most unfavorable to the player is displayed last, and until the last specific information is displayed, the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player and more advantageous to the player than that The possibility of an advantage determination probability remains. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability is the most disadvantageous determination probability for the player, so it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine from being ended early, and to improve the operating rate of the game machine. The decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8]
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical value information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the highest probability among them,
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the priority order of the first identification information and the second identification information is the lower two.
The second display order is set (including 100%) to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the second display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix H6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8, the second display order in which the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low is Easy to select. Therefore, like the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H6, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the probability is the most advantageous advantage determination probability for the player, and thus the game on the gaming machine may end early. It is possible to suppress, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Further, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the highest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp not only the advantage determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player but also the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the priority of the two pieces of specific information indicating the two pieces of specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability that is unfavorable to the player and the advantage determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, so that the advantage is conflicting with the player. Since it is difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities to perform until the end, it is possible to improve interest in the specific information displayed on the display unit.

[Appendix H9]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. A third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a probability lower than the probability,
The third display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix H6.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H9, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantage determination probability becomes the advantage determination probability having the probability lower than the first advantage determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical value information, is set to be high. By setting such a high selection rate of the third display order, it is possible for the player to have a higher probability of advantage determination than the actual first advantage determination probability immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. You can expect it. Thus, until just before the first advantage determination probability is grasped, it is possible to infer and enjoy the specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high.

[Appendix H10]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is the first advantage determination. A fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the probability,
The fourth display order is set (including 100%) to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in Appendix H6.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10, the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower than the first advantage determination probability becomes the advantage determination probability higher than the first advantage determination probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical value information, is set to be high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set to be high, the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower than the first advantage determination probability is obtained immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate of the first advantage determination probability becomes the specific information indicating the actual first advantage determination probability and the specific numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability lower in probability than the first advantage determination probability. As a result, finally, the predetermined numerical value information corresponding to the player's advantageous first advantageous judgment probability is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the set value is grasped. The joy of is improved.

[Appendix H11]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H10, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H11, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H12, the transition determination result is a special game in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be transitioned to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, specific numerical value information and thus specific numerical value information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix H13]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The start point of the predetermined period is set between the start point of the special game and the start point of the value-adding game, the gaming machine according to supplementary note H11 or supplementary note H12.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H13, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H11 to H13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H14, the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the shift determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix H15]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H14.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium whose initial hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, then to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number of times is changed to the second special game state. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of single shots. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix H16]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note H14 or supplementary note H15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note H16, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix H17]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H15, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H17, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note H17 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix I1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is shown. Display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (number) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
A display limiting unit (51) for limiting the display of the specific information on the display unit (35, 39, 341) in a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I1, the display of the specific information is restricted during the period other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played the game that satisfies the specific condition for displaying the specific information. This can prevent another player from taking advantage of the privilege obtained by the previous player to obtain specific information for identifying or estimating the specific numerical value information.

[Appendix I2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix I1, which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix I3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix I1, which is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I2 or supplementary note I3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix I4]
An information game execution means (41) for executing an information game (fluctuation game) for informing the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I1 to I3, wherein the period other than the specified period is a period in a standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I4, it is limited that the specific information is displayed on the display unit during the standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of the player is generally performed during the standby state. Therefore, by limiting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player, and specifies or estimates the specific numerical value information. It is possible to prevent more reliably from obtaining specific information for.

[Appendix I5]
The display limiting means (51) is configured to limit the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period during a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I4.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I5, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display unit during the specified period is restricted during the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display history of past specific information is also restricted to be displayed outside the specified period. As a result, since it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player based on the display history and identifies the specific numerical value information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for inferring.

[Appendix I6]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1 to I5.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I6, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix I7]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix I6, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I7, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note I7 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix J1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
When a first specific condition or a second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control for displaying on display means (35, 39, 341) a plurality of pieces of specific information (numerical values) indicating a plurality of pieces of specific numerical information (non-setting values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the numerical information Means (51),
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information (numerals) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and When the second specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information (numerals) are displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J1, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed when the second specific condition is satisfied. The information (numerals) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that holds. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of pieces of specific numerical value information from being easily identified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from early grasping that the advantage determination probability is low when the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even when the advantage determination probability is low, the game on the game machine is prevented from being ended early, and the operating rate of the game machine is prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix J2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix J1, which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix J3]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix J1, which is possible.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J2 or supplementary note J3, not only the specific information but also the special information not showing the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information showing a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix J4]
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is that the second predetermined numerical value information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from the plurality of kinds of numerical value information is the numerical value information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J3, wherein the gaming machine is stored in.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J4, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical value information is stored in the numerical value information storage means, and the second specific condition is stored in the numerical value information storage means. Including that information is stored. That is, the type of the specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical value information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical value information, and according to the display order, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical value information. Accordingly, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix J5]
When one of the first specific condition and the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selection means (51) for
The display order selection means (51) further comprises a selection display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in the specified period according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J4 characterized by displaying.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J5, the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the specified period in accordance with one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. Therefore, the display order included in the plurality of display order, and the selection rate, it is easy to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, it is difficult to display a plurality of specific information in a specific display order, a specific It is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. With this, it is possible to display a plurality of pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the contents and selection rates of a plurality of pieces of display order, so that the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information is monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix J6]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J6, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the prescribed period in accordance with the display order selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical value information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical value information, it is possible to set the display order for each predetermined numerical value information. Thus, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical value information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of pieces of specific information for each predetermined numerical value information.

[Appendix J7]
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J6.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J7, the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information is displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period when the start of the special game is set. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the specific numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, it is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transferred when the result of the transition determination in the first game state is to shift to the special game, and the additional note J7 is provided. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J8, the transition determination result is the special game in the first game state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be transitioned to the special game state by the transition determination means is lower than the second game state. It is set to a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first win special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a series of games. Therefore, the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information is estimated or specified for each initial hit. The opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix J9]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value to a player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note J7 or supplementary note J8, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J9, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so at least the specific condition is satisfied after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game focusing on whether or not.

[Appendix J10]
The end of the predetermined period is set to the special game, the gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J7 to J9.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10, the end of the predetermined period is set as the special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, the result of the shift determination is not notified in the special game. Therefore, it is feared that the player's interest in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest for the special game which tends to decrease the interest for the game is improved.

[Appendix J11]
The special game state is
After the special game in the special game state is finished, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) is notified. Ordinary jackpot)
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first game state, and the result of the shift determination is notified. A second special game state (5R certainty variation jackpot gaming state and 16R certainty variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode),
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J10.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J11, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the special game state is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, in the case of a single shot in which the initial hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed. The predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per condominium whose initial hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, then to the second special gaming state. In the special game to be executed, if the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period, the special game state is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. In other words, in the per game that the initial hit is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period is ended in the first special game in which the continuous game ends. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the continuous holiday, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined number of times is changed to the second special game state. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of consecutive villas will meet the specific condition more often than that of single shots. Become. As a result, the player not only increases the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive holidays increases, but also obtains a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical value information, and speculates the specific numerical value information and thus the predetermined numerical value information The benefit is that it is easier to identify.

[Appendix J12]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) for giving a game value to the player, and an ending executed after the value-adding game is finished.
The gaming machine according to supplementary note J10 or supplementary note J11, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

  By the way, between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, neither the game value is added nor the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note J12, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-adding game and the end point of the special game, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the specific numerical value information on the display means. This makes it possible to display the specific information on the display means in a special game in a time-efficient manner.

[Appendix J13]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J12.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J13, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix J14]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to supplementary note J13, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J14, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J14 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix K1]
Based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, a transition determination means (a jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state (a big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed ( 41),
Storage means (41) for storing each numerical value information (game setting value) corresponding to a plurality of different advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability),
A selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information,
A gaming machine comprising:
A numerical value information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical value information (setting value) selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical value information;
In a prescribed period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, when specific conditions are satisfied, at least specific numeric information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numeric information of the plurality of types of numeric information is shown. First display control means (51) for displaying the specific information (numerals) on the first display means (35, 39, 341),
Second display control means (41) for causing the second display means (45) to display predetermined information (number) indicating the predetermined numerical value information,
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is restricted,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K1, specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted ( Predetermined information is displayed in 45). That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of kinds of numerical information is provided in a position visible to the player during the specified period. It is displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and all the specific numerical value information can be displayed to recognize the predetermined numerical value information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical value information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical value information, based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means provided at a position where the visual recognition of the player is limited, so that the predetermined value is given to the player based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent the information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the game hall can grasp the predetermined information. Thereby, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical value information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during the non-business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical value information, the predetermined numerical value information after the change. Since it is possible to confirm the predetermined information indicating, the operation of changing the predetermined numerical value information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2]
The first display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numerical values) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix K1, which is capable of being.

[Appendix K3]
The first display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of numbers) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine described in appendix K1, which is capable of being.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K2 or supplementary note K3, not only the specific information but also the special information that does not show the plural kinds of numerical information or the special information that shows a part of the plural kinds of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. .. Thereby, the player can not only specify the specific numerical value information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. The specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical value information can be guessed based on the special information and can be enjoyed, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix K4]
A game board (31) on which game balls are launched is further provided,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K1 to K3, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K4, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is on the rear side of the game board. Is displayed on the second display means provided in the. Therefore, the specific information displayed on the first display means can be easily viewed, and the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be easily restricted from being viewed.

[Appendix K5]
The game board (31) is openably and closably fixed to the frame body (12),
The gaming machine according to appendix K4, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K5, the second display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board that is fixed to the frame body so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player by closing the game board, while the predetermined information displayed on the second display means by opening the game board. Can be confirmed at the game hall side. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information of the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is limited by a simple work of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6]
The second display control means (41) is
Control is possible between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45),
When the first operation is performed on the specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the non-display state is controlled to the display state,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note K4 or supplementary note K5, wherein when the second operation is performed on the specific operation means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K6, a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed are selected by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. it can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even when the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means. It can be surely prevented from being grasped by.

[Appendix K7]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K11 to K6.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K7, a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during the specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down or recognize predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to determine whether the advantageous judgment probability is high, or reverse. It is possible to set the order such that it is difficult to judge high and low. Thus, the plurality of pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix K8]
The display control means (51) displays all the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order in the predetermined display period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix K7, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K8, when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the specified number, all of the plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in the predetermined display order in the specified period. Thus, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical value information. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a specified number.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note K8 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as a maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of pieces of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different from.

[Appendix L1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first travel route (R1) and a second travel route (R2) in which a game ball can move,
A game ball moving on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) can pass, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the passage of the game ball. A predetermined area (G1, G2) capable of
Further equipped with,
The first moving route (R1) and the second moving route (R2) are different from each other in time from when the game ball is shot until the game ball passes through the predetermined area.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note L1 includes a first moving path and a second moving path, which are different in time from the launch of the game ball to the passage of the game ball through a predetermined area (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). In this way, by providing the first moving path and the second moving path with different times from the launch of the game ball to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the case where the game ball is launched in the first travel path, It is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different from when the game ball is launched in the two movement paths.

[Appendix L2]
The predetermined area (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine according to supplementary note L1 comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L2, when the condition device is operated, the first predetermined region in which the accessory continuous operation device is operated by the passage of the game ball is provided in the first movement path, and the game ball is A second predetermined region in which the accessory continuously operating device is operated by being passed is provided in the second movement path. In this way, a predetermined area for operating the accessory continuous operation device is provided on each of the first moving path and the second moving path, so that the game ball is provided on either the first moving path or the second moving path. The hammer continuously operating device can be operated by being hit.

[Appendix L3]
Further provided is a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) and delaying passage of the game ball shot on the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined region (G2). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L2.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L3, the second moving path is provided with a delay unit that delays the time from the launch of the game ball to the second moving path to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. In this way, the delay means for delaying the time until the accessory continuous operation device is activated is provided in the second movement path, so that the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the game ball launched in the first movement path. It is possible to provide a significant time difference between the time until it is played and the time until the accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by the game ball shot on the second movement path. That is, when the condition device is operated, depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route or when the game ball is shot on the second movement route, the accessory continuous operation after the condition device is activated. There can be a significant difference in the preparation time when the device is activated. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route can be lengthened.

  Then, by shortening the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the first movement route, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device in a short time by firing the game ball on the first movement route. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuously operating device is activated (the special game is started) by firing the game ball on the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. .. Furthermore, if the player chooses a travel route that can shorten the preparation time when the player's playing time is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening / closing execution mode. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, by increasing the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the second movement path, various events are used by using the preparation time from the condition device being operated to the accessory continuous operation device being operated. It becomes possible to execute. In this way, by launching the game ball to the second movement route in which the preparation time becomes long, various events are generated by using the preparation time, so that the preparation time that the player is less interested in and tends to be boring It can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. As a result, the player's interest in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L4]
Compared with the probability that the game ball shot on the first movement route (R1) will pass through the first predetermined region (G1), the game ball shot on the second movement route (R2) will be the second predetermined number. The gaming machine according to appendix L3, wherein the probability of passing through the area (G2) is set higher.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L4, the probability that the game ball shot on the second movement route will pass the second predetermined region, compared to the probability that the game ball shot on the first movement route will pass the first predetermined region. Is set higher. As a result, in the second movement path in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, the accessory continuous operation device can be operated by launching less game balls than in the first movement path. Therefore, in the second movement route, compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the first movement route to activate the accessory continuous operation device, it is disadvantageous in terms of time until the accessory continuous operation device is activated, but it is useless. It is more advantageous than the case where the game ball is launched in the first movement path to operate the accessory continuous operation device in that the generation of balls can be suppressed.

[Appendix L5]
Supplementary note L4, characterized in that a game ball launched on the first movement route (R1) can enter, and the game ball further comprises a winning opening (313) for giving an opportunity to award a prize ball. Gaming machine described in.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L5, a winning opening is provided at a position where a gaming ball shot on the first movement path can enter, which gives an opportunity to award a winning ball by entering the gaming ball. As a result, the generation of waste balls until the game ball launched on the first movement path having a low probability of passing through the first predetermined region passes through the first predetermined region is determined as a prize ball for winning the game ball into the winning opening. Can be guaranteed by. Therefore, the base (which is the payout rate (ball-out rate) in the normal game state (low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode)) is prevented from being lowered, and as a result, the player cannot select the first movement route. Profit is prevented.

[Appendix L6]
The player is able to select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) the game ball is to be moved to. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L6, the player can select which of the first moving path and the second moving path the game ball is moved to. In this way, the player can select which of the first movement path and the second movement path the game ball is to be moved from when the condition device is activated to when the accessory continuous operation device is activated. It becomes possible for the player to select the length of the preparation time of. As a result, the player's intention is reflected in the selection of the time until the accessory continuously operating device is operated, and thus the player can proceed with the game without feeling stress.

[Appendix L7]
It is characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) the game ball is to be moved by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. The gaming machine described in Appendix L6.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L7, the player can select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is to be moved by, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this way, the player can select either the first movement path or the second movement path depending on the shooting intensity of the game ball, so that the condition continuous device is operated until the accessory continuous operation device is operated. It becomes possible to easily select the length of the preparation time of.

[Appendix L8]
The system further includes a privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege when a specific condition is satisfied at a specific time set as a preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L7.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L8, a privilege is awarded when a specific condition is satisfied at a specific time set as a preparation time from when the condition device is operated to when the accessory continuous operation device is operated. In this way, the privilege is granted when the specific condition is satisfied at the specific time set in the preparation time, and the progress of the game is enjoyed by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the preparation time. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix L9]
The gaming machine according to appendix L8, wherein the privilege granting means (51) grants the privilege in accordance with the number of the specific conditions established in the specific period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L9, a privilege corresponding to the number of specific conditions established during the specific period is given. In this way, by giving a privilege according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific period, it is possible to focus not only on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but also on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the privilege according to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the preparation time is given, the contents of the privilege can be diversified, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Appendix L10]
The accessory continuous actuating device is actuated when a game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is actuated,
The predetermined area (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). Including,
Further provided is a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) and delaying the passage of the game ball shot on the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined region (G2). ,
The specific period is started upon detection of a game ball on the second movement route (R2) when the condition device is activated, as described in Supplementary Note L8 or Supplementary Note L9. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L10, a specific period during which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected in the second movement path in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by the delay means. Is started. That is, the specific time period is started when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by the second movement path, and thus the specific time period can be set to be long. As a result, the types of specific conditions can be diversified, so that it is possible to prevent the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device from becoming boring. As a result, the interest of the player in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L11]
When the game ball is detected on the second moving route before the game ball is detected on the first moving route when the condition device is activated, the privilege granting means (51) determines the identification. The gaming machine according to appendix L10, wherein the privilege is granted when the specific condition is satisfied in time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L11, when the game ball is detected on the second movement route before the game ball is detected on the first movement route when the condition device is operated, a specific condition is specified at a specific time. When is satisfied, the privilege is granted. As a result, after the first movement path is selected to activate the accessory continuous operation from the operation of the condition device in a short time, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by the game ball detected in the second movement path. Against the contrary, it is possible to prevent disgust and irritation that it takes time to operate the accessory continuous operation device, and it is possible to comfortably progress the game.

[Appendix L12]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L8 to L11, wherein the privilege is presentation of at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating a payout performance.

[Appendix L13]
A storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability) determined to execute the special game (big hit game) by the determination means (41). ,
From the plurality of pieces of numerical value information stored in the storage means (41), one piece of numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game is selected. Selection means (41) for
Further equipped with,
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantage determination probability according to the one numerical value information selected by the selection means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix L12, wherein the performance information is information capable of identifying or inferring the one numerical value information.

[Appendix L14]
The gaming machine according to appendix L13, wherein the privilege is a presentation of at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information of the plurality of numerical information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L12 to supplementary note L14, at least a part of the information capable of estimating the payout performance, such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability, is provided as a privilege when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Presented. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L15]
The accessory continuous actuating device is actuated when a game ball passes through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is actuated,
The predetermined area (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). Including,
The passage of the game ball, which is provided on the second movement route (R2) and is launched on the second movement route (R2), through the second predetermined area (G2), the game ball falls on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L14, further comprising delay means (60, 70) for delaying by limiting or delaying.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L15, a delay unit that delays the passage of the game ball that is shot on the second movement path through the second predetermined area (delays the operation of the accessory continuous operation device) is launched on the second movement path. This is to limit or delay the fall of the game ball on the game board. Such delay means can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effect of providing the delay means can be easily and reliably enjoyed.

[Appendix L16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L15, wherein the delay means (60, 70) limits or delays the fall of the gaming ball on the gaming board (31) by orbiting the gaming ball for a certain period of time.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L16, the fall of the gaming ball on the gaming board is limited or delayed by the delay means that orbits the gaming ball. That is, the delay means is realized by means for orbiting the game ball. Such a delay means can be easily realized because it can be configured as a known means that is easy to manufacture, for example, a clune device.

[Appendix L17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L15, wherein the delay means (60, 70) is a rotating body (70).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L17, the delay means configured as a rotating body limits or delays the fall of the gaming ball on the gaming board. Since the delay means is a rotating body as described above, the delay means can be realized by a known means that is easy to manufacture. Further, since the delay means is a rotating body, the delay time in the delay means can be easily controlled, and for example, the delay time in the delay means can be made uniform.

[Appendix L18]
A rotary body control means (51) for controlling the rotation of the rotary body (70),
The rotating body (70) has a storage portion (701) capable of storing a game ball,
The rotator control means (51) starts rotation of the rotator (70) from a posture in which the accommodating part (701) is in a fixed position on condition that the condition device is operated, and at least the accommodating part is accommodated. The rotating body (70) is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed until the rotating body is rotated in a posture in which a game ball accommodated in the section (701) is discharged. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L18, the rotating body is rotated until the rotation of the rotating body is started from the attitude in which the housing portion is in the fixed position, and at least the gaming ball housed in the housing portion is released into the attitude. Is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed. In this way, the starting posture of the rotating body is made uniform, and the rotating body is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed from the start of the rotating body to the release of the game ball, whereby the rotating body is started. It is possible to easily equalize the time from when the game balls are released from the rotating body to the other. Thereby, the delay time in the delay means can be easily equalized, and, for example, when an event or the like is generated while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, the event does not end in the middle and is desired. It becomes possible to carry out.

[Appendix L19]
A privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied at a specific time set in the preparation time;
When a game ball is launched on the second movement route (R2) when the condition device is activated, a chance-providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition at the specific time,
Further equipped with,
In the second movement route (R2), the preparation time from the launch of the game ball to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device when the condition device is activated is delayed compared to the first movement route (R1). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L19, which is characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L19, in the case where the game ball is launched on the second movement path in which the preparation time from the condition device being operated to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed when the condition device is operated. , An opportunity to meet a specific condition at a specific time is provided. As a result, various events can be generated by the establishment opportunity providing means as a period satisfying a specific condition by using the preparation time of the second movement route where the preparation time becomes long, and the interest of the player is low. You can enjoy the preparation time that tends to be boring by the occurrence of events. In this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the player during the preparation time, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix L20]
The supplementary opportunity providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical index (for example, points) that can be correlated with a number in correlation with the number of established specific conditions, and is provided in Appendix L19. The game machine described.

[Appendix L21]
The gaming machine according to appendix L20, wherein the establishment opportunity providing means (51) is executed by the display means and provides the numerical index by a numerical index acquisition effect capable of acquiring the numerical index.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note L20 and supplementary note L21, the number of satisfied specific conditions is provided in correlation with the numerical index acquired by the opportunity given as the numerical index acquisition effect or the like. By correlating the number of satisfied specific conditions with a numerical index in this way, it is possible to diversify the content of opportunities for which specific conditions are satisfied, and for example, it is possible to execute the opportunity as a point acquisition effect such as a game effect. become. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Appendix L22]
Further comprising operating means (20, 21) operated by the player,
The gaming machine described in appendix L21, wherein the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect in which a different result is obtained depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (20, 21).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L22, the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect in which different results are obtained depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means. That is, the numerical index acquisition effect is executed as a player participation type effect such as a player participation type game effect. As described above, the numerical index acquisition effect is determined by the player's operation to determine the progress process and result (numerical index acquired) of the effect, so that the interest in the numerical index acquisition effect is improved.

[Appendix L23]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L21, wherein the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the obtainable numerical index is predetermined.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L23, the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical index that can be acquired is predetermined. That is, the numerical index acquisition effect is executed as a scenario management type effect such as a scenario management type game effect. As a result, even for a player who does not actively participate in a numerical index acquisition effect such as a game effect, a numerical index corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios is always given. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege according to the numerical index even to a player who is not interested in the numerical index acquisition effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix L24]
The supplementary opportunity providing means (51) provides compensation of the numerical index when the numerical index acquisition effect is finished before the elapse of the specific time, from the additional notes L21 to L23. The game machine described in any one.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L24, the numerical index is compensated when the numerical index acquisition effect is finished before the elapse of the specific time. In this way, when the specific time is ended before reaching the specific time, the numerical index is compensated, and when the specific time that can satisfy the specific condition becomes shorter than the theoretical time, the game is played. The disadvantage to the player is reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix L25]
A first guidance state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movement route (R1) and the guidance of the game ball to the second movement route (R2) is restricted, and to the second movement route (R2) Supplementary note L1 characterized by further comprising switching means (80) capable of guiding the game ball and switching between a second guide state for limiting the guide of the game ball to the first movement route (R1). The gaming machine according to any one of L24.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L25, the switching means allows the game ball to be guided to the first movement route and limits the guidance of the game ball to the second movement route, and a second movement route. The game ball can be guided, and the second guidance state that limits the guidance of the game ball to the first movement path is switched. In this way, the switching means switches the moving path through which the game ball can move, so that the player shoots the game ball while confirming the operation of the switching means, and thereby the first moving path and the second moving path. It is possible to select either of which to move the game ball. As a result, it is unnecessary to adjust the firing intensity, so that it is possible to prevent the player from selecting a movement path that is against the will of the player, and to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine.

[Appendix L26]
A switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the switching means (80) between the first guidance state and the second guidance state,
The gaming machine according to appendix L25, wherein the switching control means (51) starts switching control for the switching means (80) when the condition device is activated.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L26, switching control for the switching means is started when the condition device is operated. In this way, by starting the switching control for the switching unit when the condition device is activated, it is possible to recognize that the condition device has been activated when the switching control for the switching unit is started. It can be recognized that the continuous operation device can be operated. This makes it easier for the player to respond to the progress of the game, for example, to recognize whether or not the situation is one in which the player should hit the right side, and tries to operate the accessory continuous operation device in a state in which the condition device is not operated. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched into the movement route or the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) to the player when the condition device is inactive.

[Appendix L27]
The switching control means (51) ends the switching control of the switching means (80) when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) is detected. The gaming machine described in appendix L26, which is characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L27, when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route is detected, the switching control of the switching means that is started when the condition device is activated is ended. .. In this way, the switching control of the switching means is ended when the movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, so that the first control is performed when the switching control of the switching means is ended. It can be recognized that it is not necessary to hit the game ball on the movement route or the second movement route. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched into the first movement route and the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) received by the player.

[Appendix L28]
When a game ball is shot on the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The switch control means (51) stops the switch means (80) in the first guidance state when the switch control of the switch means (80) is not performed. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L28, the switching means is stopped in the first guidance state when the switching control of the switching means is not executed. Here, in the first guidance state, it is possible to guide the game ball to the first movement path, and the guidance of the game ball to the second movement path in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed is restricted. As described above, when the switching control of the switching unit is not performed, the switching unit is stopped in the first guidance state, so that after the selection of the first movement route and the second movement route is completed or the condition device is not activated. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being guided to the second movement route which sometimes delays the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. This prevents the game ball from unnecessarily staying in the second movement route that delays the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, regardless of the progress of the game.

[Appendix L29]
When the movement of the game ball on one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement route (R1) or a limiting means (51) for limiting the operation of the accessory continuously operating device by a game ball that is launched to the other moving path different from the one moving path of the second moving path (R2). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L28, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L29, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the accessory continuous action device by the game ball launched on the other movement route. Is limited. In this way, when the movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path is limited, so that one movement path It is possible to prevent the accessory continuous actuating device from being actuated by the game ball moving on the other moving path until the selected accessory continuous actuating device is actuated. As a result, after the moving path for operating the accessory continuous operating device is selected, the accessory continuous operating device is operated by the game ball on the moving path contrary to the intention of the player, that is, the accessory continuous operating device is intended. It is prevented from being activated after a lapse of time (timing) contrary to the above.

[Appendix L30]
The accessory continuous operation device is operated by the game ball passing through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined region (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined region (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined region (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). Including,
When the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated, the limiting means (51) is provided with the predetermined area (G1, G2) provided on the other movement path. The gaming machine according to supplementary note L29, wherein detection of passage of a game ball is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L30, when the movement of the game sphere on one movement route is detected when the condition device is activated, the passage of the game sphere in a predetermined area provided on the other movement route is detected. Limited. Thus, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected when the condition device is operated, the detection of the passage of the game ball on a predetermined area provided on the other movement route is restricted. With the simple control, it is possible to limit the operation of the accessory continuous operating device by the game ball moving on the other travel path until one of the moving paths is selected and the accessory continuous operating device is operated. realizable.

[Appendix L31]
When a game ball is shot on the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The limiting means (51) plays a game on the second movement route (R2) before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) is detected when the condition device is activated. The gaming machine according to supplementary note L30, wherein when the movement of the ball is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball shot on the first movement route (R1) is limited.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L31, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement path is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected, the game machine is shot on the first movement path. The operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball is limited. Here, since the second movement route is a movement route in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, the first movement route is played while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed in the second movement route. When the ball is fired, there is concern that the accessory continuously operating device will be activated by the game ball that is later fired on the first movement route, even though the game ball has been fired first on the second movement route. To be done. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the accessory continuously operating device is more likely to be activated by the game ball that is subsequently fired. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the character object by the game ball launched on the first movement route is detected. By limiting the operation of the continuous actuator, the possibility that the accessory continuous actuator is activated by the game ball fired first by the game ball fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case in which the accessory continuous operation device is likely to be actuated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement path, the accessory continuation is achieved by the game ball in the undesired movement path. The actuating device is prevented from being actuated, that is, the accessory continuous actuating device is prevented from being actuated at an unexpected time.

[Appendix L32]
When the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball that is launched to the other movement route is limited by the limiting means (51), depending on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, depending on the game ball that is launched to the other movement route. 32. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L29 to L31, further comprising a restriction releasing means (51) for canceling the restriction on the operation of the accessory continuous operation device.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L32, in the case where the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball emitted to the other movement route is restricted, the role of the game ball emitted to the other movement route due to the establishment of the predetermined condition. The restriction on the operation of the continuous object operating device is released. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous actuating device later by satisfying a predetermined condition, so that convenience in selecting the movement route is improved.

[Appendix L33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L32, wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by a player.

[Appendix L34]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L33, wherein the predetermined condition is that movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected in the other movement path before the accessory continuous operation device is activated.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note L33 and supplementary note L34, the movement of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement route is detected before the accessory continuous operation device is activated (a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement route). When a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as that the character is fired, is satisfied, it is possible to later change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix L35]
When the movement of the game ball on one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2), the permitting means (51) for permitting the operation of the accessory continuous action device by the game ball that is launched on the other moving route different from the one moving route. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L34, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L35, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the accessory continuous action device by the game ball launched on the other movement route. Is acceptable. In this way, when the movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected when the condition device is operated, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path is allowed. Then, it becomes possible to change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous operation device by launching the game ball to the other movement route after one movement route is selected. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix L36]
The accessory continuous operation device is operated by the game ball passing through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined region (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined region (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined region (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine described in appendix L35, including:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L36, a predetermined region that gives a trigger for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is provided in each of the first movement route and the second movement route. Before the game ball passes through the predetermined area provided on one of the moving routes, even if the game ball is shot on one of the moving routes first, the game ball is shot on the other moving route later. By doing so, it is possible to change the predetermined region in which the accessory continuously operating device is operated. For example, when the game ball is fired on one of the movement paths, the time until the role object continuous operation device is activated is reached, and when the game ball is fired on the other path, the role object continuous operation device is operated. If it is longer than the time until it reaches, it is possible to shorten the time until the accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by launching the game ball to the other movement route later.

[Appendix L37]
The accessory continuous operation device is operated when a game ball is detected by the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) includes a first predetermined area detection means (Gs1) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the first predetermined area (G1), and the second predetermined area (G2). The gaming machine according to supplementary note L36, comprising: a second predetermined area detecting means (Gs2) for detecting that the game ball has passed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L37, the game machine is played when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection unit provided on the first movement route or the second predetermined area detection unit provided on the second movement route. The continuous object actuating device is activated. In this way, the accessory continuous operation device is operated triggered by the detection of the game ball by the first predetermined area detection means or the second predetermined area detection means, so that one movement can be performed with a simple configuration and control. Even after the game ball is launched on the path, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous actuating device by launching the game ball on the other moving path.

[Appendix L38]
When the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected during the waiting period from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device, the game ball is launched to the other movement path. Further comprising a limiting means (51) for limiting the operation of the accessory continuously operating device by the game ball,
The permitting means (51) is the role of the game ball that is launched to the other movement path by the limiting means (51) when the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected during the preparation time. Allowing the continuous operation device to operate for a certain period of time,
The restricting means (51) allows the game ball to move on the other moving path by the time the fixed time elapses after the restricting means (51) starts restricting the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L35 to L37, which limits the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball that is launched to the other movement path when it is not detected.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L38, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected during the standby period, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement route is continued for a certain period of time. If the movement of the game ball on the other movement route is not detected by the time allowed, the movement of the game ball on the other movement route limits the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball. That is, it is possible to change the movement route on which the accessory continuous operation device is operated for a certain period of time, and the change of the movement route is limited after a certain period of time. As a result, before the lapse of a certain period of time, it is possible to change the movement route by selecting a movement route that is against the player's will and the like, but after the lapse of a certain period of time, a character object against the player It is possible to prevent the movement route for operating the continuous actuation device from being changed, and to reflect it more appropriately in the player's intention.

[Appendix L39]
A privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege when a specific condition is satisfied at a specific time set between the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
Establishment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to establish the specific condition at the specific time,
Specific period ending means (51) for forcibly ending the specific period when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L38, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L39, the specific period is forcibly ended when the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, the specific period can be shortened by ending the specific period even before the specific period has elapsed. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to operate the accessory continuous operating device before the elapse of a specific period, and it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operating device at various timings, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix L40]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L39, wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by the player in the specific period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L40, it is possible for the player to establish a predetermined condition in a specific period. As described above, the player can establish the predetermined condition in the specific period, so that the specific period can be ended by the player's intention. As a result, the player can determine the timing for operating the accessory continuous operation device even after the start of the specific period, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix L41]
The establishment opportunity providing means (51) is configured to detect the movement of the game ball on one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) during the waiting period. Start the specific period,
The predetermined condition is different from the one movement route of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) from the start of the specific period to the end of the specific period. The gaming machine according to appendix L40, wherein the gaming ball is detected on the other movement route.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L41, the specific period set as the standby period is started by detecting the movement of the game ball on one moving route, and the game ball is detected on the other moving route before the passage of the specific period. If it happens, the specified period will be terminated. In this way, the specific period set in the waiting period is started by the detection of the movement of the game ball on one movement route, and is specified when the game ball is detected on the other movement route before the passage of the specific period. By forcibly ending the period, the specific period can be simply ended by launching the game ball on the other moving route after the specific period is started by launching the game ball on one moving route. ..

[Appendix L42]
The predetermined area (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). Including,
The game machine further comprises a special game generating means (41) for generating a special game based on the fact that a game ball enters the predetermined area (G1, G2) in a predetermined game state.
When the special game generation means (41) generates a special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball enters the predetermined area (G1, G2), and a predetermined condition is satisfied The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L1 to L41, wherein the occurrence of the special game based on the entry of a game ball into the predetermined area (G1, G2) is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L42, the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball being entered in the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area when the predetermined condition is satisfied is restricted. In this way, the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area when the predetermined condition is satisfied is restricted, so that the first predetermined area and the second predetermined area It is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by entering a game ball into a predetermined area that is a target of the area, and to generate a special game due to entering a game ball into a predetermined area outside the purpose.

[Appendix L43]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L42, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (big hit game).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L43, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game. Thus, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game, so that the predetermined region to be executed by the special game is one of the first predetermined region and the second predetermined region. It is limited to the other predetermined area different from the area. Therefore, a special game is generated by entering the game ball into the other predetermined target region of the first predetermined region and the second predetermined region, and a special game is generated by entering the game ball into one predetermined region other than the purpose. A game is prevented from being generated.

[Appendix L44]
In the supplementary note L43, the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is ended by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L44, the notification that the predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means includes the termination of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game. In this way, the condition that the special game cannot be generated by including the notification that the predetermined result is the execution of the special game by the notification game in which the predetermined condition informs the judgment result by the judgment means. In, it is possible to prevent the special game from being generated by the entry of the game ball into the other predetermined area.

[Appendix L45]
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and the first movement route (R1) after the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The movement of the game ball on one of the second moving routes (R2) is the one of the first moving route (R1) and the second moving route (R2) The gaming machine according to supplementary note L44, wherein the gaming machine is detected prior to the movement of the game ball on the other different movement route.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L45, when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game, the movement of the game ball on one movement route is changed by the movement of the game ball on the other movement route. If detected before the movement, the occurrence of the special game due to the passage of the game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other movement route is limited. In this way, when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is completed by the notification game, the movement of the game ball on one movement route precedes the movement of the game ball on the other movement route. When it is detected, the occurrence of the special game due to the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area provided on the other movement route is restricted, until one movement route is selected and the special game is generated. It is prevented that a special game is generated by the game ball moving on the other movement route. As a result, after the movement route for generating the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement route against the player's will, that is, at the passage of time (timing) where the special game is against the intention. It is prevented from being generated.

[Appendix L46]
The one movement route is the second movement route (R2),
The gaming machine according to appendix L45, wherein the other movement route is the first movement route (R1).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L46, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the game machine is shot on the first movement route. Occurrence of special games by game balls is restricted. Here, since the second movement route is a movement route in which the fall of the game ball is delayed, that is, the movement route in which the generation of the special game is delayed, the generation of the special game is delayed in the second movement route. When the game ball is shot on the first movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball that is later launched on the first movement route, even though the game ball is shot on the second movement route first. Is concerned. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later is high. Therefore, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, a special game by the game ball launched on the first movement route. By limiting the occurrence of, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired first by the game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case where the special game is likely to be generated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball in the movement route against the player's will. That is, the special game is prevented from being generated after a lapse of time (timing) against the intention.

[Appendix L47]
The special game generation means (41), when a game ball is entered in the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2), executes the predetermined determination process and then executes the special game. The generation of the special game based on the game ball being generated in the first predetermined area (G1) or the second predetermined area (G2) is restricted when the first predetermined condition is satisfied, and The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes L42 to L46, wherein the restriction on the occurrence of the special game is released when a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L47, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first predetermined area or the second predetermined area is released from the restriction of the occurrence of the special game. To be done. In this way, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first predetermined region or the second predetermined region is released by removing the restriction on the occurrence of the special game. After the generation of the special game by the one predetermined area is selected, it is possible to change to the generation of the special game by the other predetermined area.

[Appendix L48]
The gaming machine according to Appendix L47, wherein the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by a player.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L48, the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. In this way, since the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by the player, the player can change the predetermined region in which the special game is to be generated, according to his or her intention. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix L49]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note L47 or supplementary note L48, wherein the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (big hit game).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L49, the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result of the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game, so that the predetermined region to be executed by the special game is one of the first predetermined region and the second predetermined region. It is limited to the other predetermined area different from the predetermined area. Therefore, a special game is generated by entering the game ball into the other predetermined target region of the first predetermined region and the second predetermined region, and a special game is generated by entering the game ball into one predetermined region other than the purpose. A game is prevented from being generated.

[Appendix L50]
The first predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is ended by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The gaming machine described in L49.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L50, the notification that the first predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game ends. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, so that the special game can be generated. It is prevented that a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the other predetermined area in a state where the special game cannot be performed.

[Appendix L51]
The first predetermined condition is the first movement route (R1) after the notification that the determination result by the determination means (41) notifies that the determination result is to execute the special game. ) And the movement of the game ball on one movement route of the second movement route (R2) is the one movement route of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine according to supplementary note L50, wherein the gaming machine is detected prior to the movement of the game ball on the other movement route different from.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L51, in the case where the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected in the state where the determination result allows the special game to be generated by the notification game in which the first predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means. , Detection of passage of a game ball in a predetermined area provided on the other movement route is limited. In this way, in the state where the special game can be generated, the detection of the passage of the game ball in the predetermined area provided on the other movement route is restricted, so that one movement route is selected and the special game is generated. By the simple control, the restriction that the special game is generated by the game ball moving on the other movement path can be realized by the time.

[Appendix L52]
The second predetermined condition is that the special game is executed after the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). Up to, the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected in the other movement path, the gaming machine described in Appendix L51.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L52, the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement route before the accessory continuous operation device is activated (a predetermined number of game balls are shot on the other movement route). By satisfying a predetermined condition that can be established by the player, such as the above, it is possible to later change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix L53]
The one predetermined area is the first predetermined area (G1),
The gaming machine according to appendix L52, wherein the other predetermined area is the second predetermined area (G2).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note L53, one predetermined region is the first predetermined region, and the other predetermined region is the second predetermined region. Here, since the second movement route provided with the second predetermined area is a movement route in which the flow of the game balls is delayed, that is, a movement route in which the generation of the special game is delayed, the generation of the special game is generated in the second movement route. When a game ball is launched on the first movement route while the game ball is being delayed, the game ball is launched on the first movement route later, even though the game ball was first launched on the second movement route. There is a concern that a special game will be generated. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later is high. Therefore, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, a special game by the game ball launched on the first movement route. By limiting the occurrence of, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired first by the game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case where the special game is likely to be generated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball in the movement route against the player's will. That is, it is prevented that the special game is operated at an unexpected time (timing).

  Further, since one of the predetermined areas is the first predetermined area and the other of the predetermined areas is the second predetermined area, the flow down of the game ball is delayed in the second movement route in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed. In the meantime, if it is desired to immediately generate the special game, it is possible to immediately generate the special game by launching the game ball to the first movement route.

[Appendix M1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first travel route (R1) and a second travel route (R2) in which a game ball can move,
A game ball moving on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) can pass, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the passage of the game ball. And a predetermined area where
Further equipped with,
The first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) are different from each other in time from the launch of the game ball until the game ball passes through the predetermined area,
Privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege when a specific condition is satisfied at a specific time set as a preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M1, a privilege is awarded when a specific condition is satisfied at a specific time set as a preparation time from when the condition device is operated to when the accessory continuous operation device is operated. In this way, the privilege is granted when the specific condition is satisfied at the specific time set in the preparation time, and the progress of the game is enjoyed by focusing on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied during the preparation time. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Appendix M2]
The gaming machine according to appendix M1, wherein the privilege granting means (51) grants the privilege according to the number of the specific conditions established in the specific period.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M2, a privilege corresponding to the number of specific conditions established during a specific period is given. In this way, by giving a privilege according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific period, it is possible to focus not only on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but also on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the privilege according to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the preparation time is given, the contents of the privilege can be diversified, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Appendix M3]
The predetermined area (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined area (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined area (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). Including,
Further provided is a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) and delaying the passage of the game ball shot on the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined region (G2). ,
The specific period is started upon detection of a game ball on the second movement route (R2) when the condition device is activated, as described in Appendix M1 or Appendix M2. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note M3, a specific period during which it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected in the second movement route in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by the delay means. Is started. That is, the specific time period is started when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by the second movement path, and thus the specific time period can be set to be long. As a result, the types of specific conditions can be diversified, so that it is possible to prevent the preparation time from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device from becoming boring. As a result, the interest of the player in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix M4]
When the game ball is detected on the second moving route before the game ball is detected on the first moving route when the condition device is activated, the privilege granting means (51) determines the identification. The gaming machine according to appendix M3, wherein the privilege is granted when the specific condition is satisfied in time.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note M4, when the game ball is detected on the second movement route before the game ball is detected on the first movement route when the condition device is operated, a specific condition at a specific time When is satisfied, the privilege is granted. As a result, after the first movement path is selected to activate the accessory continuous operation from the operation of the condition device in a short time, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed by the game ball detected in the second movement path. Against the contrary, it is possible to prevent disgust and irritation that it takes time to operate the accessory continuous operation device, and it is possible to comfortably progress the game.

[Appendix M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1 to M4, wherein the privilege is a presentation of at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating a payout performance.

[Appendix M6]
A storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability) determined to execute the special game (big hit game) by the determination means (41). ,
From the plurality of pieces of numerical value information stored in the storage means (41), one piece of numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game is selected. Selection means (41) for
Further equipped with,
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantage determination probability according to the one numerical value information selected by the selection means (41),
The gaming machine according to Appendix M5, wherein the performance information is information capable of identifying or inferring the one piece of numerical value information.

[Appendix M7]
The gaming machine according to appendix M6, wherein the privilege is a presentation of at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes M5 to M7, at least a part of the information capable of estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability is provided as a privilege when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Presented. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix N1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first movement route (R1) and a second movement route (R2) in which the game ball can move,
A first predetermined region (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1),
A second predetermined region (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2),
Delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement path (R2) and delaying passage of the game ball shot on the second movement path (R2) through the second predetermined area (G2);
Equipped with
When the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation device is operated with a game ball passing through the first predetermined region (G1) or the second predetermined region (G2) as a trigger.
A game machine characterized in that the delay means (60, 70) limits or delays the fall of a game ball launched on the second movement route (R2) on the game board (31).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note N1, delay means for delaying the time from the launch of the game ball to the second movement path to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is provided in the second movement path. In this way, the delay means for delaying the time until the accessory continuous operation device is activated is provided in the second movement path, so that the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the game ball launched in the first movement path. It is possible to provide a significant time difference between the time until it is played and the time until the accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by the game ball shot on the second movement path. That is, when the condition device is operated, depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route or when the game ball is shot on the second movement route, the accessory continuous operation after the condition device is activated. There can be a significant difference in the preparation time when the device is activated. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route can be lengthened.

  Then, by shortening the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the first movement route, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device in a short time by firing the game ball on the first movement route. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuously operating device is activated (the special game is started) by firing the game ball on the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. .. Furthermore, if the player chooses a travel route that can shorten the preparation time when the player's playing time is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening / closing execution mode. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, by increasing the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the second movement path, various events are used by using the preparation time from the condition device being operated to the accessory continuous operation device being operated. It becomes possible to execute. In this way, by launching the game ball to the second movement route in which the preparation time becomes long, various events are generated by using the preparation time, so that the preparation time that the player is less interested in and tends to be boring It can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. As a result, the player's interest in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N1, the delay means that delays the passage of the game ball launched on the second movement path through the second predetermined area (delays the operation of the accessory continuous operation device) is provided on the second movement path. This is to limit or delay the fall of the game balls being launched on the game board. Such delay means can be realized with a simple configuration, and the effect of providing the delay means can be easily and reliably enjoyed.

[Appendix N2]
The game machine according to Appendix N1, wherein the delay means (60, 70) limits or delays the fall of the game ball on the game board (31) by orbiting the game ball for a certain period of time.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note N2, the falling of the gaming ball on the gaming board is limited or delayed by the delay means that orbits the gaming ball. That is, the delay means is realized by means for orbiting the game ball. Such a delay means can be easily realized because it can be configured as a known means that is easy to manufacture, for example, a clune device.

[Appendix N3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix N1, wherein the delay means (60, 70) is a rotating body (70).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note N3, the delay means configured as a rotating body restricts or delays the fall of the gaming ball on the gaming board. Since the delay means is a rotating body as described above, the delay means can be realized by a known means that is easy to manufacture. Further, since the delay means is a rotating body, the delay time in the delay means can be easily controlled, and for example, the delay time in the delay means can be made uniform.

[Appendix N4]
A rotary body control means (51) for controlling the rotation of the rotary body (70),
The rotating body (70) has a storage portion (701) capable of storing a game ball,
The rotator control means (51) starts rotation of the rotator (70) from a posture in which the accommodating part (701) is in a fixed position on condition that the condition device is operated, and at least the accommodating part is accommodated. The rotating body (70) is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed until the rotating body is rotated in a posture in which a game ball accommodated in the section (701) is discharged. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note N4, the rotating body is rotated until the rotation of the rotating body is started from the posture in which the accommodation portion is in the fixed position and at least the game ball accommodated in the accommodation portion is discharged to the rotation body. Is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed. In this way, the starting posture of the rotating body is made uniform, and the rotating body is rotated at a constant speed or a substantially constant speed from the start of the rotating body to the release of the game ball, whereby the rotating body is started. It is possible to easily equalize the time from when the game balls are released from the rotating body to the other. Thereby, the delay time in the delay means can be easily equalized, and, for example, when an event or the like is generated while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, the event does not end in the middle and is desired. It becomes possible to carry out.

[Appendix O1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first movement route (R1) on which the game ball can move,
The game ball is movable, and when the condition device is activated, the preparation time from the launch of the game ball until the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed from the first movement route (R1). A second travel route (R2),
A privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied at a specific time set in the preparation time;
When a game ball is launched on the second movement route (R2) when the condition device is activated, a chance-providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to satisfy the specific condition at the specific time,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O1, when a game ball is launched in the second movement path in which the preparation time from the condition device being operated to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed when the condition device is operated , An opportunity to meet a specific condition at a specific time is provided. As a result, various events can be generated by the establishment opportunity providing means as a period satisfying a specific condition by using the preparation time of the second movement route where the preparation time becomes long, and the interest of the player is low. You can enjoy the preparation time that tends to be boring by the occurrence of events. In this way, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the player during the preparation time, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix O2]
The supplemental opportunity providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical index (for example, points) capable of correlating with a number in correlation with the number of established specific conditions, and is provided in appendix O1. The game machine described.

[Appendix O3]
The gaming machine according to appendix O2, wherein the establishment opportunity providing unit (51) is executed by a display unit and provides the numerical index by a numerical index acquisition effect capable of acquiring the numerical index.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note O2 and Supplementary Note O3, the number of satisfied specific conditions is provided in correlation with the numerical index acquired by the opportunity given as the numerical index acquisition effect. By correlating the number of satisfied specific conditions with a numerical index in this way, it is possible to diversify the content of opportunities for which specific conditions are satisfied, and for example, it is possible to execute the opportunity as a point acquisition effect such as a game effect. become. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Appendix O4]
Further comprising operating means (20, 21) operated by the player,
The gaming machine described in appendix O3, wherein the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect in which a different result is obtained depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (20, 21).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O4, the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect in which different results are obtained depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means. That is, the numerical index acquisition effect is executed as a player participation type effect such as a player participation type game effect. As described above, the numerical index acquisition effect is determined by the player's operation to determine the progress process and result (numerical index acquired) of the effect, so that the interest in the numerical index acquisition effect is improved.

[Appendix O5]
The gaming machine described in appendix O3, wherein the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the acquirable numerical index is predetermined.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O5, the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical index that can be acquired is predetermined. That is, the numerical index acquisition effect is executed as a scenario management type effect such as a scenario management type game effect. As a result, even for a player who does not actively participate in a numerical index acquisition effect such as a game effect, a numerical index corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios is always given. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege according to the numerical index even to a player who is not interested in the numerical index acquisition effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix O6]
The supplementary opportunity providing means (51) provides compensation of the numerical index when the numerical index acquisition effect is finished before the elapse of the specific time period. The game machine described in any one.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note O6, the numerical index is compensated when the numerical index acquisition effect is finished before the elapse of the specific time. In this way, when the specific time is ended before reaching the specific time, the numerical index is compensated, and when the specific time that can satisfy the specific condition becomes shorter than the theoretical time, the game is played. The disadvantage to the player is reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix O7]
Further provided is a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) and delaying passage of the game ball shot on the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined region (G2). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1 to O6, characterized in that.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note O7, the second moving route is provided with a delay unit that delays the time from the launch of the game ball onto the second moving route to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. In this way, the delay means for delaying the time until the accessory continuous operation device is activated is provided in the second movement path, so that the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the game ball launched in the first movement path. It is possible to provide a significant time difference between the time until it is played and the time until the accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by the game ball shot on the second movement path. That is, when the condition device is operated, depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route or when the game ball is shot on the second movement route, the accessory continuous operation after the condition device is activated. There can be a significant difference in the preparation time when the device is activated. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route can be lengthened.

  Then, by shortening the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the first movement route, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device in a short time by firing the game ball on the first movement route. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuously operating device is activated (the special game is started) by firing the game ball on the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. .. Furthermore, if the player chooses a travel route that can shorten the preparation time when the player's playing time is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening / closing execution mode. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, by increasing the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the second movement path, various events are used by using the preparation time from the condition device being operated to the accessory continuous operation device being operated. It becomes possible to execute. In this way, by launching the game ball to the second movement route in which the preparation time becomes long, various events are generated by using the preparation time, so that the preparation time that the player is less interested in and tends to be boring It can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. As a result, the player's interest in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix P1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first movement route (R1) and a second movement route (R2) in which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is fired and then the accessory continuous operation device is activated. The first travel route (R1) and the second travel route (R2), which are different in time until
A first guidance state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movement route (R1) and the guidance of the game ball to the second movement route (R2) is restricted, and to the second movement route (R2) A switching means (80) for switching between a second guiding state capable of guiding the game ball and limiting the guidance of the game ball to the first movement route (R1),
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note P1, the switching means allows the game ball to be guided to the first movement route and limits the guidance of the game ball to the second movement route, and the second movement route. The game ball can be guided, and the second guidance state that limits the guidance of the game ball to the first movement path is switched. In this way, the switching means switches the moving path through which the game ball can move, so that the player shoots the game ball while confirming the operation of the switching means, and thereby the first moving path and the second moving path. It is possible to select either of which to move the game ball. As a result, it is unnecessary to adjust the firing intensity, so that it is possible to prevent the player from selecting a movement path that is against the will of the player, and to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine.

[Appendix P2]
A switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the switching means (80) between the first guidance state and the second guidance state,
The gaming machine according to Appendix P1, wherein the switching control means (51) starts switching control for the switching means (80) when the condition device is activated.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note P2, switching control for the switching means is started when the condition device is operated. In this way, by starting the switching control for the switching unit when the condition device is activated, it is possible to recognize that the condition device has been activated when the switching control for the switching unit is started. It can be recognized that the continuous operation device can be operated. This makes it easier for the player to respond to the progress of the game, for example, to recognize whether or not the situation is one in which the player should hit the right side, and tries to operate the accessory continuous operation device in a state in which the condition device is not operated. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched into the movement route or the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) to the player when the condition device is inactive.

[Appendix P3]
The switching control means (51) ends the switching control of the switching means (80) when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) is detected. The gaming machine described in Appendix P2.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note P3, when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route is detected, the switching control of the switching means that is started when the condition device is activated is ended. .. In this way, the switching control of the switching means is ended when the movement of the game ball on the first movement path or the second movement path is detected, so that the first control is performed when the switching control of the switching means is ended. It can be recognized that it is not necessary to hit the game ball on the movement route or the second movement route. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched into the first movement route and the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) received by the player.

[Appendix P4]
When a game ball is shot on the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The switching control means (51) stops the switching means (80) in the first guidance state when the switching control of the switching means (80) is not executed. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note P4, the switching means is stopped in the first guidance state when the switching control of the switching means is not executed. Here, in the first guidance state, it is possible to guide the game ball to the first movement path, and the guidance of the game ball to the second movement path in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed is restricted. As described above, when the switching control of the switching unit is not performed, the switching unit is stopped in the first guidance state, so that after the selection of the first movement route and the second movement route is completed or the condition device is not activated. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being guided to the second movement route which sometimes delays the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. This prevents the game ball from unnecessarily staying in the second movement route that delays the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, regardless of the progress of the game.

[Appendix Q1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first movement route (R1) and a second movement route (R2) in which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is fired and then the accessory continuous operation device is activated. The first travel route (R1) and the second travel route (R2), which are different in time until
When the movement of the game ball on one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) limiting means (51) for limiting the operation of the accessory continuous action device by the game ball that is launched on the other movement route different from the one movement route. When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q1, when the movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected when the condition device is operated, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path. Is limited. In this way, when the movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path is limited, so that one movement path It is possible to prevent the accessory continuous actuating device from being actuated by the game ball moving on the other moving path until the selected accessory continuous actuating device is actuated. As a result, after the moving path for operating the accessory continuous operating device is selected, the accessory continuous operating device is operated by the game ball on the moving path contrary to the intention of the player, that is, the accessory continuous operating device is intended. It is prevented from being activated after a lapse of time (timing) contrary to the above.

[Appendix Q2]
The accessory continuous operation device is operated by the game ball passing through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined region (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined region (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined region (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). Including,
When the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected when the condition device is activated, the limiting means (51) is provided with the predetermined area (G1, G2) provided on the other movement path. The gaming machine according to appendix Q1, wherein the detection of passage of a game ball in is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q2, when the movement of the game sphere on one movement route is detected when the condition device is activated, the passage of the game sphere in a predetermined area provided on the other movement route is detected. Limited. Thus, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected when the condition device is operated, the detection of the passage of the game ball on a predetermined area provided on the other movement route is restricted. With the simple control, it is possible to limit the operation of the accessory continuous operating device by the game ball moving on the other travel path until one of the moving paths is selected and the accessory continuous operating device is operated. realizable.

[Appendix Q3]
When a game ball is shot on the second movement path (R1), the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed,
The limiting means (51) plays a game on the second movement route (R2) before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) is detected when the condition device is activated. The gaming machine according to supplementary note Q2, wherein when the movement of the ball is detected, the operation of the accessory continuously operating device by the game ball that is shot on the first movement route (R1) is limited.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q3, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the game machine is shot on the first movement route. The operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball is limited. Here, since the second movement route is a movement route in which the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed, the first movement route is played while the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is delayed in the second movement route. When the ball is fired, there is concern that the accessory continuously operating device will be activated by the game ball that is later fired on the first movement route, even though the game ball has been fired first on the second movement route. To be done. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the accessory continuously operating device is more likely to be activated by the game ball that is subsequently fired. Therefore, if the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the character object by the game ball launched on the first movement route is detected. By limiting the operation of the continuous actuator, the possibility that the accessory continuous actuator is activated by the game ball fired first by the game ball fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case in which the accessory continuous operation device is likely to be actuated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement path, the accessory continuation is achieved by the game ball in the undesired movement path. The actuating device is prevented from being actuated, that is, the accessory continuous actuating device is prevented from being actuated at an unexpected time.

[Appendix Q4]
When the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball that is launched to the other movement route is limited by the limiting means (51), depending on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, depending on the game ball that is launched to the other movement route. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices Q1 to Q3, further comprising a limit releasing means (51) for releasing the limit of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Q4, when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball shot on the other movement route is limited, the role of the game ball launched on the other movement route by the establishment of the predetermined condition. The restriction on the operation of the continuous object operating device is released. Therefore, it becomes possible to change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous actuating device later by satisfying a predetermined condition, so that convenience in selecting the movement route is improved.

[Appendix Q5]
The gaming machine according to appendix Q4, wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by a player.

[Appendix Q6]
The gaming machine according to appendix Q5, wherein the predetermined condition is that movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected in the other movement path before the accessory continuous operation device is activated.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note Q5 and supplementary note Q6, movement of a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement route is detected before the accessory continuous operation device is activated (a predetermined number of game balls on the other movement route). When a predetermined condition that can be satisfied by the player, such as that the character is fired, is satisfied, it is possible to later change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix R1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first movement route (R1) and a second movement route (R2) in which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is fired and then the accessory continuous operation device is activated. The first travel route (R1) and the second travel route (R2), which are different in time until
When the movement of the game ball on one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) is detected when the condition device is activated, the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2), the permitting means (51) for permitting the operation of the accessory continuous action device by the game ball that is launched on the other moving route different from the one moving route. When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note R1, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected when the condition device is activated, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement route. Is acceptable. In this way, when the movement of the game ball on one movement path is detected when the condition device is operated, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement path is allowed. Then, it becomes possible to change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous operation device by launching the game ball to the other movement route after one movement route is selected. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix R2]
The accessory continuous operation device is operated by the game ball passing through a predetermined area (G1, G2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined region (G1, G2) includes a first predetermined region (G1) provided on the first movement route (R1) and a second predetermined region (G2) provided on the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine described in appendix R1 including:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note R2, a predetermined region that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is provided in each of the first movement route and the second movement route. Before the game ball passes through the predetermined area provided on one of the moving routes, even if the game ball is shot on one of the moving routes first, the game ball is shot on the other moving route later. By doing so, it is possible to change the predetermined region in which the accessory continuously operating device is operated. For example, when the game ball is fired on one of the movement paths, the time until the role object continuous operation device is activated is reached, and when the game ball is fired on the other path, the role object continuous operation device is operated. If it is longer than the time until it reaches, it is possible to shorten the time until the accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by launching the game ball to the other movement route later.

[Appendix R3]
The accessory continuous operation device is operated when a game ball is detected by the predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) when the condition device is operated,
The predetermined area detection means (Gs1, Gs2) includes a first predetermined area detection means (Gs1) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the first predetermined area (G1), and the second predetermined area (G2). The gaming machine according to supplementary note R2, comprising: a second predetermined area detecting means (Gs2) for detecting that the game ball has passed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note R3, it is used as an opportunity when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first predetermined area detection unit provided on the first movement route or the second predetermined area detection unit provided on the second movement route. The continuous object actuating device is activated. In this way, the accessory continuous operation device is operated triggered by the detection of the game ball by the first predetermined area detection means or the second predetermined area detection means, so that one movement can be performed with a simple configuration and control. Even after the game ball is launched on the path, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous actuating device by launching the game ball on the other moving path.

[Appendix R4]
When the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected during the waiting period from the activation of the condition device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device, the game ball is launched to the other movement path. Further comprising a limiting means (51) for limiting the operation of the accessory continuously operating device by the game ball,
The permitting means (51) is the role of the game ball that is launched to the other movement path by the limiting means (51) when the movement of the game ball on the one movement path is detected during the preparation time. Allowing the continuous operation device to operate for a certain period of time,
The restricting means (51) allows the game ball to move on the other moving path by the time the fixed time elapses after the restricting means (51) starts restricting the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes R1 to R3, which limits the operation of the accessory continuously operating device by the game ball that is launched to the other movement path when it is not detected.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note R4, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected in the waiting period, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the other movement route is continued for a certain period of time. If the movement of the game ball on the other movement route is not detected by the time allowed, the movement of the game ball on the other movement route limits the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball. That is, it is possible to change the movement route on which the accessory continuous operation device is operated for a certain period of time, and the change of the movement route is limited after a certain period of time. As a result, before the lapse of a certain period of time, it is possible to change the movement route by selecting a movement route that is against the player's will and the like, but after the lapse of a certain period of time, a character object against the player It is possible to prevent the movement route for operating the continuous actuation device from being changed, and to reflect it more appropriately in the player's intention.

[Appendix R5]
Further provided is a delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement route (R2) and delaying passage of the game ball shot on the second movement route (R2) through the second predetermined region (G2). The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes R1 to R4, characterized in that.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note R5, the second moving route is provided with a delay unit that delays the time from the launch of the game ball onto the second moving route to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. In this way, the delay means for delaying the time until the accessory continuous operation device is activated is provided in the second movement path, so that the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the game ball launched in the first movement path. It is possible to provide a significant time difference between the time until it is played and the time until the accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by the game ball shot on the second movement path. That is, when the condition device is operated, depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route or when the game ball is shot on the second movement route, the accessory continuous operation after the condition device is activated. There can be a significant difference in the preparation time when the device is activated. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route can be lengthened.

  Then, by shortening the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the first movement route, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device in a short time by firing the game ball on the first movement route. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuously operating device is activated (the special game is started) by firing the game ball on the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. .. Furthermore, if the player chooses a travel route that can shorten the preparation time when the player's playing time is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening / closing execution mode. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, by increasing the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the second movement path, various events are used by using the preparation time from the condition device being operated to the accessory continuous operation device being operated. It becomes possible to execute. In this way, by launching the game ball to the second movement route in which the preparation time becomes long, various events are generated by using the preparation time, so that the preparation time that the player is less interested in and tends to be boring It can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. As a result, the player's interest in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix S1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player in which the accessory continuous actuation device is to be executed (big hit lottery) based on the satisfaction of the determination condition;
A condition device which is operated on condition that the result of the judgment by the judgment means (41) is to execute the special game, and the operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
A first movement route (R1) and a second movement route (R2) in which the game ball can move, and when the condition device is activated, the game ball is fired and then the accessory continuous operation device is activated. The first travel route (R1) and the second travel route (R2), which are different in time until
A privilege granting means (51) for granting a privilege when a specific condition is satisfied at a specific time set between the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device,
Establishment opportunity providing means (51) for providing an opportunity to establish the specific condition at the specific time,
Specific period ending means (51) for forcibly ending the specific period when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S1, the specific period is forcibly ended when the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, the specific period can be shortened by ending the specific period even before the specific period has elapsed. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to operate the accessory continuous operating device before the elapse of a specific period, and it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operating device at various timings, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix S2]
The gaming machine according to appendix S1, wherein the predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by a player during the specific period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S2, the player can establish the predetermined condition in the specific period. As described above, the player can establish the predetermined condition in the specific period, so that the specific period can be ended by the player's intention. As a result, the player can determine the timing for operating the accessory continuous operation device even after the start of the specific period, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix S3]
The establishment opportunity providing means (51) is configured to detect the movement of the game ball on one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) during the waiting period. Start the specific period,
The predetermined condition is different from the one movement route of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) from the start of the specific period to the end of the specific period. The gaming machine according to appendix S2, wherein the gaming ball is detected on the other movement route.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S3, the specific period set as the standby period is started by detecting the movement of the game ball on one movement route, and the game ball is detected on the other movement route before the passage of the specific period. If it happens, the specified period will be terminated. In this way, the specific period set in the waiting period is started by the detection of the movement of the game ball on one movement route, and is specified when the game ball is detected on the other movement route before the passage of the specific period. By forcibly ending the period, the specific period can be simply ended by launching the game ball on the other moving route after the specific period is started by launching the game ball on one moving route. ..

[Appendix S4]
Delay means (60, 70) provided on the second movement path (R2) for delaying the operation of the accessory continuous operation device by the game ball launched on the second movement path (R2) is further included. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes S1 to S3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S4, the second moving path is provided with a delay unit that delays the time from the launch of the game ball onto the second moving path to the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. In this way, the delay means for delaying the time until the accessory continuous operation device is activated is provided in the second movement path, so that the accessory continuous operation device is activated by the game ball launched in the first movement path. It is possible to provide a significant time difference between the time until it is played and the time until the accessory continuous actuating device is actuated by the game ball shot on the second movement path. That is, when the condition device is operated, depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route or when the game ball is shot on the second movement route, the accessory continuous operation after the condition device is activated. There can be a significant difference in the preparation time when the device is activated. Therefore, for example, the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the first movement route can be shortened, while the preparation time when the game ball is launched on the second movement route can be lengthened.

  Then, by shortening the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the first movement route, it is possible to operate the accessory continuous operation device in a short time by firing the game ball on the first movement route. As a result, it is possible to avoid wasting time until the accessory continuously operating device is activated (the special game is started) by firing the game ball on the first movement path, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. .. Furthermore, if the player chooses a travel route that can shorten the preparation time when the player's playing time is limited, it is possible to suppress feelings of irritation and discomfort due to the slow start of the opening / closing execution mode. it can. As a result, it is possible to prevent a bad impression of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, by increasing the preparation time when the game ball is shot on the second movement path, various events are used by using the preparation time from the condition device being operated to the accessory continuous operation device being operated. It becomes possible to execute. In this way, by launching the game ball to the second movement route in which the preparation time becomes long, various events are generated by using the preparation time, so that the preparation time that the player is less interested in and tends to be boring It can be enjoyed by the occurrence of events. As a result, the player's interest in the preparation time can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix S5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes S1 to S4, wherein the privilege granting means (51) grants a privilege in accordance with the number of the specific conditions established in the specific time.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S5, a privilege corresponding to the number of specific conditions established during the specific period is given. In this way, by giving a privilege according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a specific period, it is possible to focus not only on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, but also on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied. Therefore, the interest of the game is further improved. In addition, since the privilege according to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the preparation time is given, the contents of the privilege can be diversified, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Appendix S6]
The supplementary opportunity providing means (51, 341) provides a numerical index (for example, a point) that can be correlated with a number in correlation with the number of established specific conditions, and is provided in appendix S5. The game machine described.

[Appendix S7]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S6, wherein the establishment opportunity providing means (51) is executed by the display means and provides the numerical index by a numerical index acquisition effect capable of acquiring the numerical index.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary note S6 and supplementary note S7, the number of satisfied specific conditions is provided in correlation with the numerical index acquired by the opportunity given as the numerical index acquisition effect. By correlating the number of satisfied specific conditions with a numerical index in this way, it is possible to diversify the content of opportunities for which specific conditions are satisfied, and for example, it is possible to execute the opportunity as a point acquisition effect such as a game effect. become. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

[Appendix S8]
Further comprising operating means (20, 21) operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note S7, wherein the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect in which a different result is obtained depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means (20, 21).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S8, the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect in which different results are obtained depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the operation means. That is, the numerical index acquisition effect is executed as a player participation type effect such as a player participation type game effect. As described above, the numerical index acquisition effect is determined by the player's operation to determine the progress process and result (numerical index acquired) of the effect, so that the interest in the numerical index acquisition effect is improved.

[Appendix S9]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note S7, wherein the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the obtainable numerical index is predetermined.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S9, the numerical index acquisition effect is an effect selected from a plurality of scenarios in which the numerical index that can be acquired is predetermined. That is, the numerical index acquisition effect is executed as a scenario management type effect such as a scenario management type game effect. As a result, even for a player who does not actively participate in a numerical index acquisition effect such as a game effect, a numerical index corresponding to a scenario determined from a plurality of scenarios is always given. Therefore, it is possible to give a privilege according to the numerical index even to a player who is not interested in the numerical index acquisition effect, and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix S10]
The supplementary opportunity providing means (51) provides compensation of the numerical index when the numerical index acquisition effect is finished before the elapse of the specific time, in additions S7 to S9. The game machine described in any one.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note S10, the numerical index is compensated when the numerical index acquisition effect is finished before the elapse of the specific time. In this way, when the specific time is ended before reaching the specific time, the numerical index is compensated, and when the specific time that can satisfy the specific condition becomes shorter than the theoretical time, the game is played. The disadvantage to the player is reduced, and the decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

[Appendix T1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball-in part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the second ball-in part. And a discharge part (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward the sphere region (G2),
The special game generation means (41) executes a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2), and then executes the special operation. A gaming machine characterized by generating a game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T1, the flow down of the game ball shot in the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball downflow delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the occurrence of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path. , It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

[Appendix T2]
Note T1 characterized in that the predetermined game state is a state in which the notification that the determination result by the determination means (41) notifies the determination result is to execute the special game has been completed by the notification game. Gaming machine described in.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T2, the notification that the predetermined game state is the informing game and the determination result is to execute the special game is finished. That is, when the condition device necessary for execution of the special game in which the accessory continuous operation device is operated operates, when the game ball enters the first entrance area or the second entrance area, a special game occurs. A special game is generated by the means. Therefore, when the condition device is operating, a special game can be executed by hitting a game ball on either the first movement path or the second movement path, and the occurrence of unnecessary special games is limited. it can.

[Appendix T3]
The gaming machine according to appendix T2, wherein the predetermined game state is a state before the execution of the special game is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T3, the predetermined game state is a state before the execution of the special game is started. That is, the predetermined game state is a state before the accessory continuous operation device is operated before the game ball is entered in the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area in a state in which the condition device is operated. is there. This prevents a new special game from being generated after the special game has occurred.

[Appendix T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes T1 to T3, wherein the predetermined determination process is a process of determining whether or not the special game can be generated.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T4, the predetermined determination process when the game ball is entered in the first entry region or the second entry region is a determination process of whether or not a special game can be generated. Is. Thereby, when the game ball is entered in the first entry area or the second entry area, the special game is generated when the special game can be generated, and the special game cannot be generated. Occasionally unnecessary occurrence of special games is prevented.

[Appendix T5]
In a state where the special game can be generated by the special game generating means (41), movement of the game ball on one of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) Is detected, the first entry area (G1) provided on the other one of the first travel route (R1) and the second travel route (R2) that is different from the one travel route. Alternatively, further provided is a limiting means (51) for limiting the generation of the special game by the special game generating means (41) based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry area (G2).
The predetermined determination process is based on the fact that the restriction means (51) causes a game ball to enter the first entrance area (12) and the second entrance area (G2). (41) The game machine according to Supplementary Note T4, which is processing for determining whether or not the occurrence of the special game is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T5, the predetermined determination process when the game ball is entered in the first entry area or the second entry area is the first entry area and the first entry area in the state where the special game can be generated. It is a process of determining whether or not the generation of the special game by the special game generation means based on the game ball is entered in the 2 ball entry area. That is, when the movement of the game ball on one of the movement paths is detected in a state where the special game can be generated, the generation of the special game by the game ball shot on the other movement path is limited. In this way, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected in the state where the special game can be generated, the generation of the special game by the game ball launched on the other movement route is limited, A special game is generated by a game ball that moves on the other movement route from the time when one movement route is selected until the special game is generated by the passage of the game ball to the entry area provided on the one movement route. Is prevented. As a result, after the movement route for generating the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement route that is against the player's will, that is, at the time (timing) when the special game is against the intention. It is prevented from being generated.

[Appendix T6]
Appendix T1 to Appendix, further comprising movement limiting means (48, 481) for limiting mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine according to any one of T5.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T6, mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement route and the second movement route is limited by the movement limiting means. In this way, the mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement route and the second movement route is restricted, so that the game balls shot on the first movement route are moved to the second movement route along the first movement route. It is prevented that the movement route is changed to the movement route, and conversely, the movement route of the game ball shot to the second movement route is changed to the first movement route during the movement of the second movement route. Is prevented. As a result, it is possible to generate a special game by passing the game ball to the entry area provided in the movement path where the game ball is first launched, and it is possible to appropriately impart the intended game property.

[Appendix T7]
The gaming machine according to appendix T6, wherein the movement restricting means (48, 481) defines between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2).

[Appendix T8]
The first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) define the movement route of the game ball to be launched in the right area of the game board (31),
The movement restricting means (48, 481) is a game between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) of the game ball shot in the right area of the game board (31). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T6 or Supplementary Note T7, wherein mutual movement of the balls is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T7 and supplementary note T8, the movement restricting means defines between the first movement route and the second movement route. In this way, the movement restricting means defines the space between the first travel route and the second travel route, so that the first travel route is defined by the configuration itself that defines the first travel route and the second travel route. Mutual movement of the game ball with the second movement route can be restricted.

[Appendix T9]
A display unit (341) for executing a predetermined effect,
If the game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) when the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect is ended. Production end means (51) for
9. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes T1 to T8, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T9, when the predetermined effect is executed, the game ball is entered in the first ball entering area or the second ball entering area, whereby the predetermined effect is ended. In this way, when the predetermined effect is executed, the game ball is entered in the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area to end the predetermined effect, for example, it is shot on the first movement route. Since the game ball that can be passed through the first ball entry area can immediately end the predetermined effect, the game ball launched on the second movement path is delayed in passing through the second ball entry area. Therefore, the predetermined effect cannot be immediately terminated. Therefore, the player can select the first movement route and the second movement route depending on whether or not he or she wants to confirm the predetermined effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix T10]
Note that the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). A gaming machine described in T9.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T10, the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that the special game is executed. In this way, the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification of the execution of the special game, so that the predetermined effect is appropriately performed without interfering with the effect executed in the notification game. I can do it.

[Appendix T11]
The game machine according to Appendix T10, wherein the effect ending means (51) ends the predetermined effect based on the execution of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T11, the predetermined effect is ended based on the execution of the special game. In this way, by ending the predetermined effect based on the execution of the special game, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect in the special game without disturbing the effect that the predetermined effect is executed in the special game.

[Appendix T12]
The predetermined effect is the second movement route (R2) when the notification that the determination result by the determination means (41) notifies that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished. The gaming machine according to supplementary note T10 or supplementary note T11, characterized in that the gaming machine includes an effect which is started upon detection of a gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T12, the predetermined effect includes an effect which is started when the game ball is detected in the second movement route after the end of the notification that the special game is executed. In this way, the predetermined effect includes the effect that is started upon the detection of the game ball on the second movement route after the end of the notification that the special game is to be executed, so that the game ball on the second movement route is included. The predetermined effect is executed while the flow of is delayed. As a result, the execution time of the predetermined effect can be set longer, various effects can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the player's interest in the predetermined effect can be improved, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix T13]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes T9 to T12, wherein the predetermined demonstration includes a demonstration to present at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating a payout performance.

[Appendix T14]
A storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability) determined to execute the special game (big hit game) by the determination means (41). ,
From the plurality of pieces of numerical value information stored in the storage means (41), one piece of numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game is selected. Selection means (41) for
Further equipped with,
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantage determination probability according to the one numerical value information selected by the selection means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix T13, wherein the performance information is information capable of identifying or inferring the one numerical value information.

[Appendix T15]
The gaming machine according to appendix T14, wherein the predetermined effect includes an effect of presenting at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information of the plurality of numerical information.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note T13 to Supplementary Note T15, a demonstration in which at least a part of the information capable of estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability is presented is executed as the predetermined demonstration. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix T16]
When the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect is applied when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2). Production ending means (51) for ending,
An effect re-execution means (51) which, when the predetermined effect is ended by the effect ending means (51), re-executes the predetermined effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes T9 to T15, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T16, by re-executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to secure many opportunities to confirm the predetermined effect. As a result, it is possible to improve interest in the game by the predetermined effect.

[Appendix T17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix T16, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined effect is ended by the effect ending means (51) before the end timing of the predetermined effect arrives.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T17, the predetermined condition is that the predetermined effect is ended before the end timing of the predetermined effect is reached. That is, the predetermined effect is re-executed when the predetermined effect is ended before the end timing of the predetermined effect is reached. In this way, the predetermined effect is re-executed when the predetermined effect is ended before the end timing of the predetermined effect is reached, so that even if the predetermined effect is interrupted in the middle, the predetermined effect is compensated for. Can be executed to the end. As a result, it becomes possible to further enhance the interest in the game by the predetermined effect.

[Appendix T18]
The predetermined effect is the first entry area (G1) or the first entry area (G1) from the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). It is executed in a specific period set in the period until the game ball passes through the second entrance area (G2),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note T16 or supplementary note T17, wherein the effect re-execution means re-executes the predetermined effect when the special game is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T18, from the end of the notification that the predetermined effect is the notification game and the determination result is to execute the special game, until the game ball passes through the first entrance area or the second entrance area. It is executed in a specific period set in the period, and the predetermined effect is re-executed when a special game is generated. In this way, the predetermined effect is executed in the specific period, and when the special game is generated, the predetermined effect is re-executed, so that the predetermined effect can be executed in the special game. In other words, when the predetermined effect is interrupted by the passage of the game ball to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, the game ball passes to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect in the generated special game. Accordingly, when the predetermined effect is ended, it is possible to re-execute the predetermined effect immediately after the end of the predetermined effect, the time for which the predetermined effect is interrupted can be shortened, and the predetermined effect is forcibly ended on the way. Even in such a case, similar to the case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed until the end, the predetermined effect is executed without a feeling of strangeness.

[Appendix T19]
The special game includes a plurality of special games with different player advantages.
The effect re-execution unit re-executes the predetermined effect when a specific special game of the plurality of special games is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the additional effect T18 is set forth. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T19, the predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game of a plurality of special games having different advantages for the player is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, when a specific special game of a plurality of special games with different player's advantage is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is re-executed, so that the specific special game is The predetermined effect is re-executed as a privilege for being executed.

[Appendix T20]
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether to execute the special game (big hit game) with a first probability based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the first special game (normal big hit) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means (41) has a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Including a second special game (probability variation big hit) to be transferred after the end of the special game to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game),
The gaming machine according to Appendix T19, wherein the specific special game is the first special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T20, it is determined that the special game is shifted to the first special game state after the special game is finished and the first special game state is shifted to the special game state after the special game is finished. Including the second special game that is transitioned to the second game state with a high probability of being, the predetermined effect is re-executed on condition that it is the first special game when the predetermined effect is forcibly ended. That is, when the first special game, which is more disadvantageous than the second game, is executed, the predetermined effect that is forcibly ended as the compensation is re-executed.

[Appendix T21]
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether to execute the special game (big hit game) with a first probability based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the first special game (normal big hit) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means (41) has a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Including a second special game (probability variation big hit) to be transferred after the end of the special game to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game),
The gaming machine according to Appendix T19, wherein the specific special game is the second special game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T21, it is determined that the special game is shifted to the first special game state after the special game is finished, and the special game is shifted to the special game state after the special game is finished. Including the second special game that is transitioned to the second game state with a high probability of being, the predetermined effect is re-executed on condition that it is the first special game when the predetermined effect is forcibly ended. That is, the predetermined effect that is forcibly ended when the second special game, which is more advantageous than the first game, is executed again. As a result, the privilege of re-execution of the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated in the case of the advantageous second special game is given, and the advantage of the second special game is further improved.

[Appendix T22]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes T16 to T21, characterized in that the predetermined presentation includes presentation of at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating a payout performance.

[Appendix T23]
A storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability) determined to execute the special game (big hit game) by the determination means (41). ,
From the plurality of pieces of numerical value information stored in the storage means (41), one piece of numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game is selected. Selection means (41) for
Further equipped with,
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantage determination probability according to the one numerical value information selected by the selection means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix T22, wherein the performance information is information capable of identifying or inferring the one numerical value information.

[Appendix T24]
The gaming machine according to appendix T23, wherein the predetermined effect includes an effect of presenting at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information of the plurality of numerical information.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note T22 to Supplementary Note T24, an effect in which at least a part of the information capable of estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability is presented is executed as the predetermined effect. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the predetermined performance is information capable of estimating the payout performance, the predetermined performance is re-executed after the predetermined performance is finished, so that there are many opportunities to infer the payout performance. It will be possible to enjoy the progress more.

[Appendix T25]
Note T1 characterized in that it further comprises a movable receiving member (80) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) and capable of receiving a game ball to the second moving path (R2). The gaming machine according to any one of T24.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T25, it is possible to receive the game ball on the second movement route by the movable receiving member provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area. In this way, the movable receiving member provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area allows the game ball to be received in the second moving path, so that the game ball is moved to the second moving path with a simple configuration. , It is possible to generate a special game by entering the game ball into the second entry area of the second movement route.

[Appendix T26]
The movable receiving member (80) is in a first state in which a game ball can be received in the second movement route (R2), and a second state in which the reception of the game ball in the second movement route (R2) is restricted. The gaming machine described in appendix T25, which is switchable between states.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T26, the movable receiving member can switch between the first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement path and the second state in which the reception of the game ball in the second movement path is restricted. Is. In this way, the movable receiving member can switch between the first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement route and the second state in which the reception of the game ball in the second movement route is restricted. In the first state, while allowing a special game by entering the game ball into the second entry area of the second movement route, in the second state, a game ball into the second entry area of the second movement route. It is possible to prevent the special game from being unnecessarily generated by entering the ball.

[Appendix T27]
The movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the first state, and limits the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the second state. The gaming machine described in appendix T26, which can be accepted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T27, the movable receiving member limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route in the first state, and allows the reception of the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the second state. Is. In this way, the movable receiving member limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route in the first state, and can accept the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the second state. , It is prevented that the game ball, which is launched in a state where the game ball is accepted in the first movement route, is not accepted in the second movement route against the intention of the player, and conversely, the game is played in the second movement route. It is prevented that the game ball, which is launched in a state where the ball is accepted, is accepted on the first movement path against the intention of the player.

[Appendix T28]
Further comprising a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the movable receiving member (80) between the first state and the second state,
The switching control means (51) is configured to notify the determination result by the determination means (41) by a notification game, and when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game ends, the movable receiving member ( 80) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes T25 to T27, characterized in that the switching control for 80) is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T28, switching control for the movable receiving member is started when the notification that the determination result by the notification game is to execute the special game ends. In this way, when the switching control for the movable receiving member is started by starting the switching control for the movable receiving member when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game It can be recognized that the special game can be generated. This makes it easier for the player to respond to the progress of the game, for example, whether or not the situation is one in which the player should hit the right side, and attempts to generate the special game in a state where the special game cannot be generated. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched on the movement route or the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) to the player in the state where the special game cannot be generated. ..

[Appendix T29]
The switching control means (51) controls the switching of the movable receiving member (80) when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) is detected. The gaming machine according to Appendix T28, which is terminated.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T29, the switching control of the movable receiving member is ended when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route is detected. In this way, when the movement control of the movable receiving member is ended when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route is detected, when the switching control of the movable reception member is ended. It is possible to recognize that it is not necessary to hit the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched into the first movement route and the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) received by the player.

[Appendix T30]
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a restriction means is further provided for restricting the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes T1 to T29, characterized in that.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T30, the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball being entered into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area when a predetermined condition is satisfied is restricted. In this way, by limiting the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball being entered into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first ball entry area and It is possible to prevent special games from being generated by entering game balls into a non-targeted ball area by entering a game ball into a target ball area of the second ball area. To be done.

[Appendix T31]
The gaming machine according to appendix T30, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (big hit game).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T31, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result of the determining means is the determination result of executing the special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game, so that the entrance area to be executed by the special game is the first entrance area or the second entrance area. It is limited to the other entrance area different from one entrance area. Therefore, a special game is generated by entering a game ball into the other target ball-entering area of the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area, and a game ball to one of the ball-entering areas other than the purpose It is prevented that a special game is generated by entering a ball.

[Appendix T32]
Note T31 characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is ended by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T32, the notification that the predetermined result is to execute the special game is completed by the notification game in which the predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the condition that the special game cannot be generated by including the notification that the predetermined result is the execution of the special game by the notification game in which the predetermined condition informs the judgment result by the judgment means. In, it is prevented that a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the other entry area.

[Appendix T33]
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and the first movement route (R1) after the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The movement of the game ball on one of the second moving routes (R2) is the one of the first moving route (R1) and the second moving route (R2) The gaming machine according to appendix T32, wherein the gaming machine is detected prior to the movement of the game ball on the other different movement route.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T33, when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is completed by the notification game, the movement of the game ball on one movement route is changed by the movement of the game ball on the other movement route. If detected before the movement, the occurrence of the special game due to the passage of the game ball in the entry area provided on the other movement route is limited. In this way, when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is completed by the notification game, the movement of the game ball on one movement route precedes the movement of the game ball on the other movement route. If it is detected, the occurrence of the special game due to the passage of the game ball in the entry area provided on the other movement route is limited, until one movement route is selected and the special game is generated. It is prevented that a special game is generated by the game ball moving on the other movement route in the meantime. As a result, after the movement route for generating the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement route against the player's will, that is, at the passage of time (timing) where the special game is against the intention. It is prevented from being generated.

[Appendix T34]
The one movement route is the second movement route (R2),
The gaming machine according to Appendix T33, wherein the other movement route is the first movement route (R1).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T34, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the game machine is shot on the first movement route. Occurrence of special games by game balls is restricted. Here, since the second movement route is a movement route in which the fall of the game ball is delayed, that is, the movement route in which the generation of the special game is delayed, the generation of the special game is delayed in the second movement route. When the game ball is shot on the first movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball that is later launched on the first movement route, even though the game ball is shot on the second movement route first. Is concerned. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later is high. Therefore, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, a special game by the game ball launched on the first movement route. By limiting the occurrence of, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired first by the game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case where the special game is likely to be generated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball in the movement route against the player's will. That is, the special game is prevented from being generated after a lapse of time (timing) against the intention.

[Appendix T35]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes T30 to T34, further comprising restriction releasing means for releasing the restriction on the occurrence of the special game when a specific condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T35, the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first entry area or the second entry area when the specific condition is satisfied is released from the restriction of the occurrence of the special game. To be done. In this way, the occurrence of the special game based on the game balls entering the first entry area or the second entry area when the specific condition is satisfied is canceled by the restriction of the occurrence of the special game. It is possible to change to the occurrence of the special game by the other entry area after the occurrence of the special game by the one entry area is selected.

[Appendix T36]
The gaming machine according to appendix T35, wherein the specific condition is a condition that can be established by a player.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T36, the specific condition is a condition that can be met by the player. In this way, since the specific condition is a condition that can be established by the player, the player can change the entry area in which the special game is generated by his or her intention. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix T37]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note T35 or supplementary note T36, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result of the determining means (41) is a determination result of executing the special game (big hit game).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T37, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game, so that the entrance area to be executed by the special game is the first entrance area or the second entrance area. It is limited to the other entrance area different from one entrance area. Therefore, a special game is generated by entering a game ball into the other target ball-entering area of the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area, and a game ball to one of the ball-entering areas other than the purpose It is prevented that a special game is generated by entering a ball.

[Appendix T38]
Note T37 characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game ends by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T38, the notification that the predetermined result is the special game is executed by the notification game in which the predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means. In this way, the condition that the special game cannot be generated by including the notification that the predetermined result is the execution of the special game by the notification game in which the predetermined condition informs the judgment result by the judgment means. In, it is prevented that a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the other entry area.

[Appendix T39]
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and the first movement route (R1) after the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The movement of the game ball on one of the second moving routes (R2) is the one of the first moving route (R1) and the second moving route (R2) The gaming machine according to appendix T38, wherein the gaming machine is detected prior to the movement of the game ball on the other different movement route.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T39, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected in a state where the determination result is a state in which the special game can be generated by the notification game in which the predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means, the other The detection of passage of the game ball in the entry area provided on the movement route of is restricted. In this way, in the state where the special game can be generated, the detection of the passage of the game ball in the entry area provided on the other movement route is limited, so that one movement route is selected and the special game is generated. By the simple control, the restriction that the special game is generated by the game ball moving on the other movement path can be realized by the time it is done.

[Appendix T40]
The specific condition is from the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41) to the execution of the special game. In the meantime, the gaming machine according to appendix T39, wherein movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected in the other movement path.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T40, the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected in the other movement path before the special game is generated (the accessory continuous operation device is operated) (the predetermined number is set in the other movement path). When a specific condition that can be established by the player, such as the game ball being fired, is established, it is possible to later change the movement route through which the special game occurs (the accessory continuous operation device operates). .. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix T41]
The one entrance area is the first entrance area (G1),
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note T40, wherein the other entry area is the second entry area (G2).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T41, one entry area is the first entry area, and the other entry area is the second entry area. Here, the second movement route provided with the second entry area is a movement route in which the flow of the game balls is delayed, that is, a movement route in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed, When a game ball is shot on the first movement route while the generation is delayed, a game ball is shot on the first movement route later, even though the game ball was first fired on the second movement route. There is concern that a special game will be generated by the ball. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later is high. Therefore, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, a special game by the game ball launched on the first movement route. By limiting the occurrence of, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired first by the game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case where the special game is likely to be generated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball in the movement route against the player's will. That is, it is prevented that the special game is operated at an unexpected time (timing).

  In addition, one of the ball entering areas is the first ball entering area and the other ball entering area is the second ball entering area, so that the flow of the game ball on the second movement route in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed is reduced. If it is desired to immediately generate a special game while being delayed, it is possible to immediately generate the special game by launching a game ball to the first movement route.

[Appendix T42]
The player is able to select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) the game ball is to be moved to, wherein the player can select either T1 to T41. Game machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T42, the player can select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is moved to. In this way, the player can select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is to be moved to, so that the player selects the length of time until the special game is executed. It will be possible. As a result, the player's intention is reflected in the selection of the time until the special game is executed, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling stress.

[Appendix T43]
It is characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) the game ball is to be moved by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. The gaming machine described in Appendix T42.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T43, the player can select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is to be moved by, by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. In this way, the player can select either the first movement route or the second movement route depending on the shooting intensity of the game ball, so that the length of time until the special game is executed can be easily selected. Will be possible.

[Appendix T44]
A first state provided on the upstream side of the second entry area (G2) and capable of accepting a game ball to the second movement route (R2), and a game ball to the first movement route (R1) The gaming machine according to appendix T42, further comprising a movable receiving member (80) capable of switching between a second state capable of receiving and.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T44, the movable receiving member can switch between the first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement path and the second state in which the game ball can be received in the first movement path. .. In this way, the movable receiving member allows switching between the first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement path and the second state in which the game ball can be received in the first movement path. By firing the game ball while confirming the attitude of the receiving member, the first movement route and the second movement route can be selected, so that it is possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed. Become.

[Appendix T45]
The movable receiving member (80) limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the first state, and limits the game ball to the second movement route (R2) in the second state. The gaming machine according to appendix T44, which limits acceptance.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note T45, the movable receiving member limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route in the first state, and limits the acceptance of the game ball to the second movement route in the second state. In this way, by the movable receiving member, the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route is restricted in the first state, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second movement route is restricted in the second state. It is prevented that a game ball that is launched in a state where the game ball is accepted in the movement route is not accepted in the second movement route against the intention of the player, and conversely, the game ball is accepted in the second movement route. It is prevented that the game ball that is fired in the state of being accepted is received on the first movement path against the intention of the player.

[Appendix U1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
Movement limiting means (48, 481) for limiting the mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2),
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball-in part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the second ball-in part. And a discharge part (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward the sphere region (G2),
The special game generation means (41) executes a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2), and then executes the special operation. A gaming machine characterized by generating a game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note U1, the flow down of the game ball shot into the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball downflow delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the occurrence of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path. , It becomes possible to execute various events while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note U1, the movement restricting means restricts mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement route and the second movement route. In this way, the mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement route and the second movement route is restricted, so that the game balls shot on the first movement route are moved to the second movement route along the first movement route. It is prevented that the movement route is changed to the movement route, and conversely, the movement route of the game ball shot to the second movement route is changed to the first movement route during the movement of the second movement route. Is prevented. As a result, it is possible to generate a special game by passing the game ball to the entry area provided in the movement path where the game ball is first launched, and it is possible to appropriately impart the intended game property.

[Appendix U2]
The gaming machine according to appendix U1, wherein the movement restricting means (48, 481) defines between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2).

[Appendix U3]
The first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) define the movement route of the game ball to be launched in the right area of the game board (31),
The movement restricting means (48, 481) is a game between the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) of the game ball shot in the right area of the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix U1, wherein mutual movement of the balls is restricted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note U2 and supplementary note U3, the movement restricting means defines between the first movement route and the second movement route. In this way, the movement restricting means defines the space between the first travel route and the second travel route, so that the first travel route is defined by the configuration itself that defines the first travel route and the second travel route. Mutual movement of the game ball with the second movement route can be restricted.

[Appendix V1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
A display unit (341) for executing a predetermined effect,
If the game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) when the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect is ended. Production end means (51) for
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entering part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the ball entering area. And a discharge unit (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward (G1, G2),
The special game generation means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the entry area (G1, G2). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note V1, the flow down of the game ball shot in the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball downflow delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the generation of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path, Various events can be executed while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note V1, when the predetermined effect is executed, the game ball is inserted into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, whereby the predetermined effect is ended. In this way, when the predetermined effect is executed, the game ball is entered in the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area to end the predetermined effect, for example, it is shot on the first movement route. Since the game ball that can be passed through the first ball entry area can immediately end the predetermined effect, the game ball launched on the second movement path is delayed in passing through the second ball entry area. Therefore, the predetermined effect cannot be immediately terminated. Therefore, the player can select the first movement route and the second movement route depending on whether or not he or she wants to confirm the predetermined effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix V2]
Note that the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). A gaming machine described in V1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note V2, the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification that the special game is executed. In this way, the predetermined effect is executed based on the end of the notification of the execution of the special game, so that the predetermined effect is appropriately performed without interfering with the effect executed in the notification game. I can do it.

[Appendix V3]
The gaming machine according to Appendix V2, wherein the effect ending means (51) ends the predetermined effect based on the execution of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note V3, the predetermined effect is ended based on the execution of the special game. In this way, by ending the predetermined effect based on the execution of the special game, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect in the special game without disturbing the effect that the predetermined effect is executed in the special game.

[Appendix V4]
The predetermined effect is the second movement route (R2) when the notification that the determination result by the determination means (41) notifies that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished. The gaming machine according to supplementary note V2 or supplementary note V3, characterized in that the game machine includes an effect which is started upon detection of a gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note V4, the predetermined effect includes an effect which is started when the game ball is detected in the second movement route after the end of the notification that the special game is executed. In this way, the predetermined effect includes the effect that is started upon the detection of the game ball on the second movement route after the end of the notification that the special game is to be executed, so that the game ball on the second movement route is included. The predetermined effect is executed while the flow of is delayed. As a result, the execution time of the predetermined effect can be set long, various effects can be executed as the predetermined effect, and the player's interest in the predetermined effect can be improved, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

[Appendix V5]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes V1 to V4, characterized in that the predetermined presentation includes an presentation of at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating a payout performance.

[Appendix V6]
A storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability) determined to execute the special game (big hit game) by the determination means (41). ,
From the plurality of pieces of numerical value information stored in the storage means (41), one piece of numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game is selected. Selection means (41) for
Further equipped with,
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantage determination probability according to the one numerical value information selected by the selection means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix V5, wherein the performance information is information capable of specifying or inferring the one numerical value information.

[Appendix V7]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note V6, wherein the predetermined effect includes an effect of presenting at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information among the plurality of numerical information.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note V5 to Supplementary Note V7, an effect in which at least a part of the information capable of estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability is presented is executed as the predetermined effect. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix W1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
A display unit (341) for executing a predetermined effect,
When the predetermined effect is executed on the display means (341), the predetermined effect is applied when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2). Production ending means (51) for ending,
An effect re-execution means (51) which, when the predetermined effect is ended by the effect ending means (51), re-executes the predetermined effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition;
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball entering part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the ball entering area. And a discharge unit (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward (G1, G2),
The special game generation means (41) generates the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the entry area (G1, G2). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note W1, the flow down of the game ball shot in the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball downflow delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the generation of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path, Various events can be executed while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note W1, when the predetermined effect is executed, the game ball is entered in the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, whereby the predetermined effect is ended. In this way, when the predetermined effect is executed, the game ball is entered in the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area to end the predetermined effect, for example, it is shot on the first movement route. Since the game ball that can be passed through the first ball entry area can immediately end the predetermined effect, the game ball launched on the second movement path is delayed in passing through the second ball entry area. Therefore, the predetermined effect cannot be immediately terminated. Therefore, the player can select the first movement route and the second movement route depending on whether or not he or she wants to confirm the predetermined effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note W1, the predetermined effect is re-executed, so that many opportunities for confirming the predetermined effect can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve interest in the game by the predetermined effect.

[Appendix W2]
The gaming machine according to Appendix W1, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined effect is ended by the effect ending means (51) before the end timing of the predetermined effect arrives.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note W2, the predetermined condition is that the predetermined effect is ended before the end timing of the predetermined effect is reached. That is, the predetermined effect is re-executed when the predetermined effect is ended before the end timing of the predetermined effect is reached. In this way, the predetermined effect is re-executed when the predetermined effect is ended before the end timing of the predetermined effect is reached, so that even if the predetermined effect is interrupted in the middle, the predetermined effect is compensated for. Can be executed to the end. As a result, it becomes possible to further enhance the interest in the game by the predetermined effect.

[Appendix W3]
The predetermined effect is the first entry area (G1) or the first entry area (G1) from the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). It is executed in a specific period set in the period until the game ball passes through the second entrance area (G2),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note W1 or supplementary note W2, wherein the performance re-execution means re-executes the predetermined performance when the special game is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note W3, from the end of the notification that the predetermined effect is the notification game that the determination result is to execute the special game until the game ball passes through the first entrance area or the second entrance area. It is executed in a specific period set in the period, and when a special game is generated, the predetermined effect is re-executed. In this way, the predetermined effect is executed in the specific period, and when the special game is generated, the predetermined effect is re-executed, so that the predetermined effect can be executed in the special game. In other words, when the predetermined effect is interrupted by the passage of the game ball to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area, the game ball passes to the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect in the generated special game. Accordingly, when the predetermined effect is ended, it is possible to re-execute the predetermined effect immediately after the end of the predetermined effect, the time for which the predetermined effect is interrupted can be shortened, and the predetermined effect is forcibly ended on the way. Even in such a case, similar to the case where the predetermined effect is continuously executed until the end, the predetermined effect is executed without a feeling of strangeness.

[Appendix W4]
The special game includes a plurality of special games with different player advantages.
The effect re-execution means re-executes the predetermined effect when a specific special game of the plurality of special games is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the additional effect W3 is described. Amusement machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note W4, the predetermined effect is re-executed when a specific special game of a plurality of special games having different advantages for the player is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Thus, when a specific special game of a plurality of special games with different player's advantage is generated when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect is re-executed, so that the specific special game is The predetermined effect is re-executed as a privilege for being executed.

[Appendix W5]
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether to execute the special game (big hit game) with a first probability based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the first special game (normal big hit) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means (41) has a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Including a second special game (probability variation big hit) to be transferred after the end of the special game to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game),
The specific special game is the first special game, the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note W4.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note W5, it is determined that the special game is shifted to the first special game state after the special game is finished, and the special game is shifted to the special game state from the first game state after the special game is finished. Including the second special game that is transitioned to the second game state with a high probability of being, the predetermined effect is re-executed on condition that it is the first special game when the predetermined effect is forcibly ended. That is, when the first special game, which is more disadvantageous than the second game, is executed, the predetermined effect that is forcibly ended as the compensation is re-executed.

[Appendix W6]
The special game is a first determination state (low probability mode) in which the determination means (41) determines whether to execute the special game (big hit game) with a first probability based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. Based on the first special game (normal big hit) that is transferred after the end of the special game and the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means (41) has a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Including a second special game (probability variation big hit) to be transferred after the end of the special game to a second determination state (high probability mode) in which it is determined whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game),
The gaming machine according to appendix W4, wherein the specific special game is the second special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note W6, it is determined that the special game is shifted to the first special game state after the special game is finished, and the special game is shifted to the special game state from the first game state after the special game is finished. Including the second special game that is transitioned to the second game state with a high probability of being, the predetermined effect is re-executed on condition that it is the first special game when the predetermined effect is forcibly ended. That is, the predetermined effect that is forcibly ended when the second special game, which is more advantageous than the first game, is executed again. As a result, the privilege of re-execution of the predetermined effect that is forcibly terminated in the case of the advantageous second special game is given, and the advantage of the second special game is further improved.

[Appendix W7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes W1 to W6, characterized in that the predetermined demonstration includes a demonstration to present at least a part of performance information that is an index indicating a payout performance.

[Appendix W8]
A storage means (41) for storing a plurality of numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous determination probabilities (big hit probability) determined to execute the special game (big hit game) by the determination means (41). ,
From the plurality of pieces of numerical value information stored in the storage means (41), one piece of numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with which the determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game is selected. Selection means (41) for
Further equipped with,
The determination means (41) determines whether or not to execute the special game according to the advantage determination probability according to the one numerical value information selected by the selection means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix W7, wherein the performance information is information capable of specifying or inferring the one numerical value information.

[Appendix W9]
The gaming machine according to appendix W8, wherein the predetermined effect includes an effect of presenting at least a part of numerical information other than the one numerical information of the plurality of numerical information.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note W7 to Supplementary Note W9, an effect in which at least a part of the information capable of estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability is presented is executed as the predetermined effect. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the progress of the game by estimating the payout performance such as one numerical value information corresponding to the advantage determination probability, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the predetermined performance is information capable of estimating the payout performance, the predetermined performance is re-executed after the predetermined performance is finished, so that there are many opportunities to infer the payout performance. It will be possible to enjoy the progress more.

[Appendix X1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
A movable receiving member (80) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) and capable of receiving a game ball to the second moving route (R2),
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball-in part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the second ball-in part. And a discharge part (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward the sphere region (G2),
The special game generation means (41) executes a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2), and then executes the special operation. A gaming machine characterized by generating a game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note X1, the flow down of the game ball shot in the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball downflow delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the generation of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path, Various events can be executed while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note X1, it is possible to receive the game ball on the second movement route by the movable receiving member provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area. In this way, the movable receiving member provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area allows the game ball to be received in the second moving path, so that the game ball is moved to the second moving path with a simple configuration. , It is possible to generate a special game by entering the game ball into the second entry area of the second movement route.

[Appendix X2]
The movable receiving member (80) is in a first state in which a game ball can be received in the second movement route (R2), and a second state in which the reception of the game ball in the second movement route (R2) is restricted. The gaming machine according to appendix X1, wherein the gaming machine can be switched between states.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note X2, the movable receiving member can switch between a first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement path and a second state in which the reception of the game ball in the second movement path is restricted. Is. In this way, the movable receiving member can switch between the first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement route and the second state in which the reception of the game ball in the second movement route is restricted. In the first state, while allowing a special game by entering the game ball into the second entry area of the second movement route, in the second state, a game ball into the second entry area of the second movement route. It is possible to prevent the special game from being inadvertently generated by entering the ball.

[Appendix X3]
The movable receiving member (80) restricts the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the first state, and limits the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the second state. The game machine described in appendix X2, which is capable of being accepted.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note X3, the movable receiving member limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route in the first state, and allows the reception of the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the second state. Is. In this way, the movable receiving member limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route in the first state, and can accept the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the second state. , It is prevented that the game ball, which is launched in a state where the game ball is accepted in the first movement route, is not accepted in the second movement route against the intention of the player, and conversely, the game is played in the second movement route. It is prevented that the game ball, which is launched in a state where the ball is accepted, is accepted on the first movement path against the intention of the player.

[Appendix X4]
Further comprising a switching control means (51) for controlling switching of the movable receiving member (80) between the first state and the second state,
The switching control means (51) is configured to notify the determination result by the determination means (41) by a notification game, and when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game ends, the movable receiving member ( 80) The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes X1 to X3, characterized in that switching control is started.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note X4, switching control for the movable receiving member is started when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is completed by the notification game. In this way, when the switching control for the movable receiving member is started by starting the switching control for the movable receiving member when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game It can be recognized that the special game can be generated. This makes it easier for the player to respond to the progress of the game, for example, whether or not the situation is one in which the player should hit the right side, and attempts to generate the special game in a state where the special game cannot be generated. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched on the movement route or the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) to the player in the state where the special game cannot be generated. ..

[Appendix X5]
The switching control means (51) controls the switching of the movable receiving member (80) when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route (R1) or the second movement route (R2) is detected. The gaming machine described in Appendix X4, which is terminated.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note X5, the switching control of the movable receiving member is ended when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route is detected. In this way, when the movement control of the movable receiving member is ended when the movement of the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route is detected, when the switching control of the movable reception member is ended. It is possible to recognize that it is not necessary to hit the game ball on the first movement route or the second movement route. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily launched into the first movement route and the second movement route, and reduce the disadvantage (lowering of the base (ball-out rate)) received by the player.

[Appendix Y1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball-in part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the second ball-in part. And a discharge part (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward the sphere region (G2),
The special game generation means (41) executes a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2), and then executes the special operation. Generate games,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a restriction means is further provided for restricting the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Y1, the flow down of the game ball launched into the second entry area is delayed by the game ball flow-down delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the generation of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path, Various events can be executed while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note Y1, the occurrence of a special game based on the game ball being entered into the first ball entering area or the second ball entering area when the predetermined condition is satisfied is restricted. In this way, by limiting the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball being entered into the first ball entry area or the second ball entry area when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first ball entry area and It is possible to prevent special games from being generated by entering game balls into a non-targeted ball area by entering a game ball into a target ball area of the second ball area. To be done.

[Appendix Y2]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note Y1, wherein the predetermined condition includes that the determination result of the determining means (41) is a determination result of executing the special game (big hit game).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Y2, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result of the determining means is the determination result of executing the special game. In this way, the predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game, so that the entrance area to be executed by the special game is the first entrance area or the second entrance area. It is limited to the other entrance area different from one entrance area. Therefore, a special game is generated by entering a game ball into the other target ball-entering area of the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area, and a game ball to one of the ball-entering areas other than the purpose It is prevented that a special game is generated by entering a ball.

[Appendix Y3]
The additional condition Y2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is ended by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The game machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Y3, the notification that the predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means includes the termination of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game. In this way, the condition that the special game cannot be generated by including the notification that the predetermined result is the execution of the special game by the notification game in which the predetermined condition informs the judgment result by the judgment means. At, it is possible to prevent a special game from being generated by the entry of the game ball into the other entry area.

[Appendix Y4]
The predetermined condition is that the first movement route (R1) and the first movement route (R1) after the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The movement of the game ball on one of the second moving routes (R2) is the one of the first moving route (R1) and the second moving route (R2) The gaming machine according to appendix Y3, wherein the gaming machine is detected prior to the movement of the game ball on the other different movement route.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Y4, when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is finished by the notification game, the movement of the game ball on one movement route is changed by the movement of the game ball on the other movement route. If detected before the movement, the occurrence of the special game due to the passage of the game ball in the entry area provided on the other movement route is limited. In this way, when the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is completed by the notification game, the movement of the game ball on one movement route precedes the movement of the game ball on the other movement route. If it is detected, the occurrence of the special game due to the passage of the game ball in the entry area provided on the other movement route is limited, until one movement route is selected and the special game is generated. It is prevented that a special game is generated by the game ball moving on the other movement route in the meantime. As a result, after the movement route for generating the special game is selected, the special game is generated by the game ball on the movement route against the player's will, that is, at the passage of time (timing) where the special game is against the intention. It is prevented from being generated.

[Appendix Y5]
The one movement route is the second movement route (R2),
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Y4, wherein the other movement route is the first movement route (R1).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Y5, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the game machine is shot on the first movement route. Occurrence of special games by game balls is restricted. Here, since the second movement route is a movement route in which the fall of the game ball is delayed, that is, the movement route in which the generation of the special game is delayed, the generation of the special game is delayed in the second movement route. When the game ball is shot on the first movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball that is later launched on the first movement route, even though the game ball is shot on the second movement route first. Is concerned. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later is high. Therefore, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, a special game by the game ball launched on the first movement route. By limiting the occurrence of, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired first by the game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case where the special game is likely to be generated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball in the movement route against the player's will. That is, the special game is prevented from being generated after a lapse of time (timing) against the intention.

[Appendix Z1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball-in part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the second ball-in part. And a discharge part (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward the sphere region (G2),
The special game generation means (41) executes a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2), and then executes the special operation. Generate games,
Limiting means for limiting the occurrence of the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) when the first predetermined condition is satisfied. ,
Restriction releasing means for releasing the restriction on the occurrence of the special game when a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z1, the flow down of the game ball shot in the second ball entry area is delayed by the game ball downflow delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the generation of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path, Various events can be executed while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note Z1, the occurrence of a special game based on a game ball being entered in the first entry area or the second entry area when the first predetermined condition is satisfied is restricted. In this way, when the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first ball entering area or the second ball entering area is restricted, so that the first ball entering A special game is generated by entering a game ball into a target entrance area of the area and the second entrance area, and a special game is generated by entering a game ball into a non-target entrance area. Is prevented.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z1, when a second predetermined condition is satisfied, a special game is generated based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entry area or the second entry area. The restriction of is lifted. In this way, when the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the occurrence of the special game based on the game ball entering the first entry area or the second entry area is released from the restriction of the occurrence of the special game. This makes it possible to change to the occurrence of the special game by the other entry area after the occurrence of the special game by the one entry area is selected.

[Appendix Z2]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z1, wherein the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by a player.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note Z2, the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be satisfied by the player. As described above, since the second predetermined condition is a condition that can be established by the player, the player can change the entry area in which the special game is generated, by his / her intention. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix Z3]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note Z1 or supplementary note Z2, wherein the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determining means (41) is a determination result for executing the special game (big hit game).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z3, the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes that the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the special game, so that the entrance region to be executed by the special game is the first entrance region and the second entrance region. One of the entrance areas is limited to the other entrance area. Therefore, a special game is generated by entering a game ball into the other target ball-entering area of the first ball-entering area and the second ball-entering area, and a game ball to one of the ball-entering areas other than the purpose It is prevented that a special game is generated by entering a ball.

[Appendix Z4]
The first predetermined condition includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game is ended by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). The game machine described in Z3.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z4, the notification that the first predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means includes that the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game ends. In this way, the first predetermined condition includes the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means, so that the special game can be generated. It is prevented that a special game is generated by the entry of the game ball into the other entry area in the state where the special game cannot be performed.

[Appendix Z5]
The first predetermined condition is the first movement route (R1) after the notification that the determination result by the determination means (41) notifies that the determination result is to execute the special game. ) And the movement of the game ball on one movement route of the second movement route (R2) is the one movement route of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z4, wherein the gaming machine is detected prior to the movement of the game ball on the other movement route different from.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z5, when the movement of the game ball on one movement route is detected in the state where the determination result is the state where the special game can be generated by the notification game in which the first predetermined condition notifies the determination result by the determination means. , Detection of passage of a game ball in the ball entry area provided on the other movement route is limited. In this way, in the state where the special game can be generated, the detection of the passage of the game ball in the entry area provided on the other movement route is limited, so that one movement route is selected and the special game is generated. By the simple control, the restriction that the special game is generated by the game ball moving on the other movement path can be realized by the time it is done.

[Appendix Z6]
The second predetermined condition is that the special game is executed after the end of the notification that the determination result is to execute the special game by the notification game that notifies the determination result by the determination means (41). Up to, the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected in the other movement path, the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z5.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z6, the movement of a predetermined number of game balls is detected on the other movement route before the accessory continuous operation device is activated (a predetermined number of game balls are launched on the other movement route). By satisfying a predetermined condition that can be established by the player, such as the above, it is possible to later change the movement route for operating the accessory continuous operation device. As a result, the player can change the movement route according to his / her own intention when he / she selects the movement route incorrectly or changes his / her mind after selecting the movement route. The convenience is improved.

[Appendix Z7]
The one entrance area is the first entrance area (G1),
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z6, wherein the other ball entry area is the second ball entry area (G2).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note Z7, one entry area is the first entry area and the other entry area is the second entry area. Here, the second movement route provided with the second entry area is a movement route in which the flow of the game balls is delayed, that is, a movement route in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed, When a game ball is shot on the first movement route while the generation is delayed, a game ball is shot on the first movement route later, even though the game ball was first fired on the second movement route. There is concern that a special game will be generated by the ball. That is, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected. Compared to the case where the movement of the game ball on the first movement path is detected before being performed, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired later is high. Therefore, when the movement of the game ball on the second movement route is detected before the movement of the game ball on the first movement route is detected, a special game by the game ball launched on the first movement route. By limiting the occurrence of, the possibility that a special game will be generated by the game ball that is fired first by the game ball that is fired later is reduced. In this way, by responding to the case where the special game is likely to be generated by the game ball shot in the undesired movement route, the special game is generated by the game ball in the movement route against the player's will. That is, it is prevented that the special game is operated at an unexpected time (timing).

  In addition, one of the ball entering areas is the first ball entering area and the other ball entering area is the second ball entering area, so that the flow of the game ball on the second movement route in which the occurrence of the special game is delayed is reduced. If it is desired to immediately generate a special game while being delayed, it is possible to immediately generate the special game by launching a game ball to the first movement route.

[Appendix AA1]
Determination means (41) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery),
A first entry area (G1), which is provided on a first movement route (R1) in which a game ball can move, and in which the special game can be generated based on the entry of the game ball,
A second entry area (G2) provided on a second movement path (R2) in which the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generating means (41) for generating the special game based on the fact that a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2) in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means (60, 70) provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area (G2) for delaying the downflow of the game ball,
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means (60, 70) includes a ball-in part (601, 485) for receiving the game ball, a rolling part (603, 702) for rolling the game ball in a predetermined period, and the second ball-in part. And a discharge part (602, 701) for discharging the game balls one by one toward the sphere region (G2),
The special game generation means (41) executes a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area (G1) or the second entrance area (G2), and then executes the special operation. Generate games,
A gaming machine, wherein a player can select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) the game ball is moved to.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note AA1, the flow down of the game ball launched into the second entry area is delayed by the game ball flow-down delay means. Therefore, compared to the time until the game ball moving on the first movement route enters the first entry region, until the game ball moving on the second movement route enters the second entry region The time will be longer. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the progress of the game is different depending on whether the game ball is shot on the first movement route and when the game ball is shot on the second movement route. For example, it is possible to immediately generate a special game by launching a game ball on the first movement path, while delaying the generation of a special game by firing a game ball on the second movement path, Various events can be executed while the occurrence of the special game is delayed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note AA1, the player can select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is moved to. In this way, the player can select which of the first movement route and the second movement route the game ball is to be moved to, so that the player selects the length of time until the special game is executed. It will be possible. As a result, the player's intention is reflected in the selection of the time until the special game is executed, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling stress.

[Appendix AA2]
It is characterized in that the player can select which of the first movement route (R1) and the second movement route (R2) the game ball is to be moved by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball. The gaming machine described in Appendix AA1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note AA2, the player can select which of the first moving path and the second moving path the game ball is to be moved by adjusting the firing strength of the game ball. In this way, the player can select either the first movement route or the second movement route depending on the shooting intensity of the game ball, so that the length of time until the special game is executed can be easily selected. Will be possible.

[Appendix AA3]
A first state provided on the upstream side of the second entry area (G2) and capable of accepting a game ball to the second movement route (R2), and a game ball to the first movement route (R1) The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note AA1, further comprising a movable receiving member (80) capable of switching between a second state capable of receiving and.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note AA3, the movable receiving member can switch between a first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement path and a second state in which the game ball can be received in the first movement path. .. In this way, the movable receiving member allows switching between the first state in which the game ball can be received in the second movement path and the second state in which the game ball can be received in the first movement path. By firing the game ball while confirming the attitude of the receiving member, the first movement route and the second movement route can be selected, so that it is possible to easily select the length of time until the special game is executed. Become.

[Appendix AA4]
The movable receiving member (80) limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route (R1) in the first state, and limits the game ball to the second movement route (R2) in the second state. The gaming machine described in appendix AA3, which limits acceptance.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note AA4, the movable receiving member limits the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route in the first state, and limits the acceptance of the game ball to the second movement route in the second state. In this way, by the movable receiving member, the acceptance of the game ball to the first movement route is restricted in the first state, and the acceptance of the game ball to the second movement route is restricted in the second state. It is prevented that a game ball that is launched in a state where the game ball is accepted in the movement route is not accepted in the second movement route against the intention of the player, and conversely, the game ball is accepted in the second movement route. It is prevented that the game ball that is fired in the state of being accepted is received on the first movement path against the intention of the player.

10: Gaming machine 31: Gaming board 310: Decoration part 312: Outer rail 316: Variable winning opening 319: Open / close door 341: Design display part 35: Lamp display part 351: First individual lamp part 352: Second individual lamp part 353 : Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp section 355: Fifth individual lamp section 356: Sixth individual lamp section 39: 7-segment display section A to G: Segment 4: Main control unit 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
47: ROM
48: Branching unit 5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 60: One-hole clune device 70: Rotating body 701: Housing part 80: Sorting member R1: First movement route R2; Second movement route Rs1: First route detection sensor Rs2: Second route detection sensor G1: 1st role continuous operation gate (1st role continuous operation gate)
Gs1: First role continuous operation gate sensor (first role continuous gate sensor)
G2: 2nd role continuous operation gate (2nd role continuous operation gate)
Gs2: Second role continuous operation gate sensor (second role continuous gate sensor)

Claims (3)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the determination condition,
A first ball entering area in which a game ball is provided on a movable first moving path and which can generate the special game based on a ball entering the game ball,
A second entry area provided on the second movement path where the game ball can move, and capable of generating the special game based on the entry of the game ball,
Special game generation means for generating the special game based on a game ball being entered in the first entry area or the second entry area in a predetermined game state,
A game ball downflow delay means which is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entering area and delays downflow of the game ball,
Movement limiting means for limiting mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement path and the second movement path,
Equipped with
The game ball flow-down delay means includes a ball-in part that receives the game ball, a rolling part that rolls the game ball in a predetermined period, and a discharge part that discharges the game ball one by one toward the second ball-in area. And have,
The special game generating means is configured to generate the special game after executing a predetermined determination process when a game ball is entered in the first entrance area or the second entrance area. Amusement machine.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the movement restricting unit defines a space between the first movement path and the second movement path. The first movement route and the second movement route define a movement route of a game ball to be launched in the right area of the game board,
The movement limiting means limits mutual movement of the game balls between the first movement path and the second movement path of the game balls that are shot in the right area of the game board. The gaming machine described in 1.

Images